Cisco Network Modules

Hardware Installation Guide

For the Cisco 2600 Series, Cisco 2800 Series, Cisco 3600 Series,
Cisco 3700 Series, and Cisco 3800 Series Routers, and the Cisco MWR
1941-DC Mobile Wireless Edge Router

Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 526-4100

Text Part Number: OL-2485-20

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required
to correct the interference at their own expense.

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not
installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B digital
devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television
communications at your own expense.

You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its
peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:

• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.

• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.

• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.

• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits
controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)

Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public
domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

CCVP, the Cisco logo, and Welcome to the Human Network are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn is a service mark of
Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Access Registrar, Aironet, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, CCSP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS,
Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, Follow Me
Browsing, FormShare, GigaDrive, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, iQuick Study, LightStream, Linksys,
MeetingPlace, MGX, Networkers, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, PIX, ProConnect, ScriptShare, SMARTnet, StackWise, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet
Quotient, and TransPath are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.

All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship
between Cisco and any other company. (0711R)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

Copyright © 2007 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
 Preface

This preface describes the objectives and organization of this guide and explains how to find additional
information on related products and services.

Audience
This publication is designed for people who have some experience installing networking equipment such
as routers, hubs, servers, and switches. The person installing the device should be familiar with
electronic circuitry and wiring practices and have experience as an electronic or electromechanical
technician.

Document Organization
See Table 1-6 in Chapter 1, “Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers,” for a list
of network modules supported by Cisco routers.
See Chapter 2, “Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers,” for instructions on
installing network modules in your router.
See Chapter 3 through Chapter 29 for information about connecting network modules to the network.
See the software configuration guides for Cisco 2600 series, Cisco 2800 series, Cisco 3600 series, Cisco
3700 series, and Cisco 3800 series routers for an overview of network module configuration procedures
and information on configuring individual network module interfaces. To obtain this publication, see the
“Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
See the Cisco MWR 1941-DC Mobile Wireless Edge Router Software Configuration Guide for an
overview of network module configuration procedures and information on configuring individual
network module interfaces on the Cisco MWR 1941-DC router. To obtain this publication, see the
“Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.

Document Conventions
This publication uses the following conventions to convey instructions and information.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 iii
 Preface
Document Conventions

Table 1 Document Conventions

Convention Description
boldface font Commands and keywords.
italic font Variables for which you supply values.
[ ] Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.
{x | y | z} A choice of required keywords appears in braces separated by vertical bars. You
must select one.
screen font Examples of information displayed on the screen.
boldface screen Examples of information you must enter.
font

< > Nonprinting characters, for example passwords, appear in angle brackets in
contexts where italic font is not available.
[ ] Default responses to system prompts appear in square brackets.

Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to additional information and
material.

Timesaver Means the action described saves time. You can save time by performing the action described in the
paragraph.

Tip Means the following information can help you solve a problem.

Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

iv OL-2485-20
Preface
Document Conventions

Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents. To see translations of the warnings that appear in
this publication, refer to the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device.

Note: SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Note: This documentation is to be used in conjunction with the specific product installation guide
that shipped with the product. Please refer to the Installation Guide, Configuration Guide, or other
enclosed additional documentation for further details.

Waarschuwing BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES

Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan
veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij
elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard
praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Voor een vertaling van de waarschuwingen die in deze
publicatie verschijnen, dient u de vertaalde veiligheidswaarschuwingen te raadplegen die bij dit
apparaat worden geleverd.

Opmerking BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES.

Opmerking Deze documentatie dient gebruikt te worden in combinatie met de

installatiehandleiding voor het specifieke product die bij het product wordt geleverd. Raadpleeg de
installatiehandleiding, configuratiehandleiding of andere verdere ingesloten documentatie voor
meer informatie.

Varoitus TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUTEEN LIITTYVIÄ OHJEITA

Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan. Ennen
kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja
tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehkäisykeinoista. Tässä asiakirjassa esitettyjen varoitusten
käännökset löydät laitteen mukana toimitetuista ohjeista.

Huomautus SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET

Huomautus Tämä asiakirja on tarkoitettu käytettäväksi yhdessä tuotteen mukana tulleen

asennusoppaan kanssa. Katso lisätietoja asennusoppaasta, kokoonpano-oppaasta ja muista
mukana toimitetuista asiakirjoista.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 v
 Preface
Document Conventions

Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ

Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer
des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient
des dangers posés par les circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment
utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions d'avertissements
figurant dans cette publication, consultez les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet
appareil.

Remarque CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS

Remarque Cette documentation doit être utilisée avec le guide spécifique d'installation du produit
qui accompagne ce dernier. Veuillez vous reporter au Guide d'installation, au Guide de
configuration, ou à toute autre documentation jointe pour de plus amples renseignements.

Warnung WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSANWEISUNGEN

Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu einer
Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Gerät beginnen, seien Sie
sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur
Vermeidung von Unfällen bewusst. Übersetzungen der in dieser Veröffentlichung enthaltenen
Warnhinweise sind im Lieferumfang des Geräts enthalten.

Hinweis BEWAHREN SIE DIESE SICHERHEITSANWEISUNGEN AUF

Hinweis Dieses Handbuch ist zum Gebrauch in Verbindung mit dem Installationshandbuch für Ihr
Gerät bestimmt, das dem Gerät beiliegt. Entnehmen Sie bitte alle weiteren Informationen dem
Handbuch (Installations- oder Konfigurationshandbuch o. Ä.) für Ihr spezifisches Gerät.

Figyelem! FONTOS BIZTONSÁGI ELÕÍRÁSOK

Ez a figyelmezetõ jel veszélyre utal. Sérülésveszélyt rejtõ helyzetben van. Mielõtt bármely
berendezésen munkát végezte, legyen figyelemmel az elektromos áramkörök okozta kockázatokra,
és ismerkedjen meg a szokásos balesetvédelmi eljárásokkal. A kiadványban szereplõ
figyelmeztetések fordítása a készülékhez mellékelt biztonsági figyelmeztetések között található.

Megjegyzés ÕRIZZE MEG EZEKET AZ UTASÍTÁSOKAT!

Megjegyzés Ezt a dokumentációt a készülékhez mellékelt üzembe helyezési útmutatóval együtt kell
használni. További tudnivalók a mellékelt Üzembe helyezési útmutatóban (Installation Guide),
Konfigurációs útmutatóban (Configuration Guide) vagy más dokumentumban találhatók.

Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA

Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle
persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli
relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti. Per le
traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento, vedere le avvertenze di sicurezza che
accompagnano questo dispositivo.

Nota CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI

Nota La presente documentazione va usata congiuntamente alla guida di installazione specifica

spedita con il prodotto. Per maggiori informazioni, consultare la Guida all'installazione, la Guida
alla configurazione o altra documentazione acclusa.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

vi OL-2485-20
Preface
Document Conventions

Advarsel VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER

Dette varselssymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan forårsake personskade.
Før du utfører arbeid med utstyret, bør du være oppmerksom på farene som er forbundet med
elektriske kretssystemer, og du bør være kjent med vanlig praksis for å unngå ulykker. For å se
oversettelser av advarslene i denne publikasjonen, se de oversatte sikkerhetsvarslene som følger
med denne enheten.

Merk TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE

Merk Denne dokumentasjonen skal brukes i forbindelse med den spesifikke

installasjonsveiledningen som fulgte med produktet. Vennligst se installasjonsveiledningen,
konfigureringsveiledningen eller annen vedlagt tilleggsdokumentasjon for detaljer.

Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA

Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. O utilizador encontra-se numa situação que poderá ser
causadora de lesões corporais. Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento, tenha em
atenção os perigos envolvidos no manuseamento de circuitos eléctricos e familiarize-se com as
práticas habituais de prevenção de acidentes. Para ver traduções dos avisos incluídos nesta
publicação, consulte os avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispositivo.

Nota GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES

Nota Esta documentação destina-se a ser utilizada em conjunto com o manual de instalação
incluído com o produto específico. Consulte o manual de instalação, o manual de configuração ou
outra documentação adicional inclusa, para obter mais informações.

¡Advertencia! INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD

Este símbolo de aviso indica peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular
cualquier equipo, considere los riesgos de la corriente eléctrica y familiarícese con los
procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Vea las traducciones de las advertencias
que acompañan a este dispositivo.

Nota GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES

Nota Esta documentación está pensada para ser utilizada con la guía de instalación del producto
que lo acompaña. Si necesita más detalles, consulte la Guía de instalación, la Guía de
configuración o cualquier documentación adicional adjunta.

Varning! VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR

Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.
Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och
känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Se översättningarna av de
varningsmeddelanden som finns i denna publikation, och se de översatta säkerhetsvarningarna som
medföljer denna anordning.

OBS! SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR

OBS! Denna dokumentation ska användas i samband med den specifika

produktinstallationshandbok som medföljde produkten. Se installationshandboken,
konfigurationshandboken eller annan bifogad ytterligare dokumentation för närmare detaljer.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 vii
 Preface
Obtaining Documentation

Obtaining Documentation
Cisco documentation and additional literature are available on Cisco.com. This section explains the
product documentation resources that Cisco offers.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

viii OL-2485-20
 Preface
Documentation Feedback

Cisco.com
You can access the most current Cisco documentation at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/techsupport
You can access the Cisco website at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com
You can access international Cisco websites at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml

Product Documentation DVD

The Product Documentation DVD is a library of technical product documentation on a portable medium.
The DVD enables you to access installation, configuration, and command guides for Cisco hardware and
software products. With the DVD, you have access to the HTML documentation and some of the
PDF files found on the Cisco website at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/home/home.htm
The Product Documentation DVD is created and released regularly. DVDs are available singly or by
subscription. Registered Cisco.com users can order a Product Documentation DVD (product number
DOC-DOCDVD= or DOC-DOCDVD=SUB) from Cisco Marketplace at the Product Documentation
Store at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/marketplace/docstore

Ordering Documentation
You must be a registered Cisco.com user to access Cisco Marketplace. Registered users may order
Cisco documentation at the Product Documentation Store at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/marketplace/docstore
If you do not have a user ID or password, you can register at this URL:
http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do

Documentation Feedback
You can provide feedback about Cisco technical documentation on the Cisco Technical Support &
Documentation site area by entering your comments in the feedback form available in every online
document.

Cisco Product Security Overview

Cisco provides a free online Security Vulnerability Policy portal at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/products_security_vulnerability_policy.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 ix
 Preface
Cisco Product Security Overview

From this site, you will find information about how to do the following:
• Report security vulnerabilities in Cisco products
• Obtain assistance with security incidents that involve Cisco products
• Register to receive security information from Cisco
A current list of security advisories, security notices, and security responses for Cisco products is
available at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/psirt
To see security advisories, security notices, and security responses as they are updated in real time, you
can subscribe to the Product Security Incident Response Team Really Simple Syndication (PSIRT RSS)
feed. Information about how to subscribe to the PSIRT RSS feed is found at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/products_psirt_rss_feed.html

Reporting Security Problems in Cisco Products

Cisco is committed to delivering secure products. We test our products internally before we release them,
and we strive to correct all vulnerabilities quickly. If you think that you have identified a vulnerability
in a Cisco product, contact PSIRT:
• For emergencies only — [email protected]
An emergency is either a condition in which a system is under active attack or a condition for which
a severe and urgent security vulnerability should be reported. All other conditions are considered
nonemergencies.
• For nonemergencies — [email protected]
In an emergency, you can also reach PSIRT by telephone:
• 1 877 228-7302
• 1 408 525-6532

Tip We encourage you to use Pretty Good Privacy (PGP) or a compatible product (for example, GnuPG) to
encrypt any sensitive information that you send to Cisco. PSIRT can work with information that has been
encrypted with PGP versions 2.x through 9.x.

Never use a revoked encryption key or an expired encryption key. The correct public key to use in your
correspondence with PSIRT is the one linked in the Contact Summary section of the Security
Vulnerability Policy page at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/products_security_vulnerability_policy.html

The link on this page has the current PGP key ID in use.

If you do not have or use PGP, contact PSIRT to find other means of encrypting the data before sending
any sensitive material.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

x OL-2485-20
 Preface
Product Alerts and Field Notices

Product Alerts and Field Notices

Modifications to or updates about Cisco products are announced in Cisco Product Alerts and Cisco Field
Notices. You can receive Cisco Product Alerts and Cisco Field Notices by using the Product Alert Tool
on Cisco.com. This tool enables you to create a profile and choose those products for which you want to
receive information.
To access the Product Alert Tool, you must be a registered Cisco.com user. (To register as a Cisco.com
user, go to this URL: http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do) Registered users can access the
tool at this URL: http://tools.cisco.com/Support/PAT/do/ViewMyProfiles.do?local=en

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Cisco Technical Support provides 24-hour-a-day award-winning technical assistance. The
Cisco Technical Support & Documentation website on Cisco.com features extensive online support
resources. In addition, if you have a valid Cisco service contract, Cisco Technical Assistance Center
(TAC) engineers provide telephone support. If you do not have a valid Cisco service contract, contact
your reseller.

Cisco Technical Support & Documentation Website

The Cisco Technical Support & Documentation website provides online documents and tools for
troubleshooting and resolving technical issues with Cisco products and technologies. The website is
available 24 hours a day at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/techsupport
Access to all tools on the Cisco Technical Support & Documentation website requires a Cisco.com
user ID and password. If you have a valid service contract but do not have a user ID or password, you
can register at this URL:
http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do

Note Use the Cisco Product Identification Tool to locate your product serial number before submitting a
request for service online or by phone. You can access this tool from the Cisco Technical Support &
Documentation website by clicking the Tools & Resources link, clicking the All Tools (A-Z) tab, and
then choosing Cisco Product Identification Tool from the alphabetical list. This tool offers three search
options: by product ID or model name; by tree view; or, for certain products, by copying and pasting
show command output. Search results show an illustration of your product with the serial number label
location highlighted. Locate the serial number label on your product and record the information before
placing a service call.

Tip Displaying and Searching on Cisco.com

If you suspect that the browser is not refreshing a web page, force the browser to update the web page
by holding down the Ctrl key while pressing F5.

To find technical information, narrow your search to look in technical documentation, not the entire
Cisco.com website. On the Cisco.com home page, click the Advanced Search link under the Search box

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 xi
 Preface
Obtaining Technical Assistance

and then click the Technical Support & Documentation radio button.

To provide feedback about the Cisco.com website or a particular technical document, click Contacts &
Feedback at the top of any Cisco.com web page.

Submitting a Service Request

Using the online TAC Service Request Tool is the fastest way to open S3 and S4 service requests. (S3 and
S4 service requests are those in which your network is minimally impaired or for which you require
product information.) After you describe your situation, the TAC Service Request Tool provides
recommended solutions. If your issue is not resolved using the recommended resources, your service
request is assigned to a Cisco engineer. The TAC Service Request Tool is located at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/techsupport/servicerequest
For S1 or S2 service requests, or if you do not have Internet access, contact the Cisco TAC by telephone.
(S1 or S2 service requests are those in which your production network is down or severely degraded.)
Cisco engineers are assigned immediately to S1 and S2 service requests to help keep your business
operations running smoothly.
To open a service request by telephone, use one of the following numbers:
Asia-Pacific: +61 2 8446 7411
Australia: 1 800 805 227
EMEA: +32 2 704 55 55
USA: 1 800 553 2447
For a complete list of Cisco TAC contacts, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/techsupport/contacts

Definitions of Service Request Severity

To ensure that all service requests are reported in a standard format, Cisco has established severity
definitions.
Severity 1 (S1)—An existing network is “down” or there is a critical impact to your business operations.
You and Cisco will commit all necessary resources around the clock to resolve the situation.
Severity 2 (S2)—Operation of an existing network is severely degraded, or significant aspects of your
business operations are negatively affected by inadequate performance of Cisco products. You and
Cisco will commit full-time resources during normal business hours to resolve the situation.
Severity 3 (S3)—Operational performance of the network is impaired while most business operations
remain functional. You and Cisco will commit resources during normal business hours to restore service
to satisfactory levels.
Severity 4 (S4)—You require information or assistance with Cisco product capabilities, installation, or
configuration. There is little or no effect on your business operations.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

xii OL-2485-20
Preface
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information

Obtaining Additional Publications and Information

Information about Cisco products, technologies, and network solutions is available from various online
and printed sources.
• The Cisco Online Subscription Center is the website where you can sign up for a variety of
Cisco e-mail newsletters and other communications. Create a profile and then select the
subscriptions that you would like to receive. To visit the Cisco Online Subscription Center,
go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/offer/subscribe
• The Cisco Product Quick Reference Guide is a handy, compact reference tool that includes brief
product overviews, key features, sample part numbers, and abbreviated technical specifications for
many Cisco products that are sold through channel partners. It is updated twice a year and includes
the latest Cisco channel product offerings. To order and find out more about the Cisco Product Quick
Reference Guide, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/guide
• Cisco Marketplace provides a variety of Cisco books, reference guides, documentation, and logo
merchandise. Visit Cisco Marketplace, the company store, at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/marketplace/
• Cisco Press publishes a wide range of general networking, training, and certification titles. Both new
and experienced users will benefit from these publications. For current Cisco Press titles and other
information, go to Cisco Press at this URL:
http://www.ciscopress.com
• Internet Protocol Journal is a quarterly journal published by Cisco Systems for engineering
professionals involved in designing, developing, and operating public and private internets and
intranets. You can access the Internet Protocol Journal at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/ipj
• Networking products offered by Cisco Systems, as well as customer support services, can be
obtained at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/index.html
• Networking Professionals Connection is an interactive website where networking professionals
share questions, suggestions, and information about networking products and technologies with
Cisco experts and other networking professionals. Join a discussion at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/discuss/networking
• “What’s New in Cisco Documentation” is an online publication that provides information about the
latest documentation releases for Cisco products. Updated monthly, this online publication is
organized by product category to direct you quickly to the documentation for your products. You
can view the latest release of “What’s New in Cisco Documentation” at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm
• World-class networking training is available from Cisco. You can view current offerings at
this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/learning/index.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 xiii
 Preface
Obtaining Additional Publications and Information

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

xiv OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 1
Overview of Cisco Network Modules for
Cisco Access Routers

This chapter provides an overview of Cisco network modules used in Cisco access routers, and contains
the following sections:
• Introduction to Cisco Network Module Form Factors, page 1-1
• Cisco Access Routers and Cisco Network Modules, page 1-3
• Cisco IOS Software Releases and Cisco Network Modules, page 1-6
• Cisco Interface Cards Supported on Cisco Network Modules, page 1-7
• Cabling for Cisco Network Modules, page 1-9
• Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules, page 1-15
• Related Documents, page 1-30
• Where to Go Next, page 1-33

Introduction to Cisco Network Module Form Factors

Cisco network modules are available in the following four different form factors to provide greater
modularity and functionality for users:
• Single-wide network modules, also called NM or NME (see Figure 1-1)
• Extended single-wide network modules, also called NME-X (see Figure 1-2)
• Double-wide network modules, also called NMD (see Figure 1-3)
• Extended double-wide network modules, also called NME-XD (see Figure 1-4)
Single-wide network modules are installed in fixed network module slots on Cisco 2600 series,
Cisco 3600 series, Cisco 3700 series, and Cisco MWR 1941-DC routers, and in configurable network
module slots on Cisco 2811, Cisco 2821, Cisco 2851, and Cisco 3800 series routers. See Figure 1-1 for
a sample single-wide network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-1
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Introduction to Cisco Network Module Form Factors

Figure 1-1 Sample Single-Wide Network Module

121243
Extended single-wide network modules are installed in configurable network module slots on the
Cisco 2821, Cisco 2851, and Cisco 3800 series routers. Extended single-wide network modules cannot
be installed in Cisco 2600 series, Cisco 3600 series, Cisco 3700 series and Cisco MWR 1941-DC
routers. See Figure 1-2 for a sample extended single-wide network module.

Figure 1-2 Sample Extended Single-Wide Network Module

121244
Double-wide network modules require the removal of the right side panel for installation in the top slot
of the Cisco 3725 router, because the bottom slot only supports single-wide modules. On the Cisco 3745
router, the double-wide network module occupies two single-wide slots and is supported by removing
the midwall divider. On Cisco 2851 and Cisco 3800 series routers, network module slots must be set up
properly before double-wide network modules can be installed. See Figure 1-3 for a sample double-wide
network module.

Figure 1-3 Sample Double-Wide Network Module

121245

Tip For information on configuring network module slots to fit double-wide network modules, see the
“Preparing Cisco Router Slots for Network Module Installation” section on page 2-8.

Extended double-wide network modules are supported only on the Cisco 2851 and Cisco 3800 series
routers. Extended double-wide network modules occupy two extended single-wide network module
slots, which must be set up properly before extended double-wide network modules can be installed. See
Figure 1-4 for a sample extended double-wide network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cisco Access Routers and Cisco Network Modules

Figure 1-4 Sample Extended Double-Wide Network Module

121246
Tip For information on configuring network module slots to fit extended double-wide network modules, see
the “Preparing Cisco Router Slots for Network Module Installation” section on page 2-8.

Note Extension modules, such as the EVM-HD-8FXS/DID, are equivalent to a single-wide network module.
However, extension modules are not supported in all Cisco access router network module slots. See
Table 1-1 for information on slots supporting extension modules.

Cisco Access Routers and Cisco Network Modules

The Cisco network modules described in this document are supported on the following Cisco routers:
• Cisco 2600 series, including the Cisco 2610, Cisco 2610XM, Cisco 2611, Cisco 2611XM,
Cisco 2612, Cisco 2613, Cisco 2620, Cisco 2620XM, Cisco 2621, Cisco 2621XM, Cisco 2650,
Cisco 2650XM, Cisco 2651, Cisco 2651XM, and Cisco 2691 routers

Note References to the Cisco 2600XM routers apply to the following routers: Cisco 2610XM,
Cisco 2611XM, Cisco 2620XM, Cisco 2621XM, Cisco 2650XM, and Cisco 2651XM.

• Cisco 2811, Cisco 2821, and Cisco 2851 routers

• Cisco 3600 series, including the Cisco 3620, Cisco 3631, Cisco 3640, Cisco 3640A, Cisco 3661,
and Cisco 3662 routers
• Cisco 3700 series, including the Cisco 3725 and Cisco 3745 routers
• Cisco 3800 series, including the Cisco 3825 and Cisco 3845 routers
• Cisco MWR 1941-DC routers
For information on these Cisco routers, see the hardware documentation described in the “Related
Documents” section on page 1-30.

Network Module Slot Locations and Numbering on Cisco Access Routers

Most Cisco access router network module slots are numbered from right to left, bottom to top. However,
some routers use different slot numbering schemes. See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6 for examples of
network module slot numbering on Cisco access routers.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-3
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cisco Access Routers and Cisco Network Modules

Figure 1-5 Cisco 3660 Router Rear View

FDX FDX
VCC OK 1
LINK LINK
SYSTEM
100Mbps 100Mbps 0

121093
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Network module slot 2 4 Network module slot 1

2 Network module slot 4 5 Network module slot 3
3 Network module slot 6 6 Network module slot 5

Figure 1-6 Chassis Slot Locations in Cisco 2851 Routers

4 2 3 1 5

S
L S
A= ACT A= FDX O L
S= SPEED A= LINK T O
GE 0/0 3 T
A GE 0/1 A 2
F F
S S S
L S T
L L O L D
T O
1 T M
0 0
PVDM2 PVDM1 PVDM0 AIM1 AIM0

CISCO 27XXX-XX-XXX

121088
6

1 High-speed WAN interface card slot 0 4 High-speed WAN interface card slot 3
2 High-speed WAN interface card slot 1 5 Extension module slot
3 High-speed WAN interface card slot 2 6 Network module slot

Platform and Slot Limitations for Cisco Network Modules

Certain platforms have restrictions on the number of total network modules of a certain type that can be
installed, and some slots do not support certain network modules.
See Table 1-1 for information on the type and quantity of network module slots available on Cisco
access routers.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cisco Access Routers and Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-1 Network Module Slots Available on Cisco Access Routers

Number Slot
Cisco Router of Slots Slot Type Numbering Installation Notes and Limitations
Cisco 2600 series 1 Single-wide Slot 1 Does not support extension modules.
Cisco 2811 routers 1 Single-wide Slot 1 Does not support extension modules.
Cisco 2821 routers 1 Single-wide Slot 1 Extension modules are not supported in standard network
Extended module slots on this platform.
single-wide
1 Extension Slot 2 Extension module slots do not support other single-wide
module network modules.
Cisco 2851 routers 1 Single-wide Slot 1 Extension modules are not supported in standard network
Extended module slots on this platform.
single-wide
Double-wide
Extended
double-wide
1 Extension Slot 2 Extension module slots do not support other single-wide
module network modules.
Cisco 3620 routers 2 Single-wide Slot 0–slot 1 Does not support extension modules.
Cisco 3640 routers 4 Single-wide Slot 0–slot 3 Does not support extension modules.
Cisco 3660 routers 6 Single-wide Slot 1–slot 6 Slot 0 refers to the board carrying fixed interfaces at the top
Double-wide (see of the chassis.
Figure 1-5)
Cisco 3725 routers 2 Single-wide Slot 1–slot 2 Slot 2 accommodates double-wide network modules.
Tip To install double-wide network modules, remove
the slot divider. (See the “Removing Slot Dividers”
section on page 2-12.)
Cisco 3745 routers 4 Single-wide Slot 1–slot 4 Does not support extension modules.
2 Double-wide Slot 2, slot 4 Removing the slot divider changes slot numbering as
follows:
• Slot 1 and slot 2 become slot 2
• Slot 3 and slot 4 become slot 4
Tip To install double-wide network modules, remove
the slot divider. (See the “Removing Slot Dividers”
section on page 2-12.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-5
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cisco IOS Software Releases and Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-1 Network Module Slots Available on Cisco Access Routers (continued)

Number Slot
Cisco Router of Slots Slot Type Numbering Installation Notes and Limitations
Cisco 3825 routers 3 Single-wide Slot 1–slot 3 To install double-wide network modules, remove the slot
Extended divider. (See the “Removing Slot Dividers” section on
single-wide page 2-12.)
Extension Only one extension module can be installed per chassis.
voice
1 Double-wide Slot 2 To install double-wide network modules, remove the slot
Extended divider. (See the “Removing Slot Dividers” section on
double-wide page 2-12.)
Only one NM-36ESW network module bcan be installed
per chassis.
Cisco 3845 routers 4 Single-wide Slot 1–slot 4 Only two extension modules can be installed per chassis.
Extended
single-wide
Extension
voice
2 Double-wide Slot 1, slot 3 Removing the slot divider changes slot numbering as
Extended follows:
double-wide
• Slot 1 and slot 2 becomes slot 1
• Slot 3 and slot 4 becomes slot 3
Tip To install double-wide or extended double-wide
network modules, remove the slot divider. (See the
“Removing Slot Dividers” section on page 2-12.).

Only two NM-36ESW network modules can be installed

per chassis.
Cisco MWR 1941-DC 1 Single-wide Slot 1 Cisco MWR 1941-DC routers support single-wide network
routers modules only.

Cisco IOS Software Releases and Cisco Network Modules

Cisco network modules are often supported on multiple Cisco IOS releases. Cisco IOS release
information is documented in the product data sheet and in Feature Navigator II, which is located on the
Cisco website at http://tools.cisco.com/ITDIT/CFN/jsp/index.jsp
To determine which Cisco IOS releases support your particular router and combination of cards and
modules, go to the Software Advisor at http://www.cisco.com/pcgi-bin/Support/CompNav/Index.pl.
You must have an account on Cisco.com. If you do not have an account or have forgotten your username
or password, click Cancel at the login dialog box and follow the instructions that appear.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-6 OL-2485-20
Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cisco Interface Cards Supported on Cisco Network Modules

Cisco Interface Cards Supported on Cisco Network Modules

Some Cisco network modules have interface card slots to allow installation of Cisco interface cards.
These network modules have either one or two interface card slots, supporting either voice or data
interface cards. See Figure 1-7 and Figure 1-8 for sample 1- and 2-slot network modules.

Note Some combination voice/data interface cards are supported on 1- or 2-slot network modules. However,
interface card functionality is limited to either voice or data applications. See Table 1-2 for more
information.

Figure 1-7 Sample 1-Slot Network Module

1
VOICE
2V

V1 V0

H10834
EN

1 Interface card slot 0

Figure 1-8 Sample 2-Slot Network Module

1 2
2E
WO
2W W1

STP AUI
ILNK

ACT

LNK
ACT

EN

H8603
ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 0

1 Interface card slot 1 2 Interface card slot 0

For information on installing interface cards onto network modules, see the “Installing Cisco Interface
Cards in 1- or 2-Slot Network Modules” section on page 2-24.

Note High-density WAN interface cards (HWICs) are not supported on 1- or 2-slot network modules.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-7
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cisco Interface Cards Supported on Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-2 Interface Cards Supported on 1- or 2-Slot Network Modules

Supported on
NM-2W
NM-1FE2W
NM-1FE2W-V2
NM-2FE2W
NM-2FE2W-V2 NM-1A-OC3MM-1V
NM-1FE1R2W NM-1V NM-HD-1V NM-HDV NM-1A-OC3SMI-1V
Interface Card NM-1FE1R2W-V2 NM-2V NM-HD-2V NM-HD-2VE NM-HDV2 NM-1A-OC3SML-1V
WIC-1T Yes No No No No No
WIC-2T Yes No No No No No
WIC-1B-S/T Yes No No No No No
WIC-1B-S/T-V3 Yes No No No No No
WIC-1B-U Yes No No No No No
WIC-1B-U-V2 Yes No No No No No
WIC-2A/S Yes No No No No No
WIC-1DSU-56K Yes No No No No No
WIC-1DSU-T1 Yes No No No No No
WIC-1ADSL Yes No No No No No
WIC-1ADSL-I-DG Yes No No No No No
WIC-1SHDSL Yes No No No No No
WIC-1AM Yes No No No No No
WIC-2AM Yes No No No No No
WIC-1AM-V2 Yes No No No No No
WIC-2AM-V2 Yes No No No No No
WIC-1AM-V2 Yes No No No No No
WIC-2AM-V2 Yes No No No No No
VWIC-1MFT-G703 Data only No No No No No
VWIC2-1MFT-G703 Data only No No No NM-HDV2 only No
VWIC-2MFT-G.703 No No No Yes No No
VWIC2-2MFT-G703 Data only No No No Yes No
VWIC-1MFT-T1 Yes No No Voice only Yes Yes
VWIC-1MFT-E1 No No No Voice only Yes Yes
VWIC2-1MFT-T1/E Data only No No Yes Yes No
1
VWIC-2MFT-T1 Data only No No Voice only Yes Yes
VWIC-2MFT-E1 Data only No No Voice only Yes Yes
VWIC2-2MFT-T1/E Data only No No Yes Yes No
1
VWIC-2MFT-T1-DI Data only No No Voice only Yes Yes

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cabling for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-2 Interface Cards Supported on 1- or 2-Slot Network Modules (continued)

Supported on
NM-2W
NM-1FE2W
NM-1FE2W-V2
NM-2FE2W
NM-2FE2W-V2 NM-1A-OC3MM-1V
NM-1FE1R2W NM-1V NM-HD-1V NM-HDV NM-1A-OC3SMI-1V
Interface Card NM-1FE1R2W-V2 NM-2V NM-HD-2V NM-HD-2VE NM-HDV2 NM-1A-OC3SML-1V
VWIC-2MFT-E1-DI Data only No No Voice only Yes Yes
VIC-2FXS No Yes No No No No
VIC2-2FXS No No Yes Yes No No
1 1
VIC-4FXS/DID No No Yes Yes No No
VIC-2FXO No Yes No No No No
VIC-2FXO-M1 No Yes No No No No
VIC-2FXO-EU No Yes No No No No
VIC-2FXO-M2 No Yes No No No No
VIC-2FXO-M3 No Yes No No No No
VIC2-2FXO No No Yes Yes No No
VIC2-4FXO No No Yes Yes No No
VIC-2E/M No Yes No No No No
VIC2-2E/M No No Yes Yes No No
VIC-2BRI-S/T-TE No Yes No No No No
VIC-2BRI-NT-TE No Yes No No No No
VIC2-2BRI-NT/TE No No Yes Yes No No
VIC-2CAMA No Yes No No No No
VIC-2DID No Yes Yes Yes No No
1. Cisco 2600XM series, Cisco 2691, Cisco 2800 series, Cisco 3600 series, Cisco 3700 series, and Cisco 3800 series routers support direct inward dial
(DID) on the 4-port FXS/DID cards in Cisco IOS Release 12.3(14)T and later.

For more information about Cisco interface cards, see the Cisco Interface Cards Hardware Installation
Guide.

Cabling for Cisco Network Modules

The cables required to connect the network module to the network differ according to interface and
connector type. See Table 1-3 for more information.

Note Cabling for 1- or 2-slot network modules is determined by the installed interface cards. See the Cisco
Interface Cards Hardware Installation Guide for information.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-9
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cabling for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-3 Cabling for Cisco Network Modules

Connector Type,
Connection Type Cable Color Cable Use with
Alarm Interface Connections
To alarm interface 50-pin D Micro DB-50 SCSI transition NM-AIC-64
patch panels or main
distribution frame
Analog Dialup
300 bps to 33.6 kbps RJ-11 RJ-11 straight-through NM-8AM
analog dialup NM-8AM-V2
NM-16AM
NM-16AM-V2
ATM
ATM to ADSL RJ-45, light green RJ-45 UTP category 3, 4, 5 or higher NM-1ATM-25
RJ-45 STP category 1, 1A, 9, or 9A
T3 ATM BNC BNC coaxial T3 NM-1A-T3
NM-1A-T3/E3
E3 ATM BNC BNC coaxial E3 NM-1A-E3
NM-1A-T3/E3
ATM, optical Duplex or simplex 62.5-micron core with an optical loss of NM-1A-OC3-POM
SC 0 to 9 dB NM-1A-OC3MM
Note Maximum path length of NM-1A-OC3SMI
2 km (1.24 miles), all cables, end to NM-1A-OC3SML
end NM-1A-OC3MM-EP
NM-1A-OC3SMI-EP
50-micron core with optical loss of 7 dB NM-1A-OC3SML-EP
Note Maximum path length of NM-1A-OC3MM-1V
2 km (1.24 miles), all cables, end to NM-1A-OC3SMI-1V
end NM-1A-OC3SML-1V
9-micron core
Note Maximum path length of
45 km (27.9 miles) for single-mode
long (SML) reach and 15 km
(9.3 miles) for single-mode
intermediate (SMI) reach.
Circuit Emulation over IP (CEoIP)
T1/E1 CEoIP RJ-48C RJ-48 T1/E1 straight-through NM-CEM-4TE1
Note To connect to a
75-ohm unbalanced
E1 network, use
CAB-ADP-75-120.
Serial CEoIP 60-pin D, blue Cisco Smart serial 12-in-1—see Table 1-4 for NM-CEM-4SER
part numbers
Cisco Smart serial extended 12-in-1—see
Table 1-5 for part numbers

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-10 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cabling for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-3 Cabling for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Connector Type,
Connection Type Cable Color Cable Use with
Ethernet
Ethernet RJ-45, yellow 10BASE-T Category 5 or above UTP NM-1E
DB-15 Attachment unit interface (AUI) cable NM-4E
NM-1E2W
NM-2E2W
NM-1E1R2W
Fast Ethernet, copper RJ-45 100BASE-T Category 5 or above UTP NM-1FE-TX
NM-1FE2W
NM-1FE2W-V2
NM-2FE2W
NM-2FE2W-V2
NM-1FE1R2W
NM-1FE1R2W-V2
NM-1FE1CT1
NM-1FE2CT1
NM-1FE1CT1-CSU
NM-1FE2CT1-CSU
NM-1FE1CE1B
NM-1FE1CE1U
NM-1FE2CE1B
NM-1FE2CE1U
NM-16ESW
NM-16ESW-1GIG
NM-16ESW-PWR
NM-16ESW-PWR-1GIG
NM-CE-BP-20G-K9
NM-CE-BP-40G-K9
NM-CE-BP-80G-K9
NM-CE-BP-SCSI-K9
NM-CIDS-K9
NM-NAM
NMD-36ESW
NMD-36ESW-2GIG
NMD-36ESW-PWR
NMD-36ESW-PWR-2G
NME-16ES-1G
NME-16ES-1G-P
NME-X-23ES-1G
NME-X-23ES-1G-P
NME-XD-24ES-1S-P
NME-XD-48ES-2S-P
Fast Ethernet, optical SC 100BASE-T MMF NM-1FE-FX
NM-1FE-FX-V2
SC 100BASE-T SMF NM-1FE-SMF

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-11
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cabling for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-3 Cabling for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Connector Type,
Connection Type Cable Color Cable Use with
Gigabit Ethernet, RJ-45 1000BASE-T Category 5 or above UTP NM-16ESW
copper NM-16ESW-1GIG
NM-16ESW-PWR
NM-16ESW-PWR-1GIG
NM-1GE (through GBIC)
NME-WAE-302-K9
NME-WAE-502-K9
NME-WAE-522-K9
NMD-36ESW
NMD-36ESW-2GIG
NMD-36ESW-PWR
NMD-36ESW-PWR-2G
NME-16ES-1G
NME-16ES-1G-P
NME-AIR-WLC8-K9
NME-AIR-WLC12-K9
NME-AON-K9
NME-NAC-K9
NME-NAM-80S
NME-X-23ES-1G
NME-X-23ES-1G-P
NME-XD-24ES-1S-P
NME-XD-48ES-2S-P
Gigabit Ethernet, SC, yellow 10-micron SMF NM-1GE (through GBIC)
optical SC, orange 62.5-micron MMF NME-16ES-1G
NME-16ES-1G-P
NME-X-23ES-1G
NME-X-23ES-1G-P
NME-XD-24ES-1S-P
NME-XD-48ES-2S-P
ISDN Connections
Channelized T1 PRI, DB-15 DB-15 straight-through T1 NM-1FE1CT1
without CSU NM-1FE2CT1
NM-1CT1
NM-2CT1
Channelized T1 PRI, RJ-48C, tan RJ-48C to RJ-48C straight-through T1 NM-1FE1CT1-CSU
with CSU NM-1FE2CT1-CSU
NM-1CT1-CSU
NM-2CT1-CSU
Channelized T1 PRI, RJ-48S, tan RJ-48S to RJ-48S straight-through T1 NM-1CE1T1-PRI
with or without CSU NM-2CE1T1-PRI

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-12 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cabling for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-3 Cabling for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Connector Type,
Connection Type Cable Color Cable Use with
Channelized E1 PRI, DB-15, tan DB-15 to DB-15 120-ohm balanced E1 NM-1FE1CE1B
balanced DB-15 to twin-ax, tan DB-15 to twin-ax 75-ohm balanced E1 NM-1FE2CE1B
NM-1CE1B
DB-15 to RJ-45, tan DB-15 to RJ-45 120-ohm balanced E1 NM-2CE1B
RJ-48S, tan RJ-48S to RJ-48S straight-through 120-ohm NM-1CE1T1-PRI
balanced E1 NM-2CE1T1-PRI
RJ-48S to DB-15, tan RJ-48S to DB-15 120-ohm balanced E1
RJ-48S to twin-ax RJ-48S to twin-ax 120-ohm balanced E1
Channelized E1 PRI, DB-15 to BNC, tan DB-15 to BNC 75-ohm unbalanced E1 NM-1FE1CE1U
unbalanced NM-1FE2CE1U
NM-1CE1U
NM-2CE-1U
RJ-48S to BNC, tan RJ-48S to BNC 75-ohm unbalanced E1 NM-1CE1T1-PRI
NM-2CE1T1-PRI
BRI S/T RJ-45, orange RJ-45 straight-through NM-4B-S/T
(external NT1) NM-8B-S/T
BRI U (built-in NT1) RJ-45, red RJ-45 straight-through NM-4B-U
NM-8B-U
Serial Connections
Synchronous serial 60-pin D, blue Serial transition cable (EIA/TIA-232, NM-4T
EIA/TIA-449, EIA/TIA-530 DTE, V.35, NM-4A/S
X.21, NRZ/NRZI) NM-8A/S
Asynchronous serial 68-pin D to 25-pin D DB-68 to DB-25 EIA/TIA-232 octal NM-16A
68-pin D to RJ-45 DB-68 to RJ-45 EIA/TIA-232 octal NM-32A

Serial 60-pin D, blue Cisco Smart serial 12-in-1—see Table 1-4 for NM-16A/S
part numbers
Serial surge protection Cisco Product ID CAB-SS-SURGE
Fractional DS3 or 50-pin D, blue DB-50 HSSI DTE NM-1HSSI
below, to DSU
Fractional DS3 or DB-50 HSSI null modem
below, to another
router

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-13
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Cabling for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-3 Cabling for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Connector Type,
Connection Type Cable Color Cable Use with
Service Module Connections
To external storage 68-pin D 68-pin low-voltage differential (LVD) SCSI NM-CE-BP-SCSI
array Note 36-, 91- or 108-inch (274 cm) cables
can be used, depending on the
distance between the network module
and the external storage array.
Token Ring Connections
Token Ring, shielded DB-9 Token Ring lobe cable, shielded STP NM-1E1R2W
Token Ring, RJ-45 Token Ring lobe cable, unshielded UTP NM-1FE1R2W
unshielded NM-1FE1R2W-V2

WAN Connections
T1/E1 WAN RJ-48C/CA81A RJ-48 T1/E1 straight-through NM-4T1-IMA
NM-8T1-IMA
NM-4E1-IMA
NM-8E1-IMA
NM-HDV2-1T1/E1
NM-HDV2-2T1/E1
T3/DS3/E3 WAN BNC connector BNC T3/E3 coaxial NM-1T3/E3
NM-1A-T3
NM-1A-E3
NM-1A-T3/E3
Wireless and Satellite Connections
To antenna BNC BNC indoor IF coaxial NM-WMDA
To satellite dish F-connector 75-ohm F-connector shielded RG-6 NM-1VSAT-GILAT
Voice Connections
Analog voice RJ-21 253PP10GYADI male-to-male (Graybar) NM-HDA-4FXS
FXS/FXO 253PC10GYADI male-to-female (Graybar)
AT125-SM patch panel (Graybar)
RJ-21 cable EVM-HDA-8FXS/DID

Note A single fiber link should not mix 62.5- and 50-micron cable.

Table 1-4 Cisco 12-in-1 Smart Serial Interface Cable Part Numbers

Interface DCE/DTE Cisco Cable Part Number

EIA/TIA-232 Female DCE CAB-SS-232FC
Male DTE CAB-SS-232MT
EIA/TIA-449 Female DCE CAB-SS-449FC
Male DTE CAB-SS-449MT

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-14 OL-2485-20
Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-4 Cisco 12-in-1 Smart Serial Interface Cable Part Numbers (continued)

Interface DCE/DTE Cisco Cable Part Number

EIA-530 Male DTE CAB-SS-530MT
EIA-530A Male DTE CAB-SS-530AMT
V.35 Female DCE CAB-SS-V35FC
Female DTE CAB-SS-V35FT
Male DCE CAB-SS-V35MC
Male DTE CAB-SS-V35MT
X.21 Female DCE CAB-SS-X21FC
Male DTE CAB-SS-X21MT

Table 1-5 Cisco Extended 12-in-1 Smart Serial Interface Cable Part Numbers

Interface DCE/DTE Cisco Cable Part Number

EIA/TIA-232 Female DCE CAB-SS-232FC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-232MT-EXT
EIA/TIA-449 Female DCE CAB-SS-449FC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-449MT-EXT
EIA-530 Female DCE CAB-SS-530FC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-530MT-EXT
EIA-530A Female DCE CAB-SS-530AFC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-530AMT-EXT
V.35 Female DCE CAB-SS-V35FC-EXT
Female DTE CAB-SS-V35FT-EXT
Male DCE CAB-SS-V35MC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-V35MT-EXT

Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 lists the platforms supported by each interface card. The interface cards are grouped by
technology area:
• Alarm Monitoring and Control Network Modules
• Analog and ISDN Basic Rate Voice Network Modules
• Extension Modules
• Analog Dialup and Remote Access Network Modules
• Application and Service Modules
• ATM Network Modules
• Channelized T1/E1 and ISDN Network Modules
• Circuit Emulation over IP (CEoIP) Network Modules
• Compression Network Modules
• Digital Dialup and Remote Access Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-15
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

• Digital Voice Network Modules

• Ethernet Switching Network Modules
• LAN Network Modules
• LAN and Interface Card Slot Combo Network Modules
• LAN and T1/E1 Combination Network Modules
• Serial Connectivity Network Modules
• Wireless and Satellite Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
Alarm Monitoring and Control Network Modules
Alarm monitoring and control network NM-AIC-64 Cisco 2600 series Connecting Alarm Interface
module Cisco 2811 Controller Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco MWR 1941-DC
Analog and ISDN Basic Rate Voice Network Modules
1-slot 2-channel voice network module NM-1V Cisco 2600 series Connecting Voice
Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
2-slot 4-channel voice network module NM-2V Cisco 2600 series Connecting Voice
Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
1-slot IP communications voice/fax NM-HD-1V Cisco 2600 series Connecting Voice
network module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3640
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
2-slot IP communications voice/fax NM-HD-2V Cisco 2600 series Connecting Voice
network module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3640
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-16 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
2-slot IP communications enhanced NM-HD-2VE Cisco 2600 series Connecting Voice
voice/fax network module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3640
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
4-port FXS high-density analog (HDA) NM-HDA-4FXS Cisco 2600 series Connecting High-Density
voice/fax network module Cisco 2811 Analog Telephony Network
Cisco 2821 Modules
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3640
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Extension Modules
High-density extension module EVM-HD-8FXS/DID Cisco 2821 Connecting Cisco
Cisco 2851 High-Density Extension
Cisco 3800 series Modules
Analog Dialup and Remote Access Network Modules
8-port analog modem network module NM-8AM Cisco 2600 series Connecting Analog Modem
with v.92 Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3725
Cisco 3745
16-port analog modem network module NM-16AM Cisco 2600 series Connecting Analog Modem
with v.92 Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3725
Cisco 3745
8-port analog modem network module NM-8AM-V2 Cisco 2600XM series Connecting Analog Modem
with v.92, version 2 Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 2691
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
16-port analog modem network module NM-16AM-V2 Cisco 2600XM series Connecting Analog Modem
with v.92, version 2 Cisco 2691 Network Modules
Cisco 2811
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-17
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
Application and Service Modules
Cisco AON network module with NM-AON-K9 Cisco 2600XM series Connecting AON Network
512 MB memory Cisco 2691 Modules
Cisco 2811
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco AON network module with NME-AON-K9 Cisco 2811 Connecting AON Network
1 GB memory Cisco 2821 Modules
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Application Performance NME-APA-E2 Cisco 2811 Connecting Application
Assurance enhanced network module Cisco 2821 Performance Assurance
Cisco 2851 Enhanced Network Modules
Cisco Application Performance NME-APA-E3 Cisco 3800 series Connecting Application
Assurance enhanced network module Performance Assurance
Enhanced Network Modules
Cisco Content Engine network module NM-CE-BP-20G-K9 Cisco 2600 series Connecting Content Engine
for caching and content delivery, with Cisco 3640 Network Modules for Caching
20-GB hard drive expansion module Cisco 3660 and Content Delivery
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco Content Engine network module NM-CE-BP-40G-K9 Cisco 2600 series Connecting Content Engine
for caching and content delivery, with Cisco 2811 Network Modules for Caching
40-GB hard drive expansion module Cisco 2821 and Content Delivery
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3640
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Content Engine network module NM-CE-BP-80G-K9 Cisco 2600 series Connecting Content Engine
for caching and content delivery, with Cisco 2811 Network Modules for Caching
80-GB hard drive expansion module Cisco 2821 and Content Delivery
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3640
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-18 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
Cisco Content Engine network module NM-CE-BP-SCSI-K9 Cisco 2600 series Connecting Content Engine
for caching and content delivery, with Cisco 2811 Network Modules for Caching
SCSI connector expansion module Cisco 2821 and Content Delivery
Note Requires an external SCSI disk Cisco 2851
array such as the Cisco SA-6 Cisco 3640
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Intrusion Detection System (IDS) NM-CIDS-K9 Cisco 2600XM series Connecting Cisco Intrusion
network module Cisco 2691 Detection System Network
Cisco 2811 Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Unity Express voice-mail NM-CUE Cisco 2600XM series Connecting Cisco Unity
network module Cisco 2691 Express Network Modules
Cisco 2811
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Unity Express voice-mail NME-CUE Cisco 2811 Connecting Cisco Unity
enhanced network module Cisco 2821 Express Enhanced Network
Cisco 2851 Modules, page 24-1
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Network Admission Control NME-NAC-K9 Cisco 2811 Connecting Cisco Network
network module Cisco 2821 Admission Control Network
Cisco 2851 Modules
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Network Analysis Module NM-NAM Cisco 2600XM series Connecting Cisco Network
network module Cisco 2691 Analysis Modules
Cisco 2811
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Network Analysis Module NME-NAM-80S Cisco 3700 series Connecting NAM Enhanced
enhanced network module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-19
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway NME-UMG Cisco 2811 Connecting Cisco Unified
enhanced network module Cisco 2821 Messaging Gateway
Cisco 2851 Enhanced Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway NME-UMG-EC Cisco 2811 Connecting Cisco Unified
enhanced network module Cisco 2821 Messaging Gateway
Cisco 2851 Enhanced Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco WAAS enhanced network module NME-WAE-302-K9 Cisco 2811 Connecting WAAS Enhanced
with 80 GB hard disk and 512 MB Cisco 2821 Network Modules
memory Cisco 2851
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco WAAS enhanced network module NME-WAE-502-K9 Cisco 2811 Connecting WAAS Enhanced
with 120 GB hard disk and 1 GB Cisco 2821 Network Modules
memory Cisco 2851
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco WAAS enhanced network module NME-WAE-522-K9 Cisco 3800 series Connecting WAAS Enhanced
with 160 GB hard disk and 2 GB Network Modules
memory
ATM Network Modules
1-port ATM-25 NM-1ATM-25 Cisco 2600 series Connecting ATM
Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
1-port DS3 ATM network module NM-1A-T3 Cisco 2600 series Connecting ATM
Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
1-port E3 ATM network module NM-1A-E3 Cisco 2600 series Connecting ATM
Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
1-port ATM T3/E3 network module NM-1A-T3/E3 Cisco 2811 Connecting ATM
Cisco 2821 Network Modules
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3800 series
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 pluggable NM-1A-OC3-POM Cisco 3825 Connecting ATM
optical module (POM) network module Cisco 3845 Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-20 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 multimode NM-1A-OC3MM Cisco 2691 Connecting ATM
network module Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3725
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 single-mode, NM-1A-OC3SMI Cisco 2691 Connecting ATM
intermediate-reach network module Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3725
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 single-mode, NM-1A-OC3SML Cisco 2691 Connecting ATM
long-reach network module Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3725
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 multimode NM-1A-OC3MM-EP Cisco 3745 Connecting ATM
network module with enhanced Network Modules
performance
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 single-mode, NM-1A-OC3SMI-EP Cisco 3745 Connecting ATM
intermediate-reach network module Network Modules
with enhanced performance
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 single-mode, NM-1A-OC3SML-EP Cisco 3745 Connecting ATM
long-reach network module with Network Modules
enhanced performance
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 multimode NM-1A-OC3MM-1V Cisco 3600 series Connecting ATM
network module with 1 voice interface Network Modules
card slot
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 single-mode, NM-1A-OC3SMI-1V Cisco 3600 series Connecting ATM
intermediate-reach network module Network Modules
with 1 voice interface card slot
1-port ATM OC-3c/STM1 single-mode, NM-1A-OC3SML-1V Cisco 3600 series Connecting ATM
long-reach network module with 1 voice Network Modules
interface card slot
4-port T1 ATM network module with NM-4T1-IMA Cisco 2600 series Connecting T1/E1 IMA
Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
4-port E1 ATM network module with NM-4E1-IMA Cisco 2600 series Connecting T1/E1 IMA
IMA Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
8-port T1 ATM network module with NM-8T1-IMA Cisco 2600 series Connecting T1/E1 IMA
IMA Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
8-port E1 ATM network module with NM-8E1-IMA Cisco 2600 series Connecting T1/E1 IMA
IMA Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-21
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
Channelized T1/E1 and ISDN Network Modules
1-port channelized T1/ISDN-PRI NM-1CT1 Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
2-port channelized T1/ISDN-PRI NM-2CT1 Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
1-port channelized T1/ISDN-PRI NM-1CT1-CSU Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module with CSU Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
2-port channelized T1/ISDN-PRI NM-2CT1-CSU Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module with CSU Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
1-port channelized E1/ISDN-PRI NM-1CE1U Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module, unbalanced Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
2-port channelized E1/ISDN-PRI NM-2CE1U Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module, unbalanced Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
1-port channelized E1/ISDN-PRI NM-1CE1B Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module, balanced Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
2-port channelized E1/ISDN-PRI NM-2CE1B Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module, balanced Cisco 3600 series Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
1-port channelized T1/E1/ISDN-PRI NM-1CE1T1-PRI Cisco 2600XM series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module with G.703 Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 2691
Cisco 3631
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
2-port channelized T1/E1/ISDN-PRI NM-2CE1T1-PRI Cisco 2600XM series Connecting ISDN PRI
network module with G.703 Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 2691
Cisco 3631
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-22 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
4-port ISDN BRI network module—S/T NM-4B-S/T Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN BRI
interface Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
4-port ISDN BRI network module with NM-4B-U Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN BRI
integrated Network Termination 1 Cisco 2811 Network Modules
(NT1)—U interface Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
8-port ISDN BRI network module—S/T NM-8B-S/T Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN BRI
interface Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
8-port ISDN BRI network module with NM-8B-U Cisco 2600 series Connecting ISDN BRI
integrated NT1—U interface Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Circuit Emulation over IP (CEoIP) Network Modules
4-port serial CEoIP network module NM-CEM-4SER Cisco 2600XM series Connecting Circuit Emulation
Cisco 2691 Over IP Network Modules
Cisco 2811
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
4-port T1/E1 CEoIP network module NM-CEM-4TE1 Cisco 2600XM series Connecting Circuit Emulation
Cisco 2691 Over IP Network Modules
Cisco 2811
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Compression Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-23
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
Compression network module NM-COMPR Cisco 3600 series Connecting Compression
Network Modules
Digital Dialup and Remote Access Network Modules
6-modem digital modem network NM-6DM Cisco 3600 series Connecting Digital Modem
module Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
12-modem digital modem network NM-12DM Cisco 3600 series Connecting Digital Modem
module Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
18-modem digital modem network NM-18DM Cisco 3600 series Connecting Digital Modem
module Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
24-modem digital modem network NM-24DM Cisco 3600 series Connecting Digital Modem
module Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
30-modem digital modem network NM-30DM Cisco 3600 series Connecting Digital Modem
module Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
Digital Voice Network Modules
High-density digital voice/fax network NM-HDV Cisco 2600 series Connecting Voice
module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
IP communications high-density digital NM-HDV2 Cisco 2600XM Connecting Voice
voice/fax network module Cisco 2691 Network Modules
Cisco 2811
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
1-port T1/E1 IP communications NM-HDV2-1T1/E1 Cisco 2600 series Connecting Voice
high-density digital voice/fax network Cisco 2811 Network Modules
module Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-24 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
2-port T1/E1 IP communications NM-HDV2-2T1/E1 Cisco 2600 series Connecting Voice
high-density digital voice/fax network Cisco 2811 Network Modules
module Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Ethernet Switching Network Modules
16-port EtherSwitch network module NM-16ESW Cisco 2600 series Connecting Ethernet Switch
Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco MWR 1941-DC
16-port EtherSwitch network module NM-16ESW-1GIG Cisco 2600 series Connecting Ethernet Switch
with 1-port GE expansion module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco MWR 1941-DC
16-port EtherSwitch network module NM-16ESW-PWR Cisco 2600 series Connecting Ethernet Switch
with inline power expansion module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
16-port EtherSwitch network module NM-16ESW-PWR-1GIG Cisco 2600 series Connecting Ethernet Switch
with both 1-port GE and inline power Cisco 2811 Network Modules
expansion modules Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
36-port EtherSwitch high-density NM-36-ESW Cisco 2851 routers Connecting Ethernet Switch
service module (HDSM) Cisco 3660 Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
36-port EtherSwitch high-density NMD-36-ESW-2GIG Cisco 2851 routers Connecting Ethernet Switch
service module (HDSM) with 2 1-port Cisco 3660 Network Modules
GE expansion modules Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-25
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
36-port EtherSwitch high-density NMD-36-ESW-PWR Cisco 2851 routers Connecting Ethernet Switch
service module (HDSM) with inline Cisco 3660 Network Modules
power expansion module Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
36-port EtherSwitch high-density NMD-36-ESW-PWR-2G Cisco 2851 routers Connecting Ethernet Switch
service module (HDSM) with 2 1-port Cisco 3660 Network Modules
GE and 1 inline power expansion Cisco 3700 series
modules Cisco 3800 series
16 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 10/100/1000 NME-16ES-1G Cisco 2691 routers Connecting Cisco
Ethernet port, no StackWise connector (without –48 V) EtherSwitch Service Modules
ports, single-wide, no Power over Cisco 3700 series
Ethernet (PoE) support Cisco 2800 series
Cisco 3800 series
16 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 10/100/1000 NME-16ES-1G-P Cisco 2691 routers Connecting Cisco
Ethernet port, no StackWise connector (without –48 V) EtherSwitch Service Modules
ports, single-wide, with PoE support Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 2800 series
Cisco 3800 series
23 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 10/100/1000 NME-X-23ES-1G Cisco 2851 routers Connecting Cisco
Ethernet port, no StackWise connector Cisco 3800 series EtherSwitch Service Modules
ports, extended single-wide, no PoE
support
23 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 10/100/1000 NME-X-23ES-1G-P Cisco 2851 routers Connecting Cisco
Ethernet port, no StackWise connector Cisco 3800 series EtherSwitch Service Modules
ports, extended single-wide, with PoE
support
24 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 small NME-XD-24ES-1S-P Cisco 2821 routers Connecting Cisco
form-factor pluggable (SFP) port, 2 Cisco 2851 routers EtherSwitch Service Modules
StackWise connector ports, extended Cisco 3800 series
double-wide, with PoE support
48 10/100 Ethernet ports, 2 SFP ports, NME-XD-48ES-2S-P Cisco 2851 routers Connecting Cisco
no StackWise connector ports, extended Cisco 3800 series EtherSwitch Service Modules
double-wide, with PoE support
LAN Network Modules
1-port Ethernet network module NM-1E Cisco 2600 series Connecting Ethernet,
Cisco 3600 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Network Modules
4-port Ethernet network module NM-4E Cisco 2600 series Connecting Ethernet,
Cisco 3600 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Network Modules
1-port Fast Ethernet network module NM-1FE-TX Cisco 3600 series Connecting Ethernet,
(100BASE-TX interface) Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-26 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
1-port Fast Ethernet network module NM-1FE-FX Cisco 2691 Connecting Ethernet,
(100BASE-FX interface) Cisco 3600 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
1-port Fast Ethernet network module NM-1FE-FX-V2 Cisco 2691 Connecting Ethernet,
(100BASE-FX interface), version 2 Cisco 3700 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Cisco 3800 series Network Modules
1-port Fast Ethernet network module NM-1FE-SMF Cisco 3600 series Connecting Ethernet,
(100BASE-SMF) Note Not supported Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
on Cisco 3630 Network Modules
routers

Cisco 3700 series

1-port Gigabit Ethernet network module NM-1GE Cisco 2691 Connecting Gigabit Ethernet
Cisco 3660 Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
LAN and Interface Card Slot Combo Network Modules
2-slot network module (no LAN ports) NM-2W Cisco 2600 series
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco MWR 1941-DC
2-slot network module with 1 Ethernet NM-1E2W Cisco 3600 series Connecting Ethernet,
port Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Network Modules
2-slot network module with 2 Ethernet NM-2E2W Cisco 3600 series Connecting Ethernet,
ports Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Network Modules
2-slot network module with 1 Ethernet NM-1E1R2W Cisco 3600 series Connecting Ethernet,
port and 1 Token Ring port Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Network Modules
2-slot network module with 1 Fast NM-1FE2W Cisco 2691 Connecting Ethernet,
Ethernet port Cisco 3600 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
2-slot network module with 1 Fast NM-1FE2W-V2 Cisco 2691 Connecting Ethernet,
Ethernet port, version 2 Cisco 3600 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
2-slot network module with 2 Fast NM-2FE2W Cisco 2691 Connecting Ethernet,
Ethernet ports Cisco 3600 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-27
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
2-slot network module with 2 Fast NM-2FE2W-V2 Cisco 2691 Connecting Ethernet,
Ethernet ports, version 2 Cisco 3600 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
2-slot network module with 1 Fast NM-1FE1R2W Cisco 2691 Connecting Ethernet,
Ethernet port and 1 Token Ring port Cisco 3600 series Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring
Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
LAN and T1/E1 Combination Network Modules
1-port Fast Ethernet with 1-port NM-1FE1CT1 Cisco 3600 series Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI
channelized T1/ISDN-PRI network Network Modules
module, without CSU
1-port Fast Ethernet with 1-port NM-1FE1CT1-CSU Cisco 3600 series Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI
channelized T1/ISDN-PRI network Network Modules
module, with CSU
1-port Fast Ethernet with 2-port NM-1FE2CT1 Cisco 3600 series Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI
channelized T1/ISDN-PRI network Network Modules
module, without CSU
1-port Fast Ethernet with 2-port NM-1FE2CT1-CSU Cisco 3600 series Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI
channelized T1/ISDN-PRI network Network Modules
module, with CSU
1-port Fast Ethernet with 1-port NM-1FE1CE1B Cisco 3600 series Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI
E1/ISDN PRI, balanced Network Modules
1-port Fast Ethernet with 1-port NM-1FE1CE1U Cisco 3600 series Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI
E1/ISDN PRI, unbalanced Network Modules
1-port Fast Ethernet with 2-port NM-1FE1CE1B Cisco 3600 series Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI
E1/ISDN PRI, balanced Network Modules
1-port Fast Ethernet with 2-port NM-1FE2CE1U Cisco 3600 series Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI
E1/ISDN PRI, unbalanced Network Modules
Serial Connectivity Network Modules
1-port High-Speed Serial interface NM-1HSSI Cisco 2691 Connecting HSSI
(HSSI) network module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-28 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
1-port clear-channel T3/E3 network NM-1T3/E3 Cisco 2650XM Connecting T3/E3 Network
module Cisco 2651XM Modules
Cisco 2691
Cisco 2811
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3660
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco MWR 1941-DC
4-port serial network module NM-4T Cisco 3600 series Connecting Serial
Cisco 3700 series Network Modules
Cisco 3800 series
4-port asynchronous/synchronous serial NM-4A/S Cisco 2600 series Connecting Serial
network module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco MWR 1941-DC
8-port asynchronous/synchronous serial NM-8A/S Cisco 2600 series Connecting Serial
network module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco MWR 1941-DC
16-port asynchronous/synchronous NM-16A/S Cisco 2600 series Connecting Serial
serial network module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
16-port asynchronous serial network NM-16A Cisco 2600 series Connecting Serial
module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco MWR 1941-DC

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-29
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Related Documents

Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules (continued)

Supported on Cisco
Product Description Cisco Product ID Routers See Section
32-port asynchronous serial network NM-32A Cisco 2600 series Connecting Serial
module Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3600 series
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Wireless and Satellite Network Modules
Cisco wireless multipoint subscriber NM-WMDA Cisco 2600 series Connecting Wireless
unit network module Cisco 3600 series Multipoint Network Modules
Cisco wireless LAN controller network NM-AIR-WLC6 Cisco 2811 Connecting Cisco Wireless
module Cisco 2821 LAN Controller Modules
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco wireless LAN controller enhanced NME-AIR-WLC8-K9 Cisco 2811 Connecting Cisco Wireless
network module Cisco 2821 LAN Controller Enhanced
Cisco 2851 Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco wireless LAN controller enhanced NME-AIR-WLC12-K9 Cisco 2811 Connecting Cisco Wireless
network module Cisco 2821 LAN Controller Enhanced
Cisco 2851 Network Modules
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series
Cisco IP VSAT satellite WAN network NM-1VSAT-GILAT Cisco 2600XM series Connecting Cisco IP VSAT
module Cisco 2691 Satellite WAN
Cisco 2811 Network Modules
Cisco 2821
Cisco 2851
Cisco 3700 series
Cisco 3800 series

Related Documents
Cisco product documentation is available online at www.cisco.com (also known as Cisco.com) and is
accessible through multiple navigation paths.
To access the documents and tools described in this section, you must have an account on Cisco.com. If
you do not have an account or have forgotten your username or password, click Cancel at the login
dialog box and follow the instructions that appear.
To print a document in its original page format, access the online document, and click the PDF icon.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-30 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Related Documents

Tip Some authors provide a full-length “book” PDF, usually located above or below the links to the book
chapter files on the main book index page. Use this book-length PDF to generate printed copies of the
entire book.

Hardware Documentation
Cisco hardware documentation for Cisco access routers provides the following three categories of
information:
• Hardware installation—Basic to advanced hardware installation procedures
• Hardware reference information and specifications—Dimensions, operating environment, cable
pinouts
• Regulatory compliance and safety information—Safety warnings translated into multiple languages
and statements of compliance with regulatory requirements from various countries around the world

Installation Documents
To find chassis installation instructions for any Cisco router, access the documents located at Technical
Support & Documentation > Product Support > Routers > Router series you are using > Install and
Upgrade > Install and Upgrade Guides.
To find installation instructions for Cisco network modules, access the Cisco Network Modules
Hardware Installation Guide.
To find installation instructions for Cisco interface cards, access the Cisco Interface Cards Hardware
Installation Guide.

Reference Documents
To find cabling specifications for Cisco modular access routers, access the Cisco Modular Access Router
Cable Specifications located at Technical Support & Documentation > Product Support > Routers
> Router series you are using > Reference Guides > Technical References.

Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information Documents

To find regulatory compliance and safety information for a Cisco router, access the documents located
at Technical Support & Documentation > Product Support > Routers > Router series you are using
> Install and Upgrade > Install and Upgrade Guides.
To find regulatory compliance and safety information for Cisco network modules and Cisco interface
cards used on Cisco access routers, access the documents located at Technical Support &
Documentation > Product Support > Cisco Network Modules > Install and Upgrade > Install and
Upgrade Guides.

Cisco IOS Software Documentation

Cisco IOS software documentation provides the following categories of information:

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-31
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Related Documents

• Software configuration—Basic to advanced software configuration procedures, sample

configurations
• Software references—Command references, system message guides
• Software release information—Supported products, caveats
• Software release tools—Cisco Feature Navigator II, Cisco IOS Upgrade Planner, software
downloads, security notices and advisories

Cisco IOS Software Configuration Documents

To find initial configuration instructions specific to the Cisco router you are using, access the documents
located at Technical Support & Documentation > Product Support > Routers > Router series you
are using > Configure > Configuration Guides.
To find configuration examples specific to the Cisco router you are using, access the documents located
at Technical Support & Documentation > Product Support > Routers > Router series you are using
> Configure > Configuration Examples and TechNotes.
To find advanced configuration instructions for a specific feature, access the documents located at
Technical Support & Documentation > Product Support > Cisco IOS Software > Cisco IOS release
you are using > Configure > Feature Guides.

Cisco IOS Software Reference Documents

To find command reference information for the Cisco IOS software release you are using, access the
documents located at Technical Support & Documentation > Product Support > Cisco IOS Software
> Cisco IOS release you are using > Reference Guides > Command References.

Timesaver You can also use the online Command Lookup tool, located at Technical Support & Documentation >
Tools & Resources > Command Lookup Tool.

To find system message information for the Cisco IOS software release you are using, access the
documents located at Technical Support & Documentation > Product Support > Cisco IOS Software
> Cisco IOS release you are using > Troubleshoot and Alerts > Error and System Messages.

Cisco IOS Software Release Documents and Tools

To find Cisco IOS software release information for the Cisco IOS software release you are using, access
the documents located at Technical Support & Documentation > Product Support >
Cisco IOS Software > Cisco IOS release you are using > General Information > Release Notes.
To view Cisco IOS software features by release, or to compare two different Cisco IOS releases, access
Cisco Feature Navigator II, located at Products and Solutions > Cisco IOS Software > All Cisco IOS
Software > Cisco Feature Navigator II.
To download Cisco IOS software, or to locate license agreements and warranty information for a
Cisco IOS software release, access the Software Center, located at Technical Support &
Documentation > Downloads.
To plan for a Cisco IOS upgrade, access the Cisco IOS Upgrade Planner, located at Technical
Support & Documentation > Tools and Resources > Cisco IOS Upgrade Planner.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-32 OL-2485-20
Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Where to Go Next

To view Cisco IOS security advisories that might apply to your product, access the Cisco Product
Security Advisories and Notices website located at
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/707/advisory.html.

Timesaver You can also sign up to receive e-mail alerts using the Product Alert Tool, located at Technical
Support & Documentation > Tools and Resources > Product Alert Tool.

Where to Go Next
For network module installation information, go to Chapter 2, “Installing Cisco Network Modules in
Cisco Access Routers.”
For regulatory compliance and safety information, see the Cisco Network Modules and Interface Cards
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document.
For hardware information about specific network modules, use Table 1-6 Platform Support for Cisco
Network Modules in this document to locate the appropriate chapter.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 1-33
 Chapter 1 Overview of Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
Where to Go Next

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

1-34 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 2
Installing Cisco Network Modules in
Cisco Access Routers

This chapter provides information you should know before and during installation of Cisco network
modules in Cisco access routers, and contains the following sections:
• Recommended Practices for Cisco Network Modules, page 2-1
• Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers, page 2-5
• Removing or Replacing Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers, page 2-18
• Installing Cisco Interface Cards in 1- or 2-Slot Network Modules, page 2-24
• Installing Other Accessories on Cisco Network Modules, page 2-26
• Where to Go Next, page 2-27

Recommended Practices for Cisco Network Modules

This section describes recommended practices for safe and effective installation of the hardware
described in this document, and includes the following sections:
• Safety Recommendations
• Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage
• General Maintenance Guidelines for Cisco Network Modules
Safety warnings included in this section apply to all Cisco network modules used on Cisco access
routers.

Note Recommendations and warnings for specific network modules are documented in the chapter specific to
the network module.

Safety Recommendations
To prevent hazardous conditions, follow these safety recommendations while working with this
equipment:
• Keep tools away from walk areas where you or others could fall over them.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-1
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Recommended Practices for Cisco Network Modules

• Do not wear loose clothing around the router. Fasten your tie or scarf and roll up your sleeves to
prevent clothing from being caught in the chassis.
• Wear safety glasses when working under any conditions that might be hazardous to your eyes.
• Locate the emergency power-off switch in the room before you start working. If an electrical
accident occurs, shut the power off.
• Before working on the router, turn off the power and unplug the power cord.
• Disconnect all power sources before doing the following:
– Installing or removing a router chassis
– Working near power supplies
• Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist.
• Always check that power is disconnected from a circuit.
• Remove possible hazards from your work area, such as damp floors, ungrounded power extension
cables, or missing safety grounds.
• If an electrical accident occurs, proceed as follows:
– Use caution; do not become a victim yourself.
– Turn off power to the room using the emergency power-off switch.
– If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, determine the condition of the
victim and then call for help.
– Determine if the person needs rescue breathing or external cardiac compressions; then take
appropriate action.

Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Electrostatic discharge can damage equipment and impair electrical circuitry. Electrostatic discharge
occurs when electronic printed circuit cards, such as those used in Cisco network modules, are
improperly handled and can result in complete or intermittent equipment failure. Always observe the
following electrostatic discharge damage (ESD) prevention procedures when installing, removing, and
replacing Cisco network modules, Cisco interface cards, Cisco expansion modules, or other electronic
printed circuit cards:
• Make sure that the router chassis is electrically connected to earth ground.
• Wear an ESD-preventive wrist strap, and make sure that it makes good contact with your skin.
• Connect the wrist strap clip to an unpainted portion of the chassis frame to channel unwanted ESD
voltages to ground.

Caution The wrist strap and clip must be used correctly to ensure proper ESD protection. Periodically confirm
that the resistance value of the ESD-preventive wrist strap is between 1 and 10 megohms (Mohm).

• If no wrist strap is available, ground yourself by touching the metal part of the router chassis.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Recommended Practices for Cisco Network Modules

General Maintenance Guidelines for Cisco Network Modules

The following maintenance guidelines apply to Cisco network modules:
• Keep the router chassis area clear and dust-free during and after installation.
• If you remove the chassis cover for any reason, store it in a safe place.
• Do not perform any action that creates a hazard to people or makes equipment unsafe.
• Keep walk areas clear to prevent falls or damage to equipment.
• Follow installation and maintenance procedures as documented by Cisco Systems, Inc.

Safety Warnings for Cisco Network Modules

The following safety warning statements apply to all hardware procedures involving Cisco network
modules for Cisco access routers. Translations of these warnings are available in the Cisco Network
Modules and Interface Cards Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document, which ships
with all individual Cisco network module orders, and is also available online.

Warning Before working on a chassis or working near power supplies, unplug the power cord on AC units;
disconnect the power at the circuit breaker on DC units. Statement 12

Warning Two people are required to lift the chassis. Grasp the chassis underneath the lower edge and lift with
both hands. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. To prevent
damage to the chassis and components, never attempt to lift the chassis with the handles on the
power supplies or on the interface processors, or by the plastic panels on the front of the chassis.
These handles were not designed to support the weight of the chassis. Statement 194

Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install or replace this equipment.
Statement 1030

Warning Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and
regulations. Statement 1040

The following warnings apply in Australia:

Warning Do not touch the power supply when the power cord is connected. For systems with a power
switch, line voltages are present within the power supply even when the power switch is OFF and
the power cord is connected. For systems without a power switch, line voltages are present within
the power supply when the power cord is connected. Statement 4

Warning Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove jewelry (including rings,
necklaces, and watches). Metal objects will heat up when connected to power and ground and
can cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the terminals. Statement 43

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-3
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Recommended Practices for Cisco Network Modules

Warning This equipment is to be installed and maintained by service personnel only as defined by AS/NZS
3260 Clause 1.2.14.3 Service Personnel. Statement 88

Warning This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails. Statement 198

Warning Incorrect connection of this or connected equipment to a general purpose outlet could result in a
hazardous situation. Statement 212

Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable
is connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 125

Warning Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity.
Statement 1001

Warning To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits. LAN ports contain SELV circuits, and WAN ports
contain TNV circuits. Both LAN and WAN ports may use RJ-45 connectors. Use caution when
connecting cables. Statement 1021

Warning Hazardous network voltages are present in WAN ports regardless of whether power to the router
is OFF or ON. To avoid electric shock, use caution when working near WAN ports. When detaching
cables, detach the end away from the router first. Statement 1026

Warning Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and regulations.
Statement 1040

Warning Before opening the chassis, disconnect the telephone-network cables to avoid contact with
telephone-network voltages. Statement 1041

Warning The telecommunications lines must be disconnected 1) before unplugging the main power
connector and/or 2) while the housing is open. Statement 1043

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

This section describes installation tasks for Cisco network modules used on Cisco access routers, and
contains the following subsections:
• Tools and Equipment Required During Cisco Network Module Installation
• Installing and Removing Blank Faceplates
– Installing Blank Faceplates on Cisco Access Routers
– Removing Blank Faceplates from Cisco Access Routers
• Preparing Cisco Router Slots for Network Module Installation
– Installing Slot Dividers
– Removing Slot Dividers
– Installing Slot Adapters
– Removing Slot Adapters
• Installing Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension Voice Network Modules in Cisco
Access Routers
• Installing Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Note The following routers do not support online insertion and removal (OIR) of network modules:
• Cisco 2600 series
• Cisco 2811
• Cisco 2821
• Cisco 2851
• Cisco 3620
• Cisco 3640
• Cisco MWR 1941-DC
To avoid damaging the router, turn off electrical power and disconnect network cables before inserting
or removing a network module into these routers.

Tools and Equipment Required During Cisco Network Module Installation

You will need the following tools and equipment while working with Cisco network modules:
• Number 1 Phillips screwdriver or a small flat-blade screwdriver
• ESD-preventive wrist strap
• (For routers using DC power) Tape to secure DC circuit breaker handle

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-5
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Summary of Installation Tasks

When installing a network module in a Cisco access router, perform the following tasks:

Table 2-1 Network Module Hardware Installation Tasks for Cisco Access Routers

For Cisco 2600 Series, Cisco 2811, Cisco 3600 Series

(Except Cisco 3660 Routers), and Cisco MWR 1941-DC For Cisco 2821, Cisco 2851, Cisco 3700 Series, Cisco 3800
Routers Series, and Cisco 3660 Routers
Step 1 Turn off power to the router. Turn off power to the router.
Step 2 Remove blank faceplates from the slots you plan to use. Remove blank faceplates from the slots you plan to use.
(See the “Removing Blank Faceplates from Cisco Access (See the “Removing Blank Faceplates from Cisco Access
Routers” section on page 2-8.) Routers” section on page 2-8.)
Step 3 Install the network module. (See the “Installing Prepare the slot for the network module form factor you
Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension are installing. (See the “Preparing Cisco Router Slots for
Voice Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” and Network Module Installation” section on page 2-8.)
“Installing Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide
Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” sections.)
Step 4 Install blank faceplates where appropriate. (See the Install the network module. (See the “Installing
“Installing Blank Faceplates on Cisco Access Routers” Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension
section on page 2-7.) Voice Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers”
section on page 2-15 and “Installing Double-Wide and
Extended Double-Wide Network Modules in
Cisco Access Routers” section on page 2-16 sections.)
Step 5 — Install blank faceplates where appropriate. (See the
“Installing Blank Faceplates on Cisco Access Routers”
section on page 2-7.)

Installing and Removing Blank Faceplates

All empty chassis slots for network modules, extension voice modules, or interface cards must be
covered with blank faceplates to ensure proper cooling airflow and to prevent electromagnetic
interference.

Note Blank network module faceplates are for single-wide network module slots only.

To install a blank faceplate over a network module slot set up for an extended single-wide, double-wide,
or extended double-wide network module, you must prepare the slot for single-wide network modules.
See Table 2-3 and Table 2-4 for information on preparing network module slots for different network
module form factors.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Table 2-2 Preparing to Install Blank Network Module Faceplates on Cisco Access Router Network Module Slots

On an Extended Single-Wide Slot On a Double-Wide Slot On an Extended Double-Wide Slot

Step 1 Install a slot adapter on the right side Install a slot divider in the slot. (See Install a slot divider in the slot. (See
of the slot. (See the “Installing Slot the “Installing Slot Dividers” section the “Installing Slot Dividers” section
Adapters” section on page 2-12.) on page 2-10.) on page 2-10.)
Step 2 Install the blank faceplate. (See the Install a slot adapter in the right side Install slot adapters in the right sides
“Installing Blank Faceplates on Cisco of the left slot. (See the “Installing of both slots. (See the “Installing Slot
Access Routers” section on Slot Adapters” section on page 2-12.) Adapters” section on page 2-12.)
page 2-7.)
Step 3 — Install one blank faceplate over each Install one blank faceplate over each
slot. (See the “Installing Blank slot. (See the “Installing Blank
Faceplates on Cisco Access Routers” Faceplates on Cisco Access Routers”
section on page 2-7.) section on page 2-7.)

Installing Blank Faceplates on Cisco Access Routers

To install a blank faceplate, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Determine which type of blank network module faceplate you are using. (See Figure 2-1 and
Figure 2-2.)

Figure 2-1 Blank Network Module Panel with Screws

1 1

H6552

1 Captive screws for securing blank faceplate

Figure 2-2 Blank Network Module Panel with Tabs

1 2
88397

1 Snap-lock tab (use screwdriver to remove) 2 Tab

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-7
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Step 2 Install the blank faceplate.

• (For blank faceplates with mounting screws) Align the captive screws with the screw holes on the
chassis. Using either a number 1 Phillips screwdriver or a small flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the
captive screws until the blank faceplate is flush with the chassis.
• (For blank faceplates with tabs) Align the blank faceplate tabs with the slots on the chassis. Press
the blank faceplate against the chassis until the tabs pop into place. The blank faceplate is flush with
the chassis when properly installed.
Step 3 Continue with hardware installation tasks.

Removing Blank Faceplates from Cisco Access Routers

To remove blank network module faceplates, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Determine which type of blank network module faceplate you are using. (See Figure 2-1 and
Figure 2-2.)
Step 2 Remove the blank faceplate.
• (For blank faceplates with mounting screws) Using either a number 1 Phillips screwdriver or a small
flat-blade screwdriver, unscrew the captive screws and remove the blank faceplate from the chassis
slot you plan to use.
• (For blank faceplates with tabs) Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the snap-lock tab on
the left side of the faceplate (see Figure 2-2). The faceplate pops out when the tab is released.

Tip Save blank faceplates for future use.

Step 3 Continue with hardware installation tasks.

Preparing Cisco Router Slots for Network Module Installation

Several Cisco access routers have flexible network module slots to support all four Cisco network
module form factors. Before installing a network module, you must prepare the slot for the network
module’s particular form factor.
The following Cisco access routers may require network module slot preparation before installation of
the network module:
• Cisco 2821 and 2851 routers
• Cisco 3660 routers (single-wide and double-wide network modules only)
• Cisco 3700 series routers (single-wide and double-wide network modules only)
• Cisco 3800 series routers

Tip For an introduction to Cisco network module form factors, see the “Introduction to Cisco Network
Module Form Factors” section on page 1-1.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

To prepare a network module slot for a single-wide or extended single-wide network module, perform
the tasks listed in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Preparing Network Module Slots for Single-Wide and Extended Single-Wide Network Modules

For Single-Wide Network Modules For Extended Single-Wide Network Modules

Step 1 Remove the blank faceplates from the slots you plan to Remove the blank faceplates from the slots you plan to
use. (See the “Removing Blank Faceplates from Cisco use. (See the “Removing Blank Faceplates from Cisco
Access Routers” section on page 2-8.) Access Routers” section on page 2-8.)
Step 2 Remove the slot adapters on the right side of the router Insert the slot divider. (See the “Installing Slot Dividers”
slot. (See the “Removing Slot Adapters” section on section on page 2-10.)
page 2-14.)
Step 3 Insert the slot divider. (See the “Installing Slot Dividers” Install the network module. (See the “Installing
section on page 2-10.) Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension
Voice Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers”
section on page 2-15.)
Step 4 (For single-wide network modules only) Insert the slot —
adapter on the right side of the slot you plan to use. (See
the “Installing Slot Adapters” section on page 2-12.)
Step 5 Install the network module. (See the “Installing —
Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension
Voice Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers”
section on page 2-15.)

Tip On Cisco 3800 series routers, extension voice modules can be installed in standard network module
slots. When an extension module is installed in a standard network module slot, treat an extension voice
module like a single-wide network module.

To prepare a network module slot for a double-wide or extended double-wide network module, perform
the tasks listed in Table 2-4.

Table 2-4 Preparing Network Module Slots for Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Modules

For Double-Wide Network Modules For Extended Double-Wide Network Modules

Step 1 Remove blank faceplates from the slots you plan to use. Remove blank faceplates from the slots you plan to use.
(See the “Removing Blank Faceplates from Cisco Access (See the “Removing Blank Faceplates from Cisco Access
Routers” section on page 2-8.) Routers” section on page 2-8.)
Step 2 Remove the slot adapters on the right side of each router Remove the slot adapter on the right side of the
slot. (See the “Removing Slot Adapters” section on applicable router slot. (See the “Removing Slot
page 2-14.) Adapters” section on page 2-14.)
Timesaver If the slot adapter is already installed
against the right side wall of the router
chassis, skip this step.
Step 3 Remove the slot divider. (See the “Removing Slot Remove the slot divider. (See the “Removing Slot
Dividers” section on page 2-12.) Dividers” section on page 2-12.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-9
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Table 2-4 Preparing Network Module Slots for Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Modules (continued)

For Double-Wide Network Modules For Extended Double-Wide Network Modules

Step 4 (For double-wide network modules only) Insert 2 slot Install the network module. (See the “Installing
adapters on the right side of the router slot. (See the Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension
“Installing Slot Adapters” section on page 2-12.) Voice Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers”
section on page 2-15.)
Step 5 Install the network module. (See the “Installing —
Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension
Voice Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers”
section on page 2-15.)

Installing Slot Dividers

Slot dividers (see Figure 2-3) are used to customize network module slots for different Cisco network
module form factors. Slot dividers are used on the following Cisco access routers:
• Cisco 2851 routers
• Cisco 3660 routers
• Cisco 3745 routers
• Cisco 3800 series
Slot dividers are installed to permit use of extension voice modules (on Cisco 3800 series routers only),
single-wide, and extended single-wide network modules in modular router slots. To determine whether
you need to install or remove slot dividers on your Cisco access router, see Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.

Figure 2-3 Slot Divider for Network Module Slots (Sample Shows Divider for Cisco 2851 and
3800 Series)
121062

To install a slot divider, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Remove any installed network modules, blank faceplates, and slot adapters from the router slot you plan
to use.
Step 2 Insert the top rails of the slot divider between the two guide rails in the top of the network module slot.
(See Figure 2-4.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-10 OL-2485-20
Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Figure 2-4 Inserting a Slot Divider into a Network Module Slot

T
D
M
0

S
L
O
T
2

S
L

117050
O
T
0

S
L
O
T
X
A= FD K 3
A= LIN A
T
A= ACEED GE
0/0
F
S= SP
0/1 S
GE S L
A L O
T
F 1

S 0
AIM
1
L 0 AIM
1 PVDM
DM
2 PV
PVDM

Step 3 Push the slot divider in until it is fully seated.

Step 4 Tighten the retention screw on the front of the slot divider with a number 1 Phillips screwdriver. (See
Figure 2-5.) When the slot divider is fully inserted, its front surface is flush with the panel of the router.
(See Figure 2-5.)

Figure 2-5 Tightening the Slot Divider in a Network Module Slot

T
D
M
0

S
L
O
T
2

S
L

121402
O
T
0

S
L
O
T
X
A= FD K 3
A= LIN A
T
A= ACEED GE
0/0
F
S= SP
0/1 S
GE S L
A L O
T
F 1

S 0
AIM
1
L 0 AIM
DM
1 PV
PVDM
PV DM2

Figure 2-6 Slot Divider Installed in a Network Module Slot

T
D
M
0

S
L
O
T
2

S
L
117051

O
T
0

S
L
O
T
X
A= FD K 3
A= LIN A
T
A= ACEED GE
0/0
F
S= SP
0/1 S
GE S L
A L O
T
F 1

S 0
AIM
1
L 0 AIM
DM
1 PV
PVDM
PV DM2

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-11
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Step 5 Proceed with hardware configuration tasks as listed in Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.

Removing Slot Dividers

Slot dividers are removed to permit use of double-wide and extended double-wide network modules in
modular router slots. To determine whether you need to install or remove slot dividers on your Cisco
access router, see Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.
To remove slot dividers from network module slots, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Remove any installed network modules, blank faceplates, and slot adapters from the router slot you plan
to use.
Step 2 Loosen the retention screw on the front of the slot divider.
Step 3 Pull the slot divider straight out of the network module slot.
Step 4 Proceed with hardware configuration tasks as listed in Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.

Installing Slot Adapters

Slot adapters (see Figure 2-7) are used to customize network module slots for different Cisco network
module form factors. Slot adapters are used on the following Cisco access routers:
• Cisco 2821
• Cisco 2851
• Cisco 3800 series
Slot adapters permit installation of extension voice modules (on Cisco 3800 series routers only),
single-wide, and extended single-wide network modules in modular router slots.
To determine whether you need to install or remove slot adapters on your Cisco access router, see
Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-12 OL-2485-20
Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Figure 2-7 Sample Slot Adapter for Network Module Slots in Cisco Access Routers

121063
To install a slot adapter, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Remove any installed network modules from the router slot you plan to use.
Step 2 Determine the location for slot adapter installation. (See Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9.) The extended
single-wide network modules use a slot divider instead of a slot adapter. (See Figure 2-6.)

Figure 2-8 Slot Divider and Adapters Locations for Standard Single-Wide Network Modules (Generic
Router)

121386

1
2

1 Slot divider 2 Slot adapters

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-13
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Figure 2-9 Slot Adapter Locations for Double-Wide Network Modules (Generic Router)

121388
2
1

1 Slot adapter 2 Slot adapter

Step 3 Install other hardware if necessary. (See Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.)
Step 4 Orient the slot adapter so the tab on the rear of the slot adapter aligns with the slot on the router
backplane.

Note When correctly aligned, the captive screw on the slot adapter aligns with a threaded hole in the
chassis, slot divider, or adjacent slot adapter, depending on your current hardware setup.

Step 5 Slide the slot adapter into the slot.

Step 6 Using a number 1 Phillips or small flat-head screwdriver, tighten the captive screw to secure the slot
adapter.

Tip The slot adapter can be secured to the router chassis, to a slot divider, or to another slot adapter,
depending on its installation location. See Figure 2-8 for possible variations.

Step 7 Proceed with hardware configuration tasks as listed in Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.

Removing Slot Adapters

Slot adapters are removed to permit use of double-wide and extended double-wide network modules in
modular router slots. To determine whether you need to install or remove slot adapters on your Cisco
access router, see Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-14 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

To remove slot adapters from network module slots, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Remove any installed network modules and blank faceplates from the router slot you plan to use.
Step 2 Using a number 1 Phillips or small flat-head screwdriver, loosen the captive screw on the slot adapter.
(See Figure 2-7.)
Step 3 Slide the slot adapter from the slot.
Step 4 Proceed with hardware configuration tasks as listed in Table 2-3 and Table 2-4.

Installing Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension Voice Network

Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Network modules can be installed either before or after mounting the router, whichever is more
convenient. To install a network module, follow these steps:

Step 1 Turn off electrical power to the router. Leave the power cable plugged in to channel ESD voltages to
ground.
(For the Cisco MWR 1941-DC router) Turn off power by turning the DC power source circuit breaker
to OFF. Tape the circuit breaker in the OFF position. To channel ESD voltages to ground, do not remove
the wire from the ground lug.

Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit.
To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC
circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit
breaker in the OFF position. Statement 7

Step 2 Remove all network cables, including telephone cables, from the rear panel of the router.
Step 3 Remove the blank faceplates installed over the slot you intend to use. (See the “Installing and Removing
Blank Faceplates” section on page 2-6.)

Tip Save blank faceplates for future use.

Step 4 (For certain Cisco routers) Prepare the slot for the network module form factor you are installing. (See
the “Preparing Cisco Router Slots for Network Module Installation” section on page 2-8.)
Step 5 Align the network module with the guides in the chassis walls or slot divider and slide it gently into the
slot. (See Figure 2-10.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-15
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Figure 2-10 Installing Single-Wide and Extended Single-Wide Network Modules in Cisco Access
Routers

ACT
WO

SERIAL

H9998
ASYNC
15 11
14 10
ASYNC 24-31
7 3
13 9 ASYNC 16-23
ETHERNET 0 12 8
6 2
5 1
4 0

15 11
14 10
ASYNC 8-15
7 3
13 9
6 2
ASYNC 0-7
12 8
5 1
4 0
EN

2
1

1 Single-wide network module 2 Router chassis

Step 6 Using the network module handle, push the module into place until you feel the edge connector seat
securely into the connector on the router backplane. The network module faceplate should contact the
chassis rear panel.
Step 7 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the captive mounting screws on the module
faceplate.
Step 8 Proceed with connecting the network module to the network and power up the router.

Tip See the “Where to Go Next” section on page 2-27 for information on locating additional hardware
documentation.

Warning After wiring the DC power supply, remove the tape from the circuit breaker switch handle and
reinstate power by moving the handle of the circuit breaker to the ON position. Statement 8

Installing Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Modules in

Cisco Access Routers
Network modules can be installed either before or after mounting the router, whichever is more
convenient. To install a double-wide or extended double-wide network module, perform these steps:

Step 1 Turn off electrical power to the router. Leave the power cable plugged in to channel ESD voltages to
ground.
Step 2 Remove all network cables, including telephone cables, from the rear panel of the router.
Step 3 Remove the blank faceplates installed over the slot you intend to use. (See the “Installing and Removing
Blank Faceplates” section on page 2-6.)

Tip Save blank faceplates for future use.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-16 OL-2485-20
Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers

Step 4 (For certain Cisco routers) Prepare the slot for the network module form factor you are installing. (See
the “Preparing Cisco Router Slots for Network Module Installation” section on page 2-8.)
Step 5 Confirm that network module levers are in the open position away from the network module faceplate.
(See Figure 2-11.)

Figure 2-11 Open and Closed Positions for Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Module
Ejector Levers

Captive
screws

Captive
screws

121469
Ejector
levers

Ejector
levers

Timesaver If the network module ejector levers are not in the open position during installation, the network module
does not seat properly and connections between the network module and the router backplane are not
made. Install the network module with the ejector levers in the open position.

Step 6 Align the network module with the guides in the chassis walls and slide it gently into the slot (see
Figure 2-12). Once seated, the ejector levers close halfway.

Figure 2-12 Installing Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Modules in Cisco Access
Routers

121470

T
D
M
0

S
L
O
T
2

S
L
O
T
0

S
L
O
T
X
A= FD K 3
A= LIN A
T
A= ACEED GE
0/0
F
S= SP
0/1 S
GE S L
A L O
T
F 1

S 0
AIM
1
L 0 AIM
DM
1 PV
PVDM
PV DM2

Caution The double-wide and extended double-wide network modules can be heavy. Avoid touching the network
module board to support the module. Handle the network module by the faceplate only to avoid damage
to board components.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-17
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Removing or Replacing Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers

Step 7 Push the ejector levers so they make contact with the network module faceplate to finish seating the
network module and lock the network module into place in the router slot. (See Figure 2-13.)

Figure 2-13 Seating a Double-Wide or Extended Double-Wide Network Module

T
D
M
0

121471
S
L
O
T
2

S
L
O
T
0

S
L
O
T
X
A= FD K 3
A= LIN A
T
A= ACEED GE
0/0
F
S= SP
0/1 S
GE S L
A L O
T
F 1

S 0
AIM
1
L 0 AIM
1 PVDM
2 PVDM
PVDM

Step 8 Proceed with connecting the network module to the network and power up the router.

Tip See the “Where to Go Next” section on page 2-27 for information on locating additional hardware
documentation.

Removing or Replacing Cisco Network Modules for Cisco

Access Routers
This section describes removal and replacement procedures for Cisco network modules used in Cisco
access routers, and contains the following subsections:
• Removing or Replacing Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension Voice Network
Modules from Cisco Access Routers
• Removing or Replacing Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Modules in
Cisco Access Routers
• Replacing Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers with Online Insertion and Removal Support
• Removing or Replacing Application and Service Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-18 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Removing or Replacing Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers

Removing or Replacing Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension

Voice Network Modules from Cisco Access Routers
To remove or replace a single-wide, extended single-wide, or extension voice network module from a
Cisco access router, perform these steps:

Step 1 Turn off power to the router.

• (For routers without OIR support) Turn off electrical power to the router. Leave the power cable
plugged in to channel ESD voltages to ground.
• (For the Cisco MWR 1941-DC router) Turn off power by turning the DC power source circuit
breaker to OFF. Tape the circuit breaker in the OFF position. To channel ESD voltages to ground,
do not remove the wire from the ground lug.

Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit.
To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC
circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit
breaker in the OFF position. Statement 7

Step 2 Unplug all network interface cables from the rear panel of the router.

Timesaver To make it easier to work with network cables, label the cables or prepare a network cabling diagram
before removing network interface cables from the network module.

Step 3 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the captive mounting screws on the module
faceplate.
Step 4 Using the module handle, pull the network module from the router slot.

Caution To avoid damaging the network module, always handle the network module by the handle or faceplate.
Do not touch the circuit board.

Figure 2-14 Removing Single-Wide and Extended Single-Wide Network Modules from Cisco Access
Routers
ACT

WO

SERIAL

ASYNC
15 11
14 10
ASYNC 24-31
7 3
13 9
6 2
ASYNC 16-23
12 8
5 1
4 0

15 11
14 10
ASYNC 8-15
7 3
13 9
6 2
ASYNC 0-7
12 8
5 1
4 0
EN
121074

2 1

1 Router chassis 2 Single-wide network module

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-19
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Removing or Replacing Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers

Step 5 Install the appropriate item.

• (If you are replacing the module) Install a replacement module using the procedures described in the
“Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” section on page 2-5
• (If you are not replacing the module) Install a blank faceplate over the empty slots to ensure proper
airflow. (See the “Installing and Removing Blank Faceplates” section on page 2-6.)

Tip See the “Where to Go Next” section on page 2-27 for information on locating additional hardware
documentation.

Removing or Replacing Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network

Modules in Cisco Access Routers
To remove or replace a double-wide or extended double-wide network module, perform these steps:

Step 1 Turn off electrical power to the router. Leave the power cable plugged in to channel ESD voltages to
ground.
Step 2 Unplug all network interface cables from the network module.

Timesaver To make it easier to work with network cables, label the cables or prepare a network cabling diagram
before removing network interface cables from the network module.

Step 3 Using your thumbs, open the levers on the network module faceplate. (See Figure 2-15.) When the
ejector levers open, they unseat the network module from the router. The network module faceplate
moves away from the router rear panel.

Figure 2-15 Removing Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Modules from Cisco Access
Routers
121472

T
D
M
0

S
L
O
T
2

S
L
O
T
0

S
L
O
T
X
A= FD K 3
A= LIN A
T
A= ACEED GE
0/0
F
S= SP
0/1 S
GE S L
A L O
T
F 1

S 0
AIM
1
L AIM
DM0
DM 1 PV
2 PV
PVDM

Step 4 Using your fingers, grasp the edges of the network module faceplate, near the bottom where the board
attaches. Pull the network module from the router slot.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-20 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Removing or Replacing Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers

Caution The double-wide and extended double-wide network modules can be heavy. Avoid touching the network
module board to support the module. Handle the network module by the faceplate only to avoid damage
to board components.

Step 5 Install the appropriate item.

• (If you are replacing the module) Install a replacement module using the procedures described in the
“Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” section on page 2-5
• (If you are not replacing the module) Install blank faceplates over the empty slot to ensure proper
airflow. (See the “Installing and Removing Blank Faceplates” section on page 2-6.)

Tip See the “Where to Go Next” section on page 2-27 for information on locating additional hardware
documentation.

Replacing Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers with Online Insertion

and Removal Support
Online insertion and removal (OIR) provides uninterrupted network operation, maintains routing
information, and ensures session preservation. The following Cisco access routers support OIR for
similar network modules:
• Cisco 3660 routers
• Cisco 3745 routers
• Cisco 3845 routers

Caution These Cisco access routers support OIR with similar network modules only. If you remove a network
module, install the same model network module in its place. For 1- or 2-slot network modules, you must
install the same network module and interface card combination.

Caution Do not perform OIR on interface cards in 1- or 2-slot network modules. To avoid damage to the interface
card and to the network module, turn off electrical power and disconnect network cables before inserting
an interface card into a network module slot.

OIR procedures require some interaction with Cisco IOS software. For more information on Cisco IOS
software-related tasks, see documents listed in the “Where to Go Next” section on page 2-27.

Tip Not all Cisco network modules and Cisco interface cards support OIR. Check the hardware
documentation specific to your network module or interface card to confirm OIR support before starting
OIR procedures.

To replace a network module with OIR support from a Cisco access router, perform the following steps:

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-21
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Removing or Replacing Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers

Step 1 Initiate a console session with your Cisco access router.

Step 2 Enter interface configuration mode and shut down each interface on the network module you plan to
remove. (See Example 2-1.)

Example 2-1 Shutting Down Interfaces on Cisco Network Modules

Router(config)# interface fastethernet 1/0

Router(config-if)# shutdown

Tip To see information for all interfaces available on the network module, use the show interfaces
command.

Step 3 Repeat Step 2 for each interface on the network module.

Step 4 Unplug all cables from the network module.

Timesaver To make it easier to work with network cables, label the cables or prepare a network cabling diagram
before removing network interface cables from the network module.

Step 5 Remove the network module as described in the “Removing or Replacing Single-Wide, Extended
Single-Wide, and Extension Voice Network Modules from Cisco Access Routers” and “Removing or
Replacing Double-Wide and Extended Double-Wide Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers”
sections.
Step 6 Install a replacement network module. If you are not planning to install another network module at this
time, install a blank faceplate over the network module slot. (See the “Installing Blank Faceplates on
Cisco Access Routers” section on page 2-7.)
Step 7 Connect the cables removed from the previous network module.
Step 8 Confirm that the network module LEDs come on, and that the Active/Ready LEDs on the front panel of
the router also come on. For further information on network module LEDs, see the chapter describing
your specific network module.
Step 9 Initiate a console session with your Cisco access router.
Step 10 Enter interface configuration mode and activate each interface on the network module, as shown in
Example 2-2.

Example 2-2 Activating Interfaces on Cisco Network Modules

Router(config)# interface fastethernet 1/0

Router(config-if)# no shutdown

Step 11 Repeat Step 10 for every interface on the network module.

Removing or Replacing Application and Service Network Modules

Application and service network modules use hard disks and require special software procedures prior
to removal or replacement.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-22 OL-2485-20
Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Removing or Replacing Cisco Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers

Caution Online removal of disks without proper shutdown can result in file system corruption and might render
the disk unusable. The operating system on the applications or services network module must be shut
down in an orderly fashion before the network module can be removed.

To perform online removal of a Cisco application and service network module and insertion of a
replacement, follow these steps with the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate an application and service network module console session using the following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

SE-netmodule> enable
Password:
SE-netmodule#

SE-netmodule con now available

Press RETURN to get started!

SE-netmodule> enable
Password:
SE-netmodule#

Timesaver Cisco application and service network modules use a blank password. Press Enter at the password
prompt.

Step 2 Save the running configuration for the network module by entering the following command from the
SE-netmodule prompt:
SE-netmodule# copy running-config ftp:

Address or name or remote host? username/password/remote host

Destination filename? filename

Step 3 Exit the network module console session by pressing Ctrl-Shift-6, followed by x.
Step 4 On the router, clear the network module console session with the following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful halt of the network module disk drive with the following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port shutdown

Step 6 Remove the network module, using the procedure described in the “Removing or Replacing
Single-Wide, Extended Single-Wide, and Extension Voice Network Modules from Cisco Access
Routers” section on page 2-19.
Step 7 Install the replacement network module, using the procedure described in the “Installing Cisco Network
Modules in Cisco Access Routers” section on page 2-5.
Step 8 Check that the network module LEDs come on and that the Active/Ready LEDs on the router front panel
also come on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is operational.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-23
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Interface Cards in 1- or 2-Slot Network Modules

Step 9 Initiate a network module console session with the following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

SE-netmodule con now available

Press RETURN to get started!

SE-netmodule> enable
SE-netmodule#

Step 10 Restore the running configuration for the network module with the following command from the
SE-netmodule prompt:
SE-netmodule# copy ftp: running-config

Address or name or remote host? username/password/remote host

Source filename? filename

Step 11 Exit the network module console session by pressing Ctrl-Shift-6, followed by x.
Step 12 On the router, clear the console session using the following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port session clear

Installing Cisco Interface Cards in 1- or 2-Slot Network Modules

Some network modules have one or two interface card slots, which support a variety of voice and data
interface cards. (See Table 1-2 on page 1-8 for more information.)

Note Do not install an ISDN BRI WAN interface card or an ISDN BRI network module in the same chassis
as an ISDN PRI network module unless you are using Cisco IOS Release 11.3(3)T or later.

Note Do not install newer BRI WAN interface cards in the same network module as older BRI WAN interface
cards. To identify newer BRI WAN interface cards, examine the B-channel LEDs. Newer BRI WAN
interface cards have B-channel LEDs that are arranged horizontally. Older BRI WAN interface cards
have B-channel LEDs that are arranged vertically.

To install an interface card in a 1- or 2-slot network module, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Turn off electrical power to the router. Leave the power cable plugged in to channel ESD voltages to
ground.
The following warning applies to routers that use a DC power supply:

Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit.
To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC
circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit
breaker in the OFF position. Statement 7

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-24 OL-2485-20
Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Cisco Interface Cards in 1- or 2-Slot Network Modules

Warning To avoid electric shock, do not insert a WAN or voice interface card into a 2-slot module while power
is on or network cables are connected. Statement 68

Caution Do not perform OIR on interface cards in 1- or 2-slot network modules. To avoid damage to the interface
card and to the network module, turn off electrical power and disconnect network cables before inserting
an interface card into a network module slot.

Step 2 Remove all network cables, including telephone cables, from the rear panel of the router.

Timesaver To make it easier to work with network cables, label the cables or prepare a network cabling diagram
before removing network interface cables from the network module.

Step 3 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screws on the blank interface card
faceplate. (See Figure 2-16.) Remove the blank faceplate.

Figure 2-16 Blank Interface Card Faceplate

DO NOT INSTALL WAN INTERFACE

CARDS WITH POWER APPLIED
H6649

Tip Save blank interface card faceplates for future use.

Step 4 Align the interface card with the guides in the slot on the network module and slide it gently into place
until the edge connector is seated into the connector on the module. (See Figure 2-17.)

Figure 2-17 Installing an Interface Card in a Network Module (Typical)

2E
2W W1 H7219

WO
ACT

LNK

ACT

ETH 1
LNK

ETHERN AUI
B1 ET 0 EN
B2
BRI
S/T

2
1

1 Interface card 2 2-slot network module

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-25
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Installing Other Accessories on Cisco Network Modules

Step 5 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the captive mounting screws into the holes
on the network module faceplate.
Step 6 Reinstall the network interface cables and power up the router.
The following warning applies to routers that use a DC power supply:

Warning After wiring the DC power supply, remove the tape from the circuit breaker switch handle and
reinstate power by moving the handle of the circuit breaker to the ON position. Statement 8

Installing Other Accessories on Cisco Network Modules

Some Cisco network modules support a variety of additional modules, such as gigabit interface
converters (GBICs) and small form-factor pluggable modules (SFPs).

Installing and Removing GBICs

To install a GBIC, perform the following steps:

Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable
is connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 125

Step 1 (For optical GBICs) Confirm insertion of plugs into the SC connectors on the GBIC to prevent laser
emissions.
Step 2 Hold down the clips on the side of the GBIC while inserting the GBIC into the GBIC slot in the network
module faceplate. (See Figure 2-18.)

Figure 2-18 Installing a GBIC into a Network Module

NM-1GE
LINK
RX
TX

GBIC EN
72705

Step 3 Release the side clips on the GBIC to lock the GBIC in place.
Step 4 Confirm that the GBIC is seated.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-26 OL-2485-20
Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Where to Go Next

Caution Do not remove the optical port plugs used on the GBIC until you are ready to connect cabling to the
network module.

Step 5 (For optical GBICs) Remove the plugs from the SC connectors on the GBIC.

Timesaver If installing the GBIC in a loose network module, install the network module (see the “Installing Cisco
Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” section on page 2-5) before connecting the network module
to the network.

To remove a GBIC, perform the following steps:

Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable
is connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 125

Step 1 Disconnect the GBIC from the network.

Step 2 (For optical GBICs) Insert plugs into the SC connectors on the GBIC to prevent laser emissions.
Step 3 Hold down the clips on the side of the GBIC and remove the GBIC from the network module.
Step 4 Replace the GBIC with a similar model, or continue with network module removal.

Tip Gigabit Ethernet network modules can be removed with the GBIC installed.

Where to Go Next
For an introduction to Cisco network modules, go to Chapter 1, “Overview of Cisco Network Modules
for Cisco Access Routers.”
For regulatory compliance and safety information, see the Cisco Network Modules and Interface Cards
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 2-27
 Chapter 2 Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Where to Go Next

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

2-28 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 3
Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and
Token Ring Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring network modules for
Cisco access routers. It contains the following sections:
• Ethernet Network Modules, page 3-1
• Fast Ethernet Network Modules, page 3-5
• Token Ring Network Modules, page 3-10

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Ethernet Network Modules

Ethernet connections are provided on 1- and 4-port Ethernet modules, and on 1-port Ethernet, 2-port
Ethernet, and 1-port Ethernet 1-port Token Ring 2-WAN card slot modules.

1- and 4-Port Ethernet Modules

The following network modules provide Ethernet interfaces:
• 1-port Ethernet network module (NM-1E) (see Figure 3-1)
• 4-port Ethernet network module (NM-4E) (see Figure 3-2)

Figure 3-1 1-Port Ethernet Network Module

ETHERNET
1E

ETH 0

LINK
EN
ACT
H9251

10BASE-T AUI
port port

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 3-1
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Ethernet Network Modules

Figure 3-2 4-Port Ethernet Network Module

ETHERNET
4E

ETH 3 ETH 2 ETH 1 ETH 0

3 2 1 0
LINK
EN
ACT

H9252
10BASE-T AUI
port port

Ethernet 2-WAN Card Slot Modules

The following 2-slot network modules provide one or two Ethernet interfaces, plus two slots for optional
WAN interface cards:
• 1-Ethernet 2-WAN card slot network module (NM-1E2W) (see Figure 3-3)
• 2-Ethernet 2-WAN card slot network module (NM-2E2W) (see Figure 3-4)
• 1-Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN card slot network module (NM-1E1R2W) (see Figure 3-5)

Figure 3-3 1-Ethernet 2-WAN Card Slot Network Module

1E 10BASE-T AUI WO
2W W1
port port

AUI
ACT

LNK

EN

H7215
ETHERNET 0

LEDs Enable
LED

Figure 3-4 2-Ethernet 2-WAN Card Slot Network Module

2E 10BASE-T WO
2W W1
LEDs port AUI port

STP AUI
ILNK

ACT

LNK
ACT

EN
H7213

ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 0

10BASE-T LEDs Enable

port LED

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

3-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Ethernet Network Modules

Figure 3-5 1-Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN Card Slot Network Module

1E
1R W1 Token Ring 10BASE-T WO

interface LEDs port AUI port

16MBPS

IN-RING
STP AUI

ACT

LNK
EN

H6555
TOKEN RING 0 ETHERNET 0

STP port UTP port Ethernet

LEDs

Ethernet Connectors
The 1-port Ethernet network module, the 1-Ethernet 2-slot network module, and the 1-Ethernet 1-Token
Ring 2-slot network module each provide a single Ethernet port. This port uses either the attachment unit
interface (AUI) DB-15 connector on the right side of the module or the 10BASE-T (RJ-45) connector
next to it. Only one of these connectors can be active at a time. The active port is identified in software
by port type (Ethernet), slot number on the module, and port number 0.
All modules detect the type of network connection automatically, and you do not need to choose the
media type in software. If cables are plugged into both ports, the 10BASE-T connection is chosen.
The 4-port Ethernet network module has ports for four Ethernet connections (0, 1, 2, and 3). Port 0 offers
a choice of an AUI or 10BASE-T interface. Ethernet ports 1, 2, and 3 use 10BASE-T connectors only.
These ports do not provide an AUI connector.
The 2-Ethernet 2-slot network module has ports for two Ethernet connections. Port 0 offers a choice of
AUI or 10BASE-T. Port 1 uses 10BASE-T only.

Connecting Ethernet Ports

If an Ethernet port offers both an AUI connector and a 10BASE-T connector, you can use either
connector, but not both at the same time.

AUI Connections
Use an Ethernet AUI cable to connect an AUI port to an Ethernet transceiver. These ports are
color-coded yellow. The female end of the AUI cable mates with the slide-latch connector of the
transceiver cable. Figure 3-6 shows a thin Ethernet transceiver as an example, but you can use any type
of Ethernet transceiver.
If the transceiver cable has thumbscrew connectors, you can connect it directly to the AUI port by
replacing the AUI port slide latch with a jackscrew (provided in a separate bag).

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 3-3
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Ethernet Network Modules

Figure 3-6 Connecting an Ethernet AUI Port to a Transceiver

ETHERNET
4E

ETH 3 ETH 2 ETH 1

ETH 0
3 2 1 0
LINK
ACT EN

Ethernet AUI port (DB-15)

(with jackscrews or slide-latch)

Ethernet AUI cable

(not supplied) Ethernet
transceiver

BNC connector

H9255
To thin Ethernet network To thin Ethernet network

10BASE-T Connections
Use an Ethernet 10BASE-T cable to connect a 10BASE-T port to a hub or other network device. These
ports are color-coded yellow. Figure 3-7 shows the 10BASE-T port on an Ethernet network module
connected to a hub.

Figure 3-7 Connecting an Ethernet 10BASE-T Port to a Hub

ETHERNET
4E

ETH 3 ETH 2 ETH 1

ETH 0
3 2 1 0
LINK
ACT EN

Ethernet 10BASE-T
port (RJ-45)

10BASE-T cable
H9256

10BASE-T hub

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

3-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Fast Ethernet Network Modules

Ethernet LEDs
This section describes Ethernet module LEDs. Figure 3-8 shows 4-port Ethernet network module LEDs
as an example.
All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
Each Ethernet port has two LEDs. The activity (ACT) LED indicates that the router is sending or
receiving Ethernet transmissions. The link (LINK) LED indicates that the Ethernet port is receiving the
link integrity signal from the hub (10BASE-T only).

Figure 3-8 Ethernet Network Module LEDs (Typical)

ETHERNET
4E

ETH 3 ETH 2 ETH 1 ETH 0

3 2 1 0
LINK
EN
ACT

H9254
LEDs Enable
LED

Fast Ethernet Network Modules

Fast Ethernet connections are provided on 1-port Fast Ethernet modules, and on 1-port Fast Ethernet,
2-port Fast Ethernet, and 1-port Fast Ethernet 1-port Token Ring 2-WAN card slot modules.

Note The Fast Ethernet-PRI modules described in Chapter 4, “Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network
Modules,” also provide a Fast Ethernet interface. See that chapter for further information.

1-Port Fast Ethernet Modules

The following network modules provide Fast Ethernet interfaces:
• 1-port Fast Ethernet network module with TX connector, Cisco product number NM-1FE-TX. (See
Figure 3-9.) This module provides an RJ-45 connector for direct connection to 100BASE-T Ethernet
networks.
• 1-port Fast Ethernet network module with FX connector, Cisco product number NM-1FE-FX. (See
Figure 3-10.) This module provides a duplex SC-type fiber-optic port for direct connection to
100BASE-FX Ethernet networks.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 3-5
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Fast Ethernet Network Modules

Figure 3-9 1-Port Fast Ethernet Network Module (TX Connector)

FAST ETHERNET
1FE

10/100 bTX

MBPS

DPLX
FULL
LINK
C0L

100
EN

H9981
RJ-45 port

Figure 3-10 1-Port Fast Ethernet Network Module (FX Connector)

FAST ETHERNET
1FE-FX

100 b FX
MBPS

DPLX
FULL
LINK
C0L

100

EN

H10829
Fast Ethernet 2-WAN Card Slot Modules
The following 2-slot network modules provide one or two 100BASE-T Fast Ethernet interfaces, plus two
slots for optional WAN interface cards:
• 1-Fast Ethernet 2-WAN card slot network module (NM-1FE2W and NM-1FE2W-V2). See
Figure 3-11 for a sample faceplate.
• 2-Fast Ethernet 2-WAN card slot network module (NM-2FE2W and NM-2FE2W-V2). See
Figure 3-12 for a sample faceplate.
• 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN card slot network module (NM-1FE1R2W and
NM-1FE1R2W-V2). See Figure 3-13 for a sample faceplate.

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 1-Fast Ethernet 2-WAN card slot network modules (NM-1FE2W-V2), the 2-Fast Ethernet
2-WAN card slot network modules (NM-2FE2W-V2), and the 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN
card slot network modules (NM-1FE1R2W-V2) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or cabling.
The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

3-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Fast Ethernet Network Modules

Figure 3-11 1-Fast Ethernet 2-WAN Card Slot Network Module

1FE 100BASE-T W0
2W W1
port

Mbps
LINK

FDX
100
EN

26708
FAST ETH 0

LEDs Enable
LED

Figure 3-12 2-Fast Ethernet 2-WAN Card Slot Network Module

2FE 100BASE-T 100BASE-T W0

2W W1
port port
Mbps

Mbps
LINK

LINK
FDX

FDX
100

100
EN

26707
FAST ETH 1 FAST ETH 0

LEDs LEDs Enable

LED

Figure 3-13 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN Card Slot Network Module

1FE 100BASE-T
1R2W
STP port UTP port port

W1 W0
IN-RING

16Mbps

Mbps
LINK
FDX

FDX
100

EN
26706
TOKEN RING 0 FAST ETH 0

LEDs LEDs Enable

LED

Connecting Fast Ethernet Ports

Use the following sections for 100BASE-T or 100BASE-FX connections.

100BASE-T Connections
Use a two-pair Category 5 or unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) straight-through RJ-45 cable to connect a
Fast Ethernet RJ-45 port to a switch, hub, repeater, server, or other network device. Figure 3-14 shows
an RJ-45 port connected to a hub.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 3-7
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Fast Ethernet Network Modules

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5 cables.

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 1-Fast Ethernet 2-WAN card slot network modules (NM-1FE2W-V2), the 2-Fast Ethernet
2-WAN card slot network modules (NM-2FE2W-V2), and the 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN
card slot network modules (NM-1FE1R2W-V2) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or cabling.
The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Figure 3-14 Connecting a Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Port to a Hub

FE–PRI
1FE-1CT1

10/100BaseT
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT

100Mbps
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

Fast Ethernet
RJ-45
Category 5
or UTP cable

H9984
Fast Ethernet hub

100BASE-FX Connections
Attach a multimode fiber-optic cable with SC-type connectors directly to the port on the Fast Ethernet
network module (remove the protective plug from the port if it is present). Use either one duplex SC
connector (see Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-17) or two simplex SC connectors (see Figure 3-16 and
Figure 3-18). Attach the other end of the cable to a repeater, hub, or wall outlet. Be sure to observe the
correct relationship between the receive (RX) and transmit (TX) ports on the network module and the
cable.

Note Multimode SC-type fiber-optic cables are widely available commercially. Cisco Systems does not
supply these cables.

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 1-Fast Ethernet 2-WAN card slot network modules (NM-1FE2W-V2), the 2-Fast Ethernet
2-WAN card slot network modules (NM-2FE2W-V2), and the 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN
card slot network modules (NM-1FE1R2W-V2) only to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling.
The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

3-8 OL-2485-20
Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Fast Ethernet Network Modules

Figure 3-15 Duplex SC Connector

H2214
Figure 3-16 Simplex SC Connector

H2399

Figure 3-17 Connecting a Fast Ethernet FX Port to a Repeater or Hub (Duplex Connector)
ACT

WO

SERIAL

H10832
FAST ETHERNET
1FE-FX
ETHERNET 0

100 b FX
MBPS

DPLX
LINK

FULL
C0L

100

EN

Router
Fast
Ethernet
SC-type
module
To repeater connector
or hub

Figure 3-18 Connecting a Fast Ethernet FX Port to a Repeater or Hub (Simplex Connectors)
ACT

WO

SERIAL
H10843

FAST ETHERNET
1FE-FX
ETHERNET 0

100 b FX
MBPS

DPLX
LINK

FULL
C0L

100

EN

Router
Fast
To repeater Ethernet
or hub SC-type
module
connectors

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 3-9
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Token Ring Network Modules

Fast Ethernet LEDs

This section describes Fast Ethernet module LEDs. Figure 3-19 shows 1-port Fast Ethernet network
module LEDs as an example.

Figure 3-19 1-Port Fast Ethernet Network Module LEDs

FAST ETHERNET
1FE

10/100 bTX

MBPS

DPLX
FULL
LINK
COL

100
EN

H9982
LEDs Enable
LED

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. The enable LED indicates that the module has passed
its self-tests and is available to the router.
Fast Ethernet network modules have the additional LEDs shown in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Fast Ethernet Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
COL Collision activity is occurring on the network.
LINK A link has been established with the station at the other end of
the cable.
100MBPS Speed of the interface is 100 Mbps.
FULL DPLX Interface is in full-duplex mode.

Token Ring Network Modules

The following network modules provide Token Ring interfaces:
• 1-port Ethernet 1-port Token Ring 2-WAN card slot module (NM-1E1R2W) (see Figure 3-20)
• 1-port Fast Ethernet 1-port Token Ring 2-WAN card slot module (NM-1FE2R2W) (see Figure 3-21)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

3-10 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Token Ring Network Modules

Figure 3-20 1-Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN Card Slot Network Module

1E
1R W1 Token Ring 10BASE-T WO

interface LEDs port AUI port

16MBPS

IN-RING
STP AUI

ACT

LNK
EN

H6555
TOKEN RING 0 ETHERNET 0

STP port UTP port Ethernet

LEDs

Figure 3-21 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN Card Slot Network Module

1FE 100BASE-T
1R2W
STP port UTP port port

W1 W0
IN-RING

16Mbps

Mbps
LINK
FDX

FDX
100
EN

26706
TOKEN RING 0 FAST ETH 0

LEDs LEDs Enable

LED

Connecting Token Ring Ports

The 1-Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN card slot network module and the 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring
2-WAN card slot network module each have one DB-9 connector for an STP Token Ring connection and
one RJ-45 connector for a UTP Token Ring connection. Only one connector can be active at a time.
To connect the module to a Token Ring network, attach one end of a shielded Token Ring lobe cable to
the DB-9 connector on the network module (see Figure 3-22), or attach one end of an unshielded Token
Ring lobe cable to the UTP connector on the network module (see Figure 3-23). Attach the other end of
the cable to the Token Ring media attachment unit (MAU). The network module automatically detects
which connector is in use.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 3-11
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Token Ring Network Modules

Figure 3-22 Connecting a Token Ring STP Port (DB-9) to a MAU

1FE
1R2W

W1

IN-RING

16Mbps
WO

FDX

Mbps
LINK

FDX
100
EN
TOKEN RING 0
FAST ETH 0

Shielded
Token Ring Token Ring STP
lobe cable port (DB-9)
(not provided)

Media
attachment
unit

Standard IEEE

26713
802.5 connector

Figure 3-23 Connecting a Token Ring UTP Port (RJ-45) to an MAU

1FE
1R2W

W1
IN-RING

16Mbps

WO
FDX

Mbps
LINK

FDX
100

EN
TOKEN RING 0
FAST ETH 0

Unshielded Token Ring UTP

Token Ring port (RJ-45)
lobe cable
(not provided)
Media
attachment
unit

Standard IEEE
26714

802.5 connector

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

3-12 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Token Ring Network Modules

Token Ring LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. The enable LED indicates that the module has passed
its self-tests and is available to the router.
The 1-Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-WAN card slot network module and the 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring
2-WAN card slot network module both have the following Token Ring LEDs:
• The 16MBPS LED indicates a ring speed of 16 Mbps. If it is off, the ring speed is 4 Mbps.
• The IN-RING LED indicates that the Token Ring interface is inserted into the ring. If it is off, the
interface is not inserted into the ring.
The 1-Fast Ethernet 1-Token Ring 2-slot network module also has the FDX LED, which indicates
full-duplex mode.

Timesaver When the IN-RING LED is off, you can unplug the Token Ring cable without causing a problem on
the ring.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 3-13
 Chapter 3 Connecting Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Token Ring Network Modules
Token Ring Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

3-14 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 4
Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Fast Ethernet-Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) network modules and contains the following sections:
• 1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI Network Modules, page 4-1
• 1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Modules, page
4-3
• 1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced or Unbalanced
Network Modules, page 4-5
• Fast Ethernet-PRI Module LEDs, page 4-11

Note Unless specifically identified, references to Fast Ethernet-PRI network modules in this chapter
include all these network modules.

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI

Network Modules
This section provides information about the following network modules:
• 1-port Fast Ethernet 1-port channelized T1/ISDN PRI network module (NM-1FE1CT1) (see
Figure 4-1)
• 1-port Fast Ethernet 2-port channelized T1/ISDN PRI network module (NM-1FE2CT1) (see
Figure 4-2)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 4-1
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI Network Modules

Figure 4-1 1-Port Fast Ethernet 1-Port Channelized T1 Network Module

FE–PRI
1FE-1CT1

10/100BaseT

100Mbps
CTRLR 0

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

COLL

LINK
BACK
LOOP

FDX
EN

15228
Figure 4-2 1-Port Fast Ethernet 2-Port Channelized T1 Network Module
CARRIER

CTRLR 1
REMOTE

FE-PRI
DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

1FE-2CT1

10/100BaseT

100Mbps
CTRLR 0
CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

COLL

LINK
BACK
LOOP

FDX
EN

10976
Connecting Fast Ethernet Channelized T1 Modules
Use the following sections for Fast Ethernet and PRI connections.

Fast Ethernet Port

Use a straight-through two-pair Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable to connect the RJ-45
port on the Fast Ethernet-PRI network module to a switch, hub, repeater, server, or other network device.
These ports are color-coded yellow. Figure 4-3 shows the RJ-45 port connected to a hub.

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5 cables.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

4-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Modules

Figure 4-3 Connecting a Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Port to a Hub

FE–PRI
1FE-1CT1

10/100BaseT

CARRIER
CTRLR 0

REMOTE

DETECT

100Mbps
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX
EN

Fast Ethernet
RJ-45
Category 5
or UTP cable

H9984
Fast Ethernet hub

PRI Ports
This section describes how to connect channelized T1 and channelized E1 ISDN PRI ports to the
network. These ports are color-coded tan.
Use a DB-15-to-DB-15 T1 serial cable to connect a CT1/PRI port to a T1 channel service unit (CSU).
(See Figure 4-4.)

Figure 4-4 Connecting a CT1/PRI Port to a T1 CSU

FE–PRI
1FE-1CT1

10/100BaseT
CARRIER
REMOTE

CTRLR 0
DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

100Mbps
BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

CT1/PRI port (DB-15)

H7468

T1 serial
cable
T1 CSU

CT1/PRI port (DB-15)

1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI

with CSU Network Modules
This section provides information about the following network modules:
• 1-port Fast Ethernet 1-port channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU network module
(NM-1FE1CT1-CSU) (see Figure 4-5)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 4-3
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Modules

• 1-port Fast Ethernet 2-port channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU network module
(NM-1FE2CT1-CSU) (see Figure 4-6)

Figure 4-5 1-Port Fast Ethernet 1-Port Channelized T1 with CSU Network Module

FE–PRI
1FE-1CT1-CSU

RX TX RX 10/100BaseT
OUT IN MON

100Mbps
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

COLL

LINK
BACK
LOOP

FDX
EN

15229
Figure 4-6 1-Port Fast Ethernet 2-Port Channelized T1 with CSU Network Module
CARRIER

CTRLR 1
REMOTE

DETECT

FE-PRI
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

1FE-2CT1-CSU

RX TX RX 10/100BaseT
OUT IN MON

100Mbps
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

COLL

LINK
BACK
LOOP

FDX
EN

10977
Connecting Fast Ethernet Channelized T1 with CSU Modules
Use the following sections for connections to the Fast Ethernet or CT1/PRI-CSU ports.

Fast Ethernet Port

To connect the Fast Ethernet port, see the “Fast Ethernet Port” section on page 4-2.

CT1/PRI-CSU Port
To connect the CT1/PRI-CSU PRI ports, use a straight-through RJ-48C-to-RJ-48C cable to connect a
PRI port to an RJ-48C jack. (See Figure 4-7.) These ports are color-coded tan.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

4-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced or Unbalanced Network Modules

Figure 4-7 Connecting a CT1/PRI-CSU Port to an RJ-48C Jack

FE–PRI
1FE-1CT1-CSU

10/100BaseT

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

CTRLR 0

100Mbps
BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX
EN

CT1/PRI CSU
port (RJ-48C)

H7469
RJ-48C jack

1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI

Balanced or Unbalanced Network Modules
This section provides information about the following network modules:
• 1-port Fast Ethernet 1-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI balanced (120-ohm) network module
(NM-1FE1CE1B) (see Figure 4-8)
• 1-port Fast Ethernet 1-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI unbalanced (75-ohm) network module
(NM-1FE1CE1U) (see Figure 4-8)
• 1-port Fast Ethernet 2-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI balanced (120-ohm) network module
(NM-1FE2CE1B) (see Figure 4-9)
• 1-port Fast Ethernet 2-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI unbalanced (75-ohm) network module
(NM-1FE2CE1U) (see Figure 4-9)

Figure 4-8 1-Port Fast Ethernet 1-Port Channelized E1 Network Module

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
100Mbps

CTRLR 0
CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

COLL

LINK
BACK
LOOP

FDX

EN
15230

Figure 4-9 1-Port Fast Ethernet 2-Port Channelized E1 Network Module

CARRIER

CTRLR 1
REMOTE

FE-PRI
DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

1FE-2CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
100Mbps

CTRLR 0
CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

COLL

LINK
BACK
LOOP

FDX

EN
10978

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 4-5
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced or Unbalanced Network Modules

Connecting Fast Ethernet Channelized E1 Modules

Use the following sections to connect to the Fast Ethernet or CE1-PRI-B ports.

Fast Ethernet Port

To connect the Fast Ethernet port, see the “Fast Ethernet Port” section on page 4-2.

CE1/PRI-B Port
Use the appropriate cable to connect a CE1/PRI-B (120-ohm) port to an E1 CSU. (See Figure 4-10,
Figure 4-11, and Figure 4-12, showing DB-15, twinax, and RJ-45 CSUs respectively.) These ports are
color-coded tan.

Figure 4-10 Connecting a CE1/PRI-B Port to an E1 CSU (DB-15-to-DB-15 Connectors)

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

100Mbps
BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

CE1/PRI-B (DB-15)

E1 cable for 120-ohm

balanced connections H7470
with a DB-15 connector
at the network end
E1 CSU

DB-15 connector

Figure 4-11 Connecting a CE1/PRI-B Port to an E1 CSU (DB-15-to-Twinax Connectors)

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM

100Mbps
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

CE1/PRI port (DB-15)

H7473

E1 cable for 75-ohm

balanced connections
with twinax connectors
at the network end
E1 CSU

Twinax connectors

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

4-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced or Unbalanced Network Modules

Figure 4-12 Connecting a CE1/PRI-B Port to an E1 CSU (DB-15-to-RJ-45 Connectors)

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT

CARRIER
CTRLR 0

REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM

100Mbps
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX
EN

CE1/PRI port (DB-15)

E1 cable for 120-ohm

H7472
balanced connections
with an RJ-45 connector
at the network end

RJ-45 jack

CE1/PRI-U Port
Use the appropriate cable to connect a CE1/PRI-U (75-ohm) port to an E1 CSU. Figure 4-13 shows a
CSU with BNC connectors. These ports are color-coded tan.

Figure 4-13 Connecting a CE1/PRI-U Module to an E1 CSU (DB-15-to-BNC Connectors)

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM

100Mbps
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

CE1/PRI-U

E1 cable for 75-ohm

H7471

unbalanced connections
with BNC connectors
at the network end
E1 CSU

BNC connectors

Setting Interfaces to Balanced or Unbalanced Termination

This section describes how to configure an E1 network module for balanced or unbalanced termination.
The module consists of two circuit boards, or cards. A terminal block and a set of five jumpers are
provided on each card to configure termination. Figure 4-14 shows these terminal blocks.

Caution To avoid damaging electrostatic discharge (ESD)-sensitive components, observe all ESD
precautions when handling the circuit boards.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 4-7
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced or Unbalanced Network Modules

Figure 4-14 Terminal Block Locations

TERMINATION
120 75
J9
J8

TERMINATION J7
75 120 J6
J4 J5
J5 J4
J6 CABLE SHIELD
J7

J8
J9
CABLE SHIELD

TERMINATION TERMINATION
75 120 120 75
J4 J9
J5 J8

J6 J7
J7 J6

J8 J5
J9 J4
24061

CABLE SHIELD CABLE SHIELD

Note The position of the jumpers is different on the two terminal blocks. See Figure 4-14 and the silk
screening on the network module to ensure the correct jumper position.

Figure 4-15 shows a typical jumper.

Figure 4-15 Jumper

Jumper top
24063

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

4-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced or Unbalanced Network Modules

Configuring Unbalanced Mode

To configure the network module for unbalanced mode, follow these steps:

Step 1 Turn off electrical power to the router. However, to channel ESD voltages to ground, do not unplug the
power cable. Remove all network interface cables, including telephone cables, from the rear panel.
The following warning applies to routers that use a DC power supply:

Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC
circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services
the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the
circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 7

Step 2 Loosen the module captive mounting screws, using a Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver.
Step 3 Hold the captive screws between two fingers, and pull the network module toward you until it slides free
of the chassis.
Step 4 Set the network module on an ESD-preventive mat.
Step 5 Using needlenose pliers, set jumpers J5 through J9 on the top terminal block to the 75-ohm position. Set
jumpers J4 through J8 on the bottom terminal block to the same 75-ohm position. (See Figure 4-16.)

Figure 4-16 Jumper Insertion

D
IEL H
ES
BL
CA
J9
J8
0 J7
LD
HIE
ES
12 ION
BL
CA T J6
NA 75
N 0
12 J7
J8
J9

Top card MI R J5 Place jumper

AT
IO
75 MIN J5
J6
TE J4
in this position
R J4
TE

Bottom card first

Place jumper
24064

in this position
last

Figure 4-17 shows the top terminal block set to unbalanced (75-ohm) position.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 4-9
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
1-Port Fast Ethernet and 1- or 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced or Unbalanced Network Modules

Figure 4-17 Jumpers in Unbalanced 75-Ohm Position (Top Card)

TERMINATION
120 75
J9
J8

J7
J6

J5
J4
24062
CABLE SHIELD

Step 6 Align the network module with the guides in the chassis and slide it gently into the slot.
Step 7 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
motherboard.
Step 8 Fasten the module captive mounting screws into the holes in the chassis, using the Phillips or flat-blade
screwdriver.
Step 9 If the router was previously running, reinstall the network interface cables and turn on power to the
router.
The following warning applies to routers that use a DC power supply:

Warning After wiring the DC power supply, remove the tape from the circuit breaker switch handle and
reinstate power by moving the handle of the circuit breaker to the ON position. Statement 8

Configuring Balanced Mode

To configure the network module for balanced mode, follow these steps:

Step 1 Turn off electrical power to the router. However, to channel ESD voltages to ground, do not unplug the
power cable. Remove all network interface cables, including telephone cables, from the rear panel.
The following warning applies to routers that use a DC power supply:

Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC
circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services
the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the
circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 7

Step 2 Loosen the module captive mounting screws, using a Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver.
Step 3 Hold the captive screws between two fingers, and pull the network module toward you until it slides free
of the chassis.
Step 4 Set the network module on an ESD-preventive mat.
Step 5 Using needlenose pliers, set jumpers J5 through J9 on the top terminal block to the 120-ohm position.
Set jumpers J4 through J8 on the bottom terminal block to the same 120-ohm position. (See Figure 4-16.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

4-10 OL-2485-20
Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
Fast Ethernet-PRI Module LEDs

Step 6 Align the network module with the guides in the chassis and slide it gently into the slot.
Step 7 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
motherboard.
Step 8 Fasten the module captive mounting screws into the holes in the chassis, using the Phillips or flat-blade
screwdriver.
Step 9 If the router was previously running, reinstall the network interface cables and turn on power to the
router.
The following warning applies to routers that use a DC power supply:

Warning After wiring the DC power supply, remove the tape from the circuit breaker switch handle and
reinstate power by moving the handle of the circuit breaker to the ON position. Statement 8

Fast Ethernet-PRI Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
All Fast Ethernet-PRI modules have four LEDS for the Fast Ethernet port, and four additional LEDs for
each PRI port. Figure 4-18 shows LEDs for the 1-port Fast Ethernet 2-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI
balanced (120-ohm) network module as an example.

Figure 4-18 Fast Ethernet and ISDN PRI LEDs

ISDN PRI
LEDs
CARRIER

CTRLR 1
REMOTE

FE-PRI
DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

1FE-2CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
100Mbps

CTRLR 0
CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

COLL

LINK
BACK
LOOP

FDX

EN
15231

Enable
ISDN PRI Fast Ethernet LED
LEDs LEDs

Table 4-1 describes Fast Ethernet LEDs. Table 4-2 describes ISDN PRI LEDs.

Table 4-1 Fast Ethernet LEDs

LED Color Meaning

COLL Yellow Collision activity is occurring on the network.
LINK Green A link has been established with the station at the other
end of the cable.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 4-11
 Chapter 4 Connecting Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules
Fast Ethernet-PRI Module LEDs

Table 4-1 Fast Ethernet LEDs (continued)

LED Color Meaning

100MBPS Green Speed of the interface is 100 Mbps.
FDX Green Interface is in full-duplex mode.

Table 4-2 ISDN PRI LEDs

LED Color Meaning

REMOTE ALARM Yellow A remote source is indicating an error at its end of the
connection.
LOCAL ALARM Yellow Incoming signal shows loss of signal, loss of frame, or
excessive errors.
LOOPBACK Yellow Line or local loopback state is set or detected.
CARRIER DETECT Green DS-1 carrier to the network is detected.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

4-12 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 5
Connecting Serial Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect serial network modules for Cisco modular routers and contains
the following sections:
• About Serial Connections, page 5-1
• Connecting Asynchronous Network Modules to Asynchronous Devices, page 5-4
• Asynchronous Network Module Interface Numbering, page 5-6
• 4-Port Serial Network Module, page 5-9
• 16- and 32-Port Asynchronous Serial Network Modules, page 5-11
• 4-, 8-, and 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Modules, page 5-12

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

About Serial Connections

Serial connections can be provided by either WAN interface cards or network modules. For more
information about WAN interface cards, see the Cisco Interface Cards Hardware Installation Guide. To
obtain this publication, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
Before you connect a device to a serial port, you need to know the following:
• Type of device—data terminal equipment (DTE) or data communications equipment (DCE)—you
are connecting to
• Type of connector, male or female, needed to connect to the device
• Signaling standard required by the device

About DTE and DCE Devices

A device that communicates over a synchronous serial interface is either a DTE or a DCE device. A DCE
device provides a clock signal between the device and the router. A DTE device does not provide a clock
signal. DTE devices usually connect to DCE devices. The documentation that accompanied the device
should tell you whether it is DTE or DCE. (Some devices have a jumper to select DTE or DCE mode.)
If you cannot find this information in your documentation, see Table 5-1 to help you determine the
proper device type.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 5-1
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
About Serial Connections

Table 5-1 Identifying the Device Type

Device Type Typical Connector Typical Devices

1
DTE Male Terminal
PC
2
DCE Female Modem
CSU/DSU
Multiplexer
1. If pins protrude from the base of the connector, the connector is male.
2. If the connector has holes to accept pins, the connector is female.

Note Serial ports configured as synchronous DTE require external clocking from a channel service unit/data
service unit (CSU/DSU) WAN interface card or other DCE device.

About Serial Cables Used with Cisco 2600 Series, Cisco 3600 Series, Cisco 3700
Series, and Cisco MWR 1941-DC Routers
Cisco Systems offers 10 types of serial cables (also called serial adapter cables or transition cables) as
listed in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Serial Cables and Cisco Smart Serial Cables

Standard Serial Cables Cisco Smart Serial Cables

EIA/TIA-232 serial cable EIA/TIA-232 Smart Serial cable
EIA/TIA-449 serial cable EIA/TIA-449 Smart Serial cable
V.35 serial cable V.35 Smart Serial cable
X.21 serial cable X.21 Smart Serial cable
EIA/TIA-530 serial cable EIA/TIA-530 Smart Serial cable
EIA/TIA-530A Smart Serial cable

The documentation for the device you plan to connect to the serial port should indicate which interface
is used. You can then order a serial transition cable of the correct type.

Tip A cable providing surge protection (CAB-SS-SURGE) is also available from Cisco Systems for use with
the NM-16A/S network module. See the “12-in-1 Smart Serial Cables” section on page 5-4 for
instructions on connecting the surge protector cable.

A standard serial cable uses a universal 60-pin plug at the network module or WAN interface card end.
The Smart Serial cable uses a 12-in-1 Smart Serial connector designed by Cisco. The network end of
each cable provides the physical connectors most commonly used for the interface. For example, the
network end of the EIA/TIA-232 serial cable is a DB-25 connector, the most widely used EIA/TIA-232
connector.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

5-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
About Serial Connections

All serial interface types except EIA/TIA-530 and EIA/TIA-530A are available in DTE or DCE format:
DTE with a plug connector at the network end, and DCE with a receptacle at the network end. V.35 is
available in either mode, with either gender at the network end. EIA/TIA-530 and EIA/TIA-530A are
available in DTE only.
Serial cables are not provided with the network module. For ordering information, see the “Obtaining
Technical Assistance” section on page xi.
Although manufacturing your own serial cables is not recommended (because of the small size of the
pins on the DB-60 serial connector), cable pinouts are provided in the online document Cisco Modular
Access Router Cable Specifications. For further information, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section
on page viii.

About Data Rates and Distance Limitations

All serial signals are subject to distance limits, beyond which the signal degrades significantly or is
completely lost. Generally, the slower the data rate, the greater the distance.
Table 5-3 lists recommended maximum speeds and distances for each serial interface type. If you
understand and compensate for potential electrical problems, you may get good results at speeds and
distances greater than those listed. For instance, the recommended maximum rate for V.35 is 2 Mbps,
but 4 Mbps is commonly used.

Table 5-3 Serial Interface Recommended Maximum Speeds and Distances

EIA/TIA-232 Distance EIA/TIA-449, -530, -530A, V.35, and X.21 Distance

Data Rate, bps Feet Meters Feet Meters
2400 200 60 4100 1250
4800 100 30 2050 625
9600 50 15 1025 312
19200 25 8 500 150
38400 12 4 250 75
56000 9 3 100 30
1544000 (T1) — — 50 15

Balanced drivers allow EIA/TIA-449 signals to travel greater distances than EIA/TIA-232 signals. The
recommended distance limits for EIA/TIA-449 shown in Table 5-3 are also valid for V.35, X.21, and
EIA/TIA-530. Typically, EIA/TIA-449 and EIA/TIA-530 support 2-Mbps rates, and V.35 can support
4-Mbps rates.

Asynchronous and Synchronous Serial Module Data Rates

The following data-rate limitations apply to the slow-speed serial interfaces found on asynchronous and
synchronous serial modules:
• The maximum data rate on the slow-speed asynchronous interface is 115.2 kbps. The traffic
throughput rate allowed is the full 115.2 kbps, with 10 percent of traffic in the opposite direction.
• The maximum data rate for the slow-speed synchronous interface is 128 kbps full duplex.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 5-3
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
Connecting Asynchronous Network Modules to Asynchronous Devices

Connecting Asynchronous Network Modules to Asynchronous

Devices
An asynchronous network module provides two or four 68-pin receptacles. Each receptacle connects to
asynchronous devices by means of an octal cable that has a 68-pin plug at the module end and eight
connectors at the network end, one for each of the eight EIA/TIA-232 serial ports. Depending on the
type of cable, the network end consists of either RJ-45 connectors or male DB-25 connectors.
RJ-45-to-DB-25 adapters are also available.
Ports are numbered from right to left and from bottom to top, as labeled on the module rear panel. (See
the “Asynchronous Network Module Interface Numbering” section on page 5-6.)

Octal Cables
Octal cables are not provided with the network module. For ordering information, see the “Obtaining
Technical Assistance” section on page xi.
Use an octal cable, and adapters if necessary, to connect each of the module’s 68-pin receptacles to one
or more asynchronous modems, terminals, or other devices. (See Figure 5-1.)

Figure 5-1 Connecting an Asynchronous Network Module to an Asynchronous Device

ASYNC
15 11
14 10
ASYNC 24-31
7 3
13 9
6 2
ASYNC 16-23
12 8
5 1
4 0

15 11
14 10
ASYNC 8-15
7 3
13 9
6 2
ASYNC 0-7
12 8
5 1
4 0
EN

Modem or terminal

RJ-45 to DB-25 adapter

H9999

12-in-1 Smart Serial Cables

The Cisco NM-16A/S network module uses sixteen 12-in-1 Smart Serial cables. The cables connect the
network module to a patch panel or one or more asynchronous modems, terminals, or other devices. (See
Figure 5-2.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

5-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
Connecting Asynchronous Network Modules to Asynchronous Devices

Figure 5-2 Connecting the NM-16A/S Network Module

NM-
16A/S
15
14
11
10
13
12
9
7 8
6
3
2
5
4
1
0
EN

82665
To patch panel or other network device

The surge protection cable (CAB-SS-SURGE) is installed between the network module and the 12-in-1
Smart Serial cable. (See Figure 5-3.)

Figure 5-3 Connecting the Cisco Surge Protector Cable (CAB-SS-SURGE) to the NM-16A/S Network
Module

NM-
15 13
16A/S 14 12
11 9
10 8

7 5
6 4
3 1 EN
2 0

Surge protection cable

(CAB-SS-SURGE)

Serial cable
95971

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 5-5
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
Asynchronous Network Module Interface Numbering

Figure 5-4 shows the 12-in-1 Smart Serial cables going from the Cisco NM-16A/S network module to a
patch panel installed above the network module in a standard telco rack. The numbers next to the
connectors on the patch panel correspond to the port number (or connector) on the other side of the patch
panel.

Figure 5-4 Cabling the Cisco NM-16AS Network Module to a Patch Panel

Patch panel
16
DTE 8
DTE 15
DTE 7
DTE 14
DCE DTE 6
DCE DTE 13
DCE DTE 5
DCE DTE 12
DCE DTE 4
DCE DTE 11
DCE DTE 3
DCE DTE 10
DCE DTE 2
DCE DTE 9
NM-
16A/S DCE DTE 1
DCE DTE
15
DCE
14 DCE
11 DCE
10 DCE
13
12
9
7 8
6
3
2
5
4
1
0
EN

88373
NM-16 AS
network module

Asynchronous Network Module Interface Numbering

Certain Cisco IOS configuration commands identify asynchronous ports by an interface number (or a
line number, which is the same as the interface number). The interface number of a port on an
asynchronous network module is related to the slot number where the module is installed and the unit
number of the port in the module.

Cisco 3600 Series and Cisco MWR 1941-DC Router 16- and 32-Port Interface
Numbering
Cisco 3600 series and Cisco MWR 1941-DC router slot numbering is explained in the “Network Module
Slot Locations and Numbering on Cisco Access Routers” section on page 1-3.
Ports on the 16- and 32-port asynchronous network modules correspond to the outputs of the octal cables
that connect the module to the network. These ports are numbered in the same pattern as slot numbers,
beginning at 0 at the lower right and continuing from right to left and (in the 32-port module) from
bottom to top. In the 16-port module, the right connector provides ports 0 to 7, and the left connector
provides ports 8 to 15, as labeled on the module rear panel. In the 32-port module, the connectors in the
bottom row provide ports 0 to 7 and 8 to 15, and the connectors in the top row provide ports 16 to 23
and 24 to 31.
The interface number of a port is determined using the following formula:
interface-number = (32 x slot-number) + unit-number + 1
For example, asynchronous port 12 in slot 1 corresponds to interface number
(32 x 1) + 12 + 1 = 45. This is also the line number for the port. Port 12 in slot 1 is always assigned
interface number 45, regardless of whether the module in slot 0 is a 16-port asynchronous module, a

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

5-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
Asynchronous Network Module Interface Numbering

32-port asynchronous module, or some other type of module—or even whether there is a network
module in slot 0 at all. If you move the module in slot 1 to a different slot, however, its interface numbers
change.

Note The Cisco MWR 1941-DC router has one network module slot (slot 1).

Table 5-4 shows the range of interface numbers available for each type of asynchronous network module
in each Cisco 3600 series router slot. (Interface 0 is automatically assigned to the console.)

Table 5-4 Cisco 3600 Series 16- and 32-Port Asynchronous

Network Module Interface Numbering

Slot Number Interface Numbers Interface Numbers

(16-Port Module) (32-Port Module)
0 1–16 1–32
1 33–48 33–64
2 65–80 65–96
3 97–112 97–128
4 129–144 129–160
5 161–176 161–192
6 193–208 193–224

Cisco 2600 Series and Cisco MWR 1941-DC Router Serial Interface Numbering
Interface numbering for Cisco 2600 series and Cisco MWR 1941-DC routers differ from Cisco 3600
series interface numbering in the following ways:
• WAN interface card slot numbers always appear as slot 0, even if the interface card is installed in
the slot labeled W1.
• WAN interface cards are numbered dynamically, starting with the first card installed. For example:
– If slot W0 is empty and slot W1 contains a 1-port serial WAN interface card, the interface
number is serial 0/0.
– If slot W0 contains a 2-port serial WAN interface card and slot W1 contains a 1-port serial
interface card, serial 0/0 and 0/1 reside in slot W0 and serial 0/2 resides in slot W1.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 5-7
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
Asynchronous Network Module Interface Numbering

Port Interface Numbering

Note The Cisco MWR 1941-DC router requires Cisco IOS Release 12.2(15)MC1a and later for 4- and 8-port
asynchronous/synchronous and 16- and 32-port asynchronous modules network module support.

4- and 8-Port
The 4-port and 8-port asynchronous/synchronous network modules, when configured for asynchronous
operation under releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 11.2(7)P, use a different interface numbering
algorithm:
interface-number = (16 x slot-number) + unit-number + 1

16- and 32-Port

Table 5-5 shows the numbers available under this numbering scheme. These interface numbers create
potential conflicts with the numbers assigned to 16- and 32-port asynchronous modules; that is, it would
be possible for a 16- or 32-port asynchronous module in one slot to overlap the interface numbers of a
4- or 8-port asynchronous and synchronous module in another slot.

Table 5-5 4-, 8-, and 16-Port Serial Network Module Interface Numbering

Slot Number Interface Numbers Interface Numbers Interface Numbers

(4-Port Module) (8-Port Module) (16-Port Module)
0 1–4 1–8 1–16
1 17–20 17–24 17–24
1
2 33–36 33–40 33–40
1
3 49–52 49–56 49–64
4 N/A N/A 65–80
5 N/A N/A 81–96
1. Cisco 3640 and Cisco 3660 routers only.

To prevent this conflict, Cisco IOS Release 11.2(7)P, which is required to operate 16- and 32-port
asynchronous network modules, checks when the router boots for the presence of 4- and 8-port
asynchronous/synchronous network modules configured as asynchronous. If the software finds any of
these network modules, it rewrites the starting configuration in nonvolatile random access memory
(NVRAM), if necessary, to adopt the new line numbering scheme for these modules, as shown in
Table 5-6 on page 5-8.

Table 5-6 New 4- and 8-Port Serial Network Module Interface Numbering

Slot Number Interface Numbers (4-Port Interface Numbers (8-Port

Module) Module)
0 1–4 1–8
1 33–36 33–40

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

5-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
4-Port Serial Network Module

Table 5-6 New 4- and 8-Port Serial Network Module Interface Numbering (continued)

Slot Number Interface Numbers (4-Port Interface Numbers (8-Port

Module) Module)
21 65–68 65–72
1
3 97–100 97–104
1. Cisco 3640 and Cisco 3660 routers only.

When an automatic configuration update is performed, the following message appears:

Line number convention changed from 16 lines/slot to 32 lines/slot.

4-Port Serial Network Module

This section provides information about the 4-port serial network module (Cisco product number
NM-4T). (See Figure 5-5.) With the appropriate serial transition cable, each port on this module can
provide an EIA/TIA-232, EIA/TIA-449, V.35, X.21, EIA/TIA-530 DTE, or nonreturn to zero/nonreturn
to zero inverted (NRZ/NRZI) serial interface. The module provides a synchronous data rate of 8 MB per
second on port 0, 4 MB per second each on port 0 and port 2, or 2 MB on all four ports simultaneously.

Note Half-duplex and binary-synchronous communications are not supported on the 4-port serial network
module.

Figure 5-5 4-Port Serial Network Module

Serial ports (DB-60)

SERIAL
4T

SERIAL 3 SERIAL 2 SERIAL 1 SERIAL 0 H9597

EN
CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD

Connecting the 4-Port Serial Module to a Network

The 4-port serial network module provides four universal, high-density, 60-pin receptacles. The serial
cable attached to each receptacle determines the port’s electrical interface type and mode, DTE or DCE.
After you install a 4-port serial module, use the appropriate serial cable to connect each of the DB-60
serial ports to a synchronous modem, channel service unit/data service unit (CSU/DSU), or other DCE
equipment. (See Figure 5-6.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 5-9
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
4-Port Serial Network Module

Figure 5-6 Connecting a 4-Port Serial Module to a CSU/DSU

SERIAL
4T

SERIAL 3 SERIAL 2 SERIAL 1 SERIAL 0

H9598
CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD
EN
TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD

Serial port (DB-60)

Serial transition
cable
CSU/DSU or
other DCE

EIA/TIA-232, EIA/TIA-449, V.35,

X.21, or EIA-530 connector

4-Port Serial Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
Each port on the 4-port serial network module also has the additional LEDs shown in Figure 5-7 and
described in Table 5-7.

Figure 5-7 4-Port Serial Network Module LEDs

SERIAL
4T

SERIAL 3 SERIAL 2 SERIAL 1 SERIAL 0

H9599

EN
CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD

Serial port LEDs Enable LED

Table 5-7 4-Port Serial Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
CN/LP In connect mode when green, in loopback mode when yellow
RXC Receive clock
RXD Receive activity
TXC Transmit clock
TXD Transmit activity

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

5-10 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
16- and 32-Port Asynchronous Serial Network Modules

16- and 32-Port Asynchronous Serial Network Modules

This section provides information about the following network modules:
• 16-port asynchronous network module (NM-16A) (see Figure 5-8)
• 32-port asynchronous network module (NM-32A) (see Figure 5-9)
When used with corresponding octal cables, these modules provide 16 or 32 EIA/TIA-232 data terminal
equipment (DTE) serial interfaces. Speeds up to 134.4 kbps are supported.

Figure 5-8 16-Port Asynchronous Network Module

ASYNC

15 11 ASYNC 8-15 7 3 ASYNC 0-7

14 10 6 2
13 9 5 1 EN
12 8 4 0

H9996
68-pin connectors

Figure 5-9 32-Port Asynchronous Network Module

ASYNC
31 27 ASYNC 24-31 23 19 ASYNC 16-23
30 26 22 18
29 25 21 17
28 24 20 16

15 11 ASYNC 8-15 7 3 ASYNC 0-7

14 10 6 2
13 9 5 1 EN
12 8 4 0

H9997
68-pin connectors

Asynchronous Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
Each port on an asynchronous network module also has a green status LED to indicate that the port is
connected to the network. These LEDs are grouped in blocks of eight to the left of each module and are
labeled with the port numbers. (See Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-11.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 5-11
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
4-, 8-, and 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Modules

Figure 5-10 16-Port Asynchronous Network Module LEDs

ASYNC

15 11 ASYNC 8-15 7 3 ASYNC 0-7

14 10 6 2
13 9 5 1 EN
12 8 4 0

H9994
Status LEDs Status LEDs Enable LED

Figure 5-11 32-Port Asynchronous Network Module LEDs

Status LEDs Status LEDs

ASYNC
31 27 ASYNC 24-31 23 19 ASYNC 16-23
30 26 22 18
29 25 21 17
28 24 20 16

15 11 ASYNC 8-15 7 3 ASYNC 0-7

14 10 6 2
13 9 5 1 EN
12 8 4 0

H9995
Status LEDs Status LEDs Enable LED

4-, 8-, and 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial

Network Modules
This section provides information about the following network modules for Cisco modular routers:
• 4-port asynchronous/synchronous serial network module (NM-4A/S) (see Figure 5-12).
• 8-port asynchronous/synchronous serial network module (NM-8A/S) (see Figure 5-13).
• 16-port asynchronous/synchronous serial network module (NM-16A/S) (see Figure 5-14).

Note The Cisco NM-16A/S network module uses a Cisco patented 12-in-1 Smart Serial cable.

With the appropriate serial transition cable, the ports on these modules can provide an EIA/TIA-232,
EIA/TIA-449, V.35, X.21, EIA/TIA-530 DTE, or NRZ/NRZI serial interface. The NM-16 A/S network
module can provide an EIA/TIA-530A DTE interface.

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 8-port A/S serial network modules (NM-8A/S) and 16-port A/S serial network modules
(NM-16A/S) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be
shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

5-12 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
4-, 8-, and 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Modules

Figure 5-12 4-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Module

Asynchronous/synchronous serial ports (DB-60)

SERIAL
A/S

H7255
CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD
EN
3 2 1 0

Figure 5-13 8-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Module

Asynchronous/synchronous serial ports (DB-60)

SERIAL
A/S

CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD
7 6 5 4

H7256
CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD
EN
3 2 1 0

Figure 5-14 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Module

Asynchronous/Synchronous Cisco
"Smart serial" ports (16)

NM-
15 13
16A/S 14 12
11 9
10 8

7 5
6 4
3 1 EN
2 0
82215

Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Module LEDs

Figure 5-15 shows LEDs for the 4-port asynchronous/synchronous serial network module. Figure 5-16
shows LEDs for the 8-port asynchronous/synchronous serial network module. Figure 5-17 shows the
LEDs for the 16-port asynchronous/synchronous serial network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 5-13
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
4-, 8-, and 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Modules

Figure 5-15 4-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Module LEDs

SERIAL
A/S

H7268
CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD EN
3 2 1 0

Asynchronous/synchronous serial port LEDs Enable LED

Figure 5-16 8-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Module LEDs

Asynchronous/synchronous serial port LEDs

SERIAL
A/S

CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD
7 6 5 4

H7269
CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD CN/LP RXC RXD TXC TXD
EN
3 2 1 0

Asynchronous/synchronous serial port LEDs Enable LED

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
Each port on an asynchronous/synchronous serial network module also has the additional LEDs shown
in Table 5-8.

Table 5-8 4- and 8-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
CN/LP In connect mode when green, in loopback mode when yellow
RXC Receive clock
RXD Receive activity
TXC Transmit clock
TXD Transmit activity

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

5-14 OL-2485-20
Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
4-, 8-, and 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Modules

Figure 5-17 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Module LEDs

Status LEDs

NM-
15 13
16A/S 14 12
11 9
10 8

7 5
6 4
3 1 EN
2 0

82225
Status LEDs Enable LEDs

The NM-16 A/S network module has LEDs that indicate the status of the port. When the LED is green,
the physical port is in the up state. When the LED is yellow, the port is in loopback mode. (See
Table 5-9.)

Table 5-9 16-port Asynchronous Status LEDs and Enabled LEDs

Mode LED Color Meaning

DCE Green Data terminal ready (DTR) and request to send (RTS) are present.
DTE Green Data set ready (DSR), data carrier detect (DCD), and clear to send (STC)
are present.
Loopback Yellow The port is in loopback mode

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 5-15
 Chapter 5 Connecting Serial Network Modules
4-, 8-, and 16-Port Asynchronous/Synchronous Serial Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

5-16 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 6
Connecting ISDN BRI Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Interface
(BRI) network modules for Cisco modular routers and contains the following sections:
• 4- and 8-Port ISDN BRI S/T Network Modules, page 6-1
• 4- and 8-Port ISDN BRI U Network Modules, page 6-3
• Upgrading ISDN BRI Network Modules, page 6-6
Unless specifically identified, references to BRI modules in this chapter include all ISDN BRI network
modules.

Note Do not install an ISDN BRI network module in the same chassis as an ISDN Primary Rate Interface
(PRI) network module unless you are using Cisco IOS Release 11.3(3)T or later. Earlier Cisco IOS
releases do not support this configuration.

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

4- and 8-Port ISDN BRI S/T Network Modules

This section provides information about the following network modules for Cisco modular routers:
• 4-port ISDN BRI network module (NM-4B-S/T or CPANM-4B-S/T) (see Figure 6-1). This module
connects to an ISDN WAN through an external Network Termination 1 (NT1) device (also known
as an S/T interface). It is also referred to as the 4-port BRI S/T network module.
• 8-port ISDN BRI network module (NM-8B-S/T or CPANM-8B-S/T) (see Figure 6-2). This module
connects to an ISDN WAN through an external NT1 device (also known as an S/T interface). It is
also referred to as the 8-port BRI S/T network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 6-1
 Chapter 6 Connecting ISDN BRI Network Modules
4- and 8-Port ISDN BRI S/T Network Modules

Figure 6-1 4-Port ISDN BRI Network Module (S/T Interface)

BRI
S/T

BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

EN

H7267
B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2

BRI S/T LEDs Enable LED

Figure 6-2 8-Port ISDN BRI Network Module (S/T Interface)

BRI S/T ports (RJ-45) BRI S/T ports (RJ-45)

BRI
S/T

BRI 7 BRI 6 BRI 5 BRI 4 BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

EN

H7254
B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2

Connecting BRI S/T Modules to a Network

To connect a BRI S/T network module to a network, use a straight-through RJ-45-to-RJ-45 cable to
connect the ISDN BRI port to an NT1. (See Figure 6-3.) These ports are color-coded orange.

Figure 6-3 Connecting an ISDN BRI S/T Network Module to an NT1

BRI
ST

BRI 7 BRI 6 BRI 5 BRI 4 BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

H7475

EN
B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2

BRI S/T port (RJ-45)

NT1 device

S/T port

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

6-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 6 Connecting ISDN BRI Network Modules
4- and 8-Port ISDN BRI U Network Modules

BRI S/T Module LEDs

Figure 6-4 shows LEDs for the 4-port BRI S/T network module. Figure 6-5 shows LEDs for the 8-port
BRI S/T network module.

Figure 6-4 4-Port ISDN BRI S/T Network Module LEDs

BRI
S/T

BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

EN

H7267
B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2

BRI S/T LEDs Enable LED

Figure 6-5 8-Port ISDN BRI S/T Network Module LEDs

BRI
S/T

BRI 7 BRI 6 BRI 5 BRI 4 BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

H7266
EN
B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2

Enable LED
BRI S/T LEDs BRI S/T LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
In addition, BRI S/T modules have two LEDs for each port. These LEDs indicate call activity on the two
ISDN BRI B channels, as described in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 BRI S/T Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
B1 Call active on B1 channel
B2 Call active on B2 channel

4- and 8-Port ISDN BRI U Network Modules

This section provides information about the following network modules for Cisco modular routers:
• 4-port ISDN BRI with NT1 network module (NM-4B-U or CPANM-4B-U) (see Figure 6-6). This
module connects to an ISDN WAN using a built-in NT1 device (also known as a U interface). It is
also referred to as the 4-port BRI U network module.
• 8-port ISDN BRI with NT1 network module (NM-8B-U or CPANM-8B-U) (see Figure 6-7). This
module connects to an ISDN WAN using a built-in NT1 device (also known as a U interface). It is
also referred to as the 8-port BRI U network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 6-3
 Chapter 6 Connecting ISDN BRI Network Modules
4- and 8-Port ISDN BRI U Network Modules

Figure 6-6 4-Port ISDN BRI with NT1 Network Module (U Interface)

BRI U ports (RJ-45)

BRI
U

BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

NT1

NT1

NT1

NT1
B1 B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2 B2

H7259
EN

Figure 6-7 8-Port ISDN BRI with NT1 Network Module (U Interface)

NT1 LEDs

BRI 7 BRI 6 BRI 5 BRI 4

NT1

NT1

NT1

NT1
BRI
U B1 B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2 B2

BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

NT1

NT1

NT1

NT1
B1 B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2 B2

H7264
EN

Enable LED
ISDN BRI LEDs

Connecting BRI U Modules to a Network

To connect a BRI U module to a network, use a straight-through RJ-45-to-RJ-45 cable to connect the
ISDN BRI port to an RJ-45 jack. (See Figure 6-8.) These ports are color-coded red.

Figure 6-8 Connecting a BRI U Network Module to an RJ-45 ISDN Jack

BRI U port (RJ-45)

BRI
U

BRI 3 BRI 2
NT1

BRI 1
NT1

BRI 0
NT1

B1
NT1

B1 B1
B2 B1
B2
H7474

B2 B2
EN

Straight-through
RJ-45-to-RJ-45
cable

RJ-45 jack

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

6-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 6 Connecting ISDN BRI Network Modules
4- and 8-Port ISDN BRI U Network Modules

BRI U Module LEDs

Figure 6-9 shows LEDs for the 4-port BRI U network module. Figure 6-10 shows LEDs for the 8-port
BRI U network module.

Figure 6-9 4-Port ISDN BRI U Network Module LEDs

NT1 LEDs

BRI
U

BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

NT1

NT1

NT1

NT1
B1 B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2 B2

H7265
EN

Enable LED
ISDN BRI LEDs

Figure 6-10 8-Port ISDN BRI U Network Module LEDs

NT1 LEDs

BRI 7 BRI 6 BRI 5 BRI 4

NT1

NT1

NT1

NT1
BRI
U B1 B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2 B2

BRI 3 BRI 2 BRI 1 BRI 0

NT1

NT1

NT1

NT1

B1 B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2 B2

H7264
EN

Enable LED
ISDN BRI LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
In addition, BRI U modules have three LEDs for each port. Two of these LEDs indicate call activity on
the two ISDN BRI B channels, as described in Table 6-2. The third LED, labeled NT1, indicates
synchronization status of the NT1.

Table 6-2 BRI U Network Modules LEDs

LED Meaning
B1 Activity on B1 channel
B2 Activity on B2 channel
NT1 Synchronous status of NT1

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 6-5
 Chapter 6 Connecting ISDN BRI Network Modules
Upgrading ISDN BRI Network Modules

Upgrading ISDN BRI Network Modules

If your Cisco 3600 series router contains an ISDN BRI network module (product numbers NM-4B-S/T,
NM-4B-U, NM-8B-S/T, or NM-8B-U) and a digital modem network module (product numbers
NM-6DM, NM-12DM, NM-18DM, NM-24DM, or NM-30DM), your ISDN BRI network module may
need to be upgraded to the minimum revision shown in Table 6-3.
Earlier revisions of the ISDN BRI network module cannot send modem calls to the digital modem
network module.

Table 6-3 ISDN BRI Network Module Upgrade Revisions

Module Minimum Revision

NM-4B-S/T 800-01236-03
NM-4B-U 800-01238-06
NM-8B-S/T 800-01237-03
NM-8B-U 800-01239-06

If your BRI module is the wrong revision, you see a message similar to this one when the router boots:
The BRI network module in slot 0 is incompatible with the digital modems installed in the
router.

To determine the revision level, you can examine the network module itself (outside the router) or use
the Cisco IOS show diag command. The label on the module board should show a part number beginning
with 800-, corresponding to Table 6-3. A BRI S/T module whose part number ends with -01 or -02 needs
to be upgraded, as does a BRI U module whose part number is lower than -06.
The output of the show diag command looks similar to the following:
Port adapter is analyzed
Port adapter insertion time unknown
Hardware revision 1.0 Board revision A0
Serial number 4152626 Part number 800-01236-01
Test history 0x0 RMA number 00-00-00
EEPROM format version 1
EEPROM contents (hex):
0x20: 01 26 01 00 00 3F 5D 32 50 04 CC 01 00 00 00 00
0x30: 50 00 00 00 96 11 04 17 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

To order network module upgrades, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on page xi.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

6-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 7
Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Primary Rate
Interface (PRI) network modules for Cisco modular routers and contains the following sections:
• Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with G.703, page 7-2
• Channelized T1/ISDN PRI Network Modules, page 7-6
• Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Modules, page 7-7
• Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced (120-Ohm) Network Modules, page 7-9
• Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Unbalanced (75-Ohm) Network Modules, page 7-11
• PRI Module LEDs, page 7-13
• Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco PRI Network Module (Cisco 3660 and Cisco 3745
Only), page 7-17
• Upgrading ISDN PRI Network Modules, page 7-17

Note Unless specifically identified, references to PRI modules in this chapter include all these network
modules.

Note Cisco Fast Ethernet-PRI network modules also provide a PRI interface. See Chapter 4, “Connecting
Fast Ethernet-PRI Network Modules,” for further information.

Note Do not install an ISDN BRI network module in the same chassis as an ISDN PRI network module,
unless you are using Cisco IOS Release 11.3(3)T or later. Earlier Cisco IOS releases do not support
this configuration.

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

CT1/PRI modules are available with or without a built-in channel service unit (CSU), and with one or
two ports. CT1/PRI modules connect to an external CSU; CT1/PRI-CSU modules connect directly to the
network. Each T1 module provides up to 24 virtual channels per T1 port. Each channel can be configured
individually as a serial interface.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-1
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with G.703

CT1/PRI and CT1/PRI-CSU modules receive and transmit data bidirectionally, at the T1 rate of
1.544 Mbps.

Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with G.703

This section provides information about the following network modules:
• 1-port T1/E1 channelized PRI network module with G.703 (NM-1CE1T1-PRI) (see Figure 7-1)
• 2-port T1/E1 channelized PRI network module with G.703 (NM-2CE1T1-PRI) (see Figure 7-2)
Cisco T1/E1 channelized PRI network modules with G.703 provide connection of one or two primary
rate ISDN lines. T1 or E1 interfaces are configurable through Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI)
commands. Each port supports 100/120-ohm balanced and 75-ohm unbalanced termination, and features
RJ-48C connectors and cable accessories allowing for DB-15, BNC, and other connector types. An
onboard advanced integration module (AIM) connector allows for future universal port AIM support.

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 1-port T1/E1 channelized PRI network modules with G.703 (NM-1CE1T1-PRI) and 2-port
T1/E1 channelized PRI network modules with G.703 (NM-2CE1T1-PRI) only to intrabuilding or
nonexposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded
at both ends.

Cisco T1/E1 channelized PRI network modules with G.703 (NM-1CE1T1-PRI and NM-2CE1T1-PRI)
replace the following network modules (also described in this chapter):
• NM-1CE1B
• NM-1CE1U
• NM-1CT1
• NM-1CT1-CSU
• NM-2CE1B
• NM-2CE1U
• NM-2CT1
• NM-2CT1-CSU
For information on Cisco modular access routers supporting Cisco channelized T1/E1 PRI network
modules with G.703, see Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Modular Access Routers Supporting Cisco Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with
G.703

Modular Access Router NM-1CE1T1-PRI NM-2CE1T1-PRI

Cisco 26xx No No
Cisco 26xxXM Yes Yes
Cisco 2691 Yes Yes
Cisco 3620 No No
Cisco 3631 Yes Yes
Cisco 3640 No No

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with G.703

Table 7-1 Modular Access Routers Supporting Cisco Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with
G.703

Modular Access Router NM-1CE1T1-PRI NM-2CE1T1-PRI

Cisco 3660 Yes Yes
Cisco 37xx Yes Yes

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-3
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with G.703

Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2 show the faceplates for the 1-port and 2-port channelized T1/E1 PRI network
modules with G.703.

Figure 7-1 1-Port Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Module with G.703

NM-1CE1T1-PRI

RX TX CD LP
MON MON

T1
RA AIM
E1-BAL
C0 LA E1-UNBAL EN

82886
CTLR 0

Figure 7-2 2-Port Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Module with G.703

NM-2CE1T1-PRI

CD LP RX TX CD LP
MON MON

T1 T1
RA C1 RA AIM
E1-BAL E1-BAL
LA E1-UNBAL C0 LA E1-UNBAL EN

82887
CTLR 1 CTLR 0

Enabling Wetting Current on Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with

G.703
Wetting current is a small amount of electrical current (60 to 140 milliamps) sent from the central office
to the card to prevent the corrosion of electrical contacts in the module network connection.
The wetting current feature can be enabled or disabled by the end user. It is controlled by the location
of a jumper on the J8 (CTLR 0) and J9 (CTLR 1) connectors on the network module. (See Figure 7-3.)
To enable the wetting current feature, connect pins 1 and 2 on the J8 and J9 connectors with the jumper.
To disable the wetting current feature, either remove the jumper completely, or use the jumper to connect
pins 2 and 3 on the J8 and J9 connectors.
The card is shipped with the jumper connecting pins 2 and 3 on the J8 and J9 connectors, disabling the
wetting current feature.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with G.703

Figure 7-3 Wetting Current Jumper Locations on Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with
G.703

J8/J9
1
2
3
Wetting current
Wetting current jumper
enabled

J8/J9
1
2
3

Wetting current
disabled NM
-2C
E1
T1
-PR
I
3
2
1

CD
J9

RA
LP
LA

T1
CT RX
LR E1
1 -B MO

3
E1 N

2
-U
NB

88539
TX
MO
N

J8
C1
C0
CD

RA
LP
LA

T1
CT
LR E1
0 -B
E1
-U
NB
AIM
EN

Connecting Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Modules with G.703 to a Network

Warning For connections outside the building where the equipment is installed, the following ports must be
connected through an approved network termination unit with integral circuit protection: T1
Statement 1044

Figure 7-4 shows a connection between a channelized T1/E1 PRI network module with G.703 and a
networking device.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-5
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized T1/ISDN PRI Network Modules

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 1-port T1/E1 channelized PRI network modules with G.703 (NM-1CE1T1-PRI) and 2-port
T1/E1 channelized PRI network modules with G.703 (NM-2CE1T1-PRI) only to intrabuilding or
nonexposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded
at both ends.

Figure 7-4 Connecting a Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Module with G.703 to a Networking Device

NM-1CE1T1-PRI

RX TX CD LP
MON MON

T1

88639
RA AIM
E1-BAL
C0 LA E1-UNBAL EN
CTLR 0

Channelized T1/ISDN PRI Network Modules

This section provides information about the following network modules for Cisco modular routers:
• 1-port channelized T1/ISDN PRI network module (NM-1CT1 or CPANM-1CT1) (see Figure 7-5).
This module is also referred to as the 1-port CT1/PRI network module.
• 2-port channelized T1/ISDN PRI network module (NM-2CT1 or CPANM-2CT1) (see Figure 7-6).
This module is also referred to as the 2-port CT1/PRI network module.

Figure 7-5 1-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI Network Module

cT1
PRI
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

EN
H7460

CTRLR 0

CT1/PRI-U port (DB-15)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Modules

Figure 7-6 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI Network Module

LOOPBACK

CARRIER
cT1

REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL
PRI
EN
CTRLR 1

LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL
EN

H7461
CTRLR 0

CT1/PRI-U ports (DB-15)

Connecting CT1/PRI Modules to the Network

To connect a CT1/PRI module to the network, use a DB-15-to-DB-15 T1 serial cable to connect the
CT1/PRI port to a T1 channel service unit (CSU). (See Figure 7-7.) These ports are color-coded tan.

Figure 7-7 Connecting a CT1/PRI Module to a T1 CSU

FE–PRI
1FE-1CT1

10/100BaseT
CARRIER
REMOTE

CTRLR 0
DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

100Mbps
BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

CT1/PRI port (DB-15)

H7468

T1 serial
cable
T1 CSU

CT1/PRI port (DB-15)

Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Modules

This section provides information about the following network modules for Cisco modular routers:
• 1-port channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU network module (NM-1CT1-CSU or
CPANM-1CT1-CSU) (see Figure 7-8). This module is also referred to as the 1-port CT1/PRI CSU
network module.
• 2-port channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU network module (NM-2CT1-CSU or
CPANM-2CT1-CSU) (see Figure 7-9). This module is also referred to as the 2-port CT1/PRI CSU
network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-7
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Modules

Figure 7-8 1-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Module

cT1
CSU

RX TX RX
OUT IN MON

LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM
ALARM

LOCAL
EN

H7465
CTRLR 0

Monitor and CT1/PRI CSU

test ports port (RJ-48)
(Bantam)

Figure 7-9 2-Port Channelized T1/ISDN PRI with CSU Network Module
LOOPBACK

cT1
CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM
ALARM

LOCAL

CSU
CTRLR 1
RX TX RX
OUT IN MON
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM
ALARM

LOCAL

EN

H7464
CTRLR 0

Monitor and CT1/PRI CSU

test ports port (RJ-48)
(Bantam)

Connecting CT1/PRI CSU Modules to the Network

To connect a CT1/PRI CSU module to the network, use a straight-through RJ-48C-to-RJ-48C cable to
connect the RJ-48C port to an RJ-48C jack (see Figure 7-10). These ports are color-coded tan.

Figure 7-10 Connecting a CT1/PRI CSU Module to an RJ-48C Jack

FE–PRI
1FE-1CT1-CSU

10/100BaseT
CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

CTRLR 0

100Mbps
BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

CT1/PRI CSU
port (RJ-48C)
H7469

RJ-48C jack

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-8 OL-2485-20
Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced (120-Ohm) Network Modules

Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced (120-Ohm) Network

Modules
This section provides information about the following network modules for Cisco modular routers:
• 1-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI balanced (120-ohm) network module (NM-1CE1B or
CPANM-1CE1B) (see Figure 7-11). This module is also referred to as the 1-port CE1/PRI-B
network module.
• 2-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI balanced (120-ohm) network module (NM-2CE1B or
CPANM-2CE1B) (see Figure 7-12). This module is also referred to as the 2-port CE1/PRI-B
network module.

Figure 7-11 1-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Network Module (Balanced)

cE1-B
PRI
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

EN

H7260
CTRLR 0

CE1/PRI-B port

Figure 7-12 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Network Module (Balanced)

LOOPBACK

CARRIER

cE1-B
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

PRI
CTRLR 1
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

EN
H7261

CTRLR 0

CE1/PRI-B ports

CE1/PRI modules are available with one or two E1 ports and with balanced or unbalanced interfaces.
These modules receive and transmit data bidirectionally at the E1 rate of 2.048 Mbps, and provide up to
30 virtual channels per E1 port. Each channel can be configured individually as a serial interface.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-9
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Balanced (120-Ohm) Network Modules

CE1/PRI Module Jumper Settings

Jumpers on CE1/PRI modules can be used to connect or disconnect receive shield to ground. (See
Table 7-2.) The default setting for balanced, 120-ohm CE1/PRI-B modules disconnects receive shield to
ground. The default setting for unbalanced, 75-ohm CE1/PRI-U modules connects receive shield to
ground. If you are experiencing ground loop problems with E1 cabling, you may want to try changing
the jumper settings for the module.

Table 7-2 CE1/PRI Module Jumpers

CE1/PRI Module Type Default Setting Function

Balanced, 120-ohm 2 and 3 Disconnects receive shield from ground
Unbalanced, 75-ohm 1 and 2 Connects receive shield to ground

Connecting CE1/PRI-B Modules to the Network

To connect a CE1/PRI-B (120-ohm) module to the network, use the appropriate cable to connect the
CE1/PRI-B port to an E1 CSU. (See Figure 7-13, Figure 7-14, and Figure 7-15, showing DB-15, twinax,
and RJ-45 CSUs, respectively.) These ports are color-coded tan.

Figure 7-13 Connecting a 120-ohm CE1/PRI-B Module to an E1 CSU (DB-15-to-DB-15 Connectors)

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

100Mbps
BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

CE1/PRI-B (DB-15)

E1 cable for 120-ohm

H7470

balanced connections
with a DB-15 connector
at the network end
E1 CSU

DB-15 connector

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-10 OL-2485-20
Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Unbalanced (75-Ohm) Network Modules

Figure 7-14 Connecting a 120-ohm CE1/PRI-B Module to an E1 CSU (DB-15-to-Twinax Connectors)

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT

CARRIER
CTRLR 0

REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM

100Mbps
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX
EN

CE1/PRI port (DB-15)

H7473
E1 cable for 75-ohm
balanced connections
with twinax connectors
at the network end
E1 CSU

Twinax connectors

Figure 7-15 Connecting a 120-ohm CE1/PRI-B Module to an E1 CSU (DB-15-to-RJ-45 Connectors)

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM

100Mbps
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX

EN

CE1/PRI port (DB-15)

E1 cable for 120-ohm

H7472

balanced connections
with an RJ-45 connector
at the network end

RJ-45 jack

Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Unbalanced (75-Ohm) Network

Modules
This section provides information about the following network modules for Cisco modular routers:
• 1-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI unbalanced (75-ohm) network module (NM-1CE1U or
CPANM-1CE1U) (see Figure 7-16). This module is also referred to as the 1-port CE1/PRI-U
network module.
• 2-port channelized E1/ISDN PRI unbalanced (75-ohm) network module (NM-2CE1U or
CPANM-2CE1U) (see Figure 7-17). This module is also referred to as the 2-port CE1/PRI-U
network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-11
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Unbalanced (75-Ohm) Network Modules

Figure 7-16 1-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Network Module (Unbalanced)

cE1-U
PRI

LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL
EN

H8499
CTRLR 0

CE1/PRI-U port

Figure 7-17 2-Port Channelized E1/ISDN PRI Network Module (Unbalanced)

LOOPBACK

CARRIER

cE1-U
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

PRI
CTRLR 1
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

EN

H8500
CTRLR 0

CE1/PRI-U ports

CE1/PRI Module Jumper Settings

Jumpers on CE1/PRI modules can be used to connect or disconnect receive shield to ground (see
Table 7-3). The default setting for balanced, 120-ohm CE1/PRI-B modules disconnects receive shield to
ground. The default setting for unbalanced, 75-ohm CE1/PRI-U modules connects receive shield to
ground. If you are experiencing ground loop problems with E1 cabling, you may want to try changing
the jumper settings for the module.

Table 7-3 CE1/PRI Module Jumpers

CE1/PRI Module Type Default Setting Function

Balanced, 120-ohm 2 and 3 Disconnects receive shield from ground
Unbalanced, 75-ohm 1 and 2 Connects receive shield to ground

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-12 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
PRI Module LEDs

Connecting CE1/PRI-U Modules to the Network

To connect a CE1/PRI-U (75-ohm) module to the network, use the appropriate cable to connect the
CE1/PRI-U port to an E1 CSU (see Figure 7-18). These ports are color-coded tan. The illustration shows
a CSU with BNC connectors.

Figure 7-18 Connecting a CE1/PRI-U Module to an E1 CSU

(DB-15-to-BNC Connectors)

FE-PRI
1FE-1CE1-B/U

10/100BaseT
CARRIER

CTRLR 0
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM

100Mbps
LOCAL

BACK
LOOP

COLL

LINK

FDX
EN

CE1/PRI-U

E1 cable for 75-ohm

H7471
unbalanced connections
with BNC connectors
at the network end
E1 CSU

BNC connectors

PRI Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
All PRI modules display four additional LEDs for each port. These LEDs are described in Table 7-4.

Table 7-4 ISDN PRI Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
RA Local alarm at remote end of connection
LA Loss of signal, loss of frame, or unavailability because of
excessive errors
LP Loopback mode
CD Carrier received on telco link

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-13
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
PRI Module LEDs

Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Module with G.703 LEDs

Figure 7-19 and Figure 7-20 show channelized T1/E1 PRI network module with G.703 LEDs. See
Table 7-5 for LED definitions.
For LEDs found on all PRI network modules, see Table 7-4.

Figure 7-19 1-Port Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Module with G.703 LEDs

NM-1CE1T1-PRI

RX TX CD LP
MON MON

T1
RA AIM
E1-BAL
C0 LA E1-UNBAL EN

88737
CTLR 0

T1
E1-BAL
C0
E1-UNBAL

Figure 7-20 2-Port Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Module with G.703 LEDs

NM-2CE1T1-PRI

CD LP RX TX CD LP
MON MON

T1 T1
RA C1 RA AIM
E1-BAL E1-BAL
LA E1-UNBAL C0 LA E1-UNBAL EN

88738
CTLR 1 CTLR 0

T1 T1
E1-BAL CTRL 1 E1-BAL
E1-UNBAL CTRL 0 E1-UNBAL

Table 7-5 Channelized T1/E1 PRI Network Module with G.703 LEDs

LED Color Meaning

T1 Green Interface is configured for balanced T1.
E1-BAL Green Interface is configured for balanced E1.
E1-UNBAL Green Interface is configured for unbalanced E1.
C0 Green Port 0 is connected to the bantam monitor connector.
C1 Green Port 1 is connected to the bantam monitor connector.
AIM Green An advanced integration module (AIM) is installed on the network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-14 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
PRI Module LEDs

CT1/PRI Network Module LEDs

Figure 7-21 and Figure 7-22 show CT1/PRI network module LEDs.

Figure 7-21 1-Port CT1/PRI Network Module LEDs

cT1
PRI

LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

EN

H7462
CTRLR 0

Enable LED
CT1/PRI LEDs

Figure 7-22 2-Port CT1/PRI Network Module LEDs

CT1/PRI LEDs
LOOPBACK

CARRIER

cT1
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

PRI
CTRLR 1
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

EN

H7463
CTRLR 0

CT1/PRI LEDs Enable LED

CT1/PRI CSU Network Module LEDs

Figure 7-23 and Figure 7-24 show CT1/PRI CSU module LEDs.

Figure 7-23 1-Port CT1/PRI CSU Network Module LEDs

cT1
CSU

RX TX RX
OUT IN MON
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM
ALARM

LOCAL

EN
H7467

CTRLR 0

CT1/PRI CSU LEDs

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-15
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
PRI Module LEDs

Figure 7-24 2-Port CT1/PRI CSU Network Module LEDs

CT1/PRI CSU LEDs

LOOPBACK
cT1

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM
ALARM

LOCAL
CSU
CTRLR 1
RX TX RX
OUT IN MON

LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM
ALARM

LOCAL
EN

H7466
CTRLR 0

CT1/PRI CSU LEDs

CE1/PRI Network Module LEDs

Figure 7-25 and Figure 7-26 show CE1/PRI module LEDs. These LEDs are the same for balanced and
unbalanced modules.

Figure 7-25 1-Port CE1/PRI Network Module LEDs

cE1
PRI
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

EN

H7262
CTRLR 0

Enable LED
CE1/PRI LEDs

Figure 7-26 2-Port CE1/PRI Network Module LEDs

CE1/PRI LEDs
LOOPBACK

CARRIER

cE1
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

PRI
CTRLR 1
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

EN
H7263

CTRLR 0

CE1/PRI LEDs Enable LED

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-16 OL-2485-20
Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco PRI Network Module (Cisco 3660 and Cisco 3745 Only)

Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco PRI Network Module

(Cisco 3660 and Cisco 3745 Only)
Some Cisco modular access routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the
router or affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal
(OIR). OIR of network modules provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing
information, and ensures session preservation.

Note All Cisco PRI network modules have OIR support, but OIR is supported only on Cisco 3660 and
Cisco 3745 platforms.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a network module, install
another module exactly like it in its place. If you remove a network module with an installed interface
card, expansion module, or AIM, the replacement module should have the same hardware installed.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, refer to the hardware installation guide for your type of router.

Upgrading ISDN PRI Network Modules

If your Cisco 3600 series router contains a legacy ISDN PRI network module and a digital modem
network module (product numbers NM-6DM, NM-12DM, NM-18DM, NM-24DM, or NM-30DM), your
ISDN PRI network module may need to be upgraded to revision level -03 or higher. Earlier revisions of
ISDN PRI network modules cannot send modem calls to the digital modem network module.

Note Channelized T1/E1 PRI network modules with G.703 provide full support for Cisco digital modem
network modules.

If your PRI module is the wrong revision, you see a message similar to the following message when the
router boots:
The PRI network module in slot 0 is incompatible with the digital modems installed in the
router.

To determine the revision level, you can examine the network module itself (outside the router) or use
the Cisco IOS show diag command. The label on the module board should show a part number
beginning with 800- and ending with the revision level.
The output of the show diag command looks similar to the following:
Port adapter is analyzed
Port adapter insertion time unknown
Hardware revision 1.0 Board revision A0
Serial number 4152626 Part number 800-01236-01
Test history 0x0 RMA number 00-00-00
EEPROM format version 1
EEPROM contents (hex):
0x20: 01 26 01 00 00 3F 5D 32 50 04 CC 01 00 00 00 00
0x30: 50 00 00 00 96 11 04 17 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 7-17
 Chapter 7 Connecting ISDN PRI Network Modules
Upgrading ISDN PRI Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

7-18 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 8
Connecting Voice Network Modules

The voice functionality built into Cisco IOS software enables modular access routers to carry voice
traffic, such as telephone calls and faxes, as Voice over IP (VoIP) simultaneously with data traffic over
LANs, MANs, and WANs. Voice network modules convert telephone voice signals into a form that can
be transmitted over an IP network.
Voice network modules convert telephone voice signals into a form that can be transmitted over an IP
network. These modules have one or two slots for installing supported interface cards (see Table 1-1 on
page 1-5 and Table 1-2 on page 1-8). Voice interface cards (VICs) or voice/WAN interface cards
(VWICs) installed in the voice network module provide physical connections to the telephony equipment
or network, and are connected using the appropriate cables. See the Cisco Interface Cards Hardware
Installation Guide for more information.
You can install one voice interface card in a 1-slot voice network module, and two voice interface cards
in a 2-slot module. For information on installing voice interface cards into a network module, see the
“Installing Cisco Interface Cards in 1- or 2-Slot Network Modules” section on page 2-24.
This chapter contains the following sections:
• 2- and 4-Channel Voice Network Modules, page 8-1
• 4-, 8-, and 48-Channel High-Density Voice Network Modules, page 8-2
• 60-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module, page 8-3
• Voice Network Module LEDs, page 8-8
• IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module, page 8-9

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

2- and 4-Channel Voice Network Modules

This section describes the following modules:
• 1-slot 2-channel voice network module (NM-1V) (see Figure 8-1)
• 2-slot 4-channel voice network module (NM-2V) (see Figure 8-2)
For information on the Cisco interface cards supported on these voice network modules, see Table 1-2
on page 1-8.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 8-1
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
4-, 8-, and 48-Channel High-Density Voice Network Modules

Figure 8-1 1-Slot 2-Channel Voice Network Module (NM-1V)

1
VOICE
2V

V1 V0

H10834
EN

Figure 8-2 2-Slot 4-Channel Voice Network Module (NM-2V)

Module
screw

VOICE
2V

V1 V0

H10833
EN

Module
screw Enable
LED

4-, 8-, and 48-Channel High-Density Voice Network Modules

This section describes the following modules:
• 1-slot 4-channel high-density voice network module with one digital signal processor (DSP)
(NM-HD-1V) (see Figure 8-3)
• 2-slot 8-channel high-density voice network module with one DSP (NM-HD-2V) (see Figure 8-4)
• 2-slot 48-channel high-density enhanced network module with 3 DSPs, supporting up to 8 analog
or 48 digital channels (NM-HD-2VE) (see Figure 8-5)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 2-slot 48-channel high-density enhanced network module (NM-HD-2VE) only to
intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield
must be grounded at both ends.

Note For the NM-HD-1V, NM-HD-2V, and NM-DS-2VE network modules, DSPs are on-board and are not
field-replaceable units (FRUs).

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

8-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
60-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module

Note The NM-HD-1V, NM-HD-2V, and NM-HD-2VE network modules replace the NM-1V and NM-2V
network modules. The NM-1V and NM-2V network modules are still available for use on Cisco 2600
series, Cisco 3600 series, and Cisco 3700 series routers.

For information on the Cisco interface cards supported on these voice network modules, see Table 1-2
on page 1-8.

Figure 8-3 1-Slot 4-Channel High-Density Network Module (NM-HD-1V)

NM-HD
-1V

V0

EN

89033
Figure 8-4 2-Slot 8-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module (NM-HD-2V)

NM-HD
-2V

V1 V0

EN

89034
Figure 8-5 2-Slot 48-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module (NM-HD-2VE)

NM-HD
-2VE

V1 V0

EN
89035

60-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module

This section describes the 60-channel high-density voice (HDV) network module, shown in Figure 8-6.
When used in conjunction with T1/E1 multiflex trunk interface cards and packet voice digital signal
processor modules (PVDMs), this module is also called a digital T1/E1 packet voice trunk network
module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 8-3
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
60-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module

Figure 8-6 60-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module (NM-HDV)

NM-HDV

V0

BANK 4 BANK 3 BANK 2 BANK 1 BANK 0 EH

22160
The 60-channel HDV network module converts voice and fax into IP packets or frames that can be
transmitted as VoIP over a variety of transport technologies (channelized T1/E1, Frame Relay,
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), and others). The number of channels supported depends on the
number of PVDMs installed:
• Up to 6 channels per PVDM (30 channels for cards with 5 PVDMs) for high-complexity vocoders
that support the following compression algorithms: G.711, G.726, G.729, G.723.1, G.728, and Fax
Relay
• Up to 12 channels per PVDM (60 channels for cards with 5 PVDMs) for medium-complexity
vocoders that support the following compression algorithms: G.711, G.726, G.729a, and Fax Relay
Both a 60-channel HDV network module and a voice interface card (VIC) are required to connect to the
public switched telephone network (PSTN) or a PBX. One VIC (providing one or two T1/E1 line
interfaces) can be installed in the HDV network module. Currently, only the 1- and 2-port T1/E1
multiflex trunk interface cards (VWIC-1MFT-T1, VWIC-2MFT-T1, and VWIC-2MFT-T1-DI) are
supported using channel-associated signaling (CAS). In Cisco 3620 and Cisco 3640 routers, at least one
other network module or WAN interface card (WIC) must be installed in the router to provide the
connection to the IP LAN or WAN. In Cisco 3660 routers, a network module is required for WAN access
or a direct connection is required for LAN access. In Cisco 2600 series routers, a WIC is required for
WAN access or a direct connection is required for LAN access.

Packet Voice DSP Modules

The HDV network module contains five 72-pin SIMM sockets or banks for packet voice DSP modules
(PVDMs), numbered 0 through 4. (See Figure 8-7.) Each socket can be filled with a single 72-pin
PVDM. The PVDMs must be installed starting from slot 0.

Note PVDM and PVDM2 modules are not interchangeable. Use PVDM modules with the NM-HDV network
module only, and use PVDM2 modules with the NM-HDV2 network module only.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

8-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
60-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module

Figure 8-7 PVDM Slot Locations

4 3 2 1 0

22955
PVDM slots

PVDM Orientation
PVDMs are manufactured with a polarization notch to ensure proper orientation and alignment holes to
ensure proper positioning. Figure 8-8 shows the polarization notch and alignment holes on a PVDM
card. PVDM cards are installed with the connector edge down, the polarization notch near the front of
the chassis, and the component side facing the right side of the chassis.

Caution To avoid damaging ESD-sensitive components, observe all ESD precautions. To avoid damaging the
HDV network module, avoid using excessive force when you remove or replace PVDMs.

Figure 8-8 PVDM Orientation

Alignment holes
22953

Connector edge Polarization notch

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 8-5
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
60-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module

Removing PVDMs
To remove PVDMs, follow these steps:

Step 1 Find the PVDM sockets on the HDV network module. (See Figure 8-7.)

Caution Handle PVDMs by the card edges only. PVDMs are ESD-sensitive components and can be damaged
by mishandling.

Step 2 Remove one PVDM at a time, beginning with the PVDM in bank 4. To lift the PVDM out of its socket,
pull the locking spring clips on both sides outward and tilt the PVDM toward the right side of the chassis,
free of the clips. (See Figure 8-9.)

Figure 8-9 Removing PVDMs

Top view

Front of chassis

2. Push the top of the

PVDM forward and down.

23605
PVDM
1. Pull the locking spring clips outward. polarization
notch

Step 3 Hold the PVDM by the edges with your thumb and index finger and lift it out of the socket. Place the
removed PVDM in an antistatic bag to protect it from ESD damage.
Step 4 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for each PVDM.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

8-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
60-Channel High-Density Voice Network Module

Installing PVDMs
To install PVDMs, follow these steps:

Step 1 Find the PVDM sockets on the HDV network module. (See Figure 8-7.)

Caution Handle PVDMs by the card edges only. PVDMs are ESD-sensitive components and can be damaged
by mishandling.

Step 2 Hold the PVDM with the polarization notch on the right, near the front of the chassis, and the component
side away from you, with the connector edge at the bottom. (See Figure 8-8.)
Step 3 Beginning with bank 0, insert the PVDM into the connector slot at an angle, tilted toward the right side
of the chassis. Align the PVDM in a vertical position (see Figure 8-10) by using the minimum amount
of force required. When the PVDM is properly seated, the socket guide posts fit through the alignment
holes, and the connector springs click into place.
Step 4 Ensure that each PVDM is straight and that the alignment holes (as shown in Figure 8-9) line up with
the plastic guides on the socket.

Figure 8-10 Installing PVDMs

View from front of board

1. Insert the PVDM into the socket

at an angle from vertical.
2. Push the top of the PVDM
down and back.
3. The socket guide posts fit through
the holes in the PVDM.
4. The locking springs clip the back
of the PVDM.
23604

Caution It is normal to feel some resistance, but do not use excessive force on the PVDM and do not touch
the surface components.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for each PVDM.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 8-7
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
Voice Network Module LEDs

Voice Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router. The following network modules have no additional LEDs. (See
Figure 8-11 for a sample faceplate.)
• NM-1V
• NM-2V
• NM-HD-1V
• NM-HD-2V
• NM-HD-2VE

Figure 8-11 Voice Network Module LED

Module
screw

VOICE
2V

V1 V0

H10833
EN

Module
screw
Enable
LED

HDV Network Module LEDs

High-density network modules have an enable (EN) LED, and five LEDs for the PVDM banks,
numbered 0 through 4. The enable LED indicates that the module has passed its self-tests and is available
to the router. The BANK 0 through BANK 4 LEDs indicate the current operating condition of the
PVDMs installed on the card. (See Figure 8-12.) If the BANK LEDs do not come on after initial
installation and configuration, check that the PVDMs are properly seated in their slots.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

8-8 OL-2485-20
Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module

Figure 8-12 HDV Network Module LEDs

NM-HDV

V0

BANK 4 BANK 3 BANK 2 BANK 1 BANK 0 EH

22161
BANK 4 BANK 2 BANK 0 ENABLE
LED LED LED LED
BANK 3 BANK 1
LED LED

IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network

Module
This section describes the IP communications high-density digital voice or fax (NM-HDV2) network
module. This module is available in three base-board stock-keeping units (SKUs):
• NM-HDV2, with no built-in T1/E1 ports, shown in Figure 8-13
• NM-HDV2-1T1/E1, with one built-in T1/E1 port, shown in Figure 8-14
• NM-HDV2-2T1/E1, with two built-in T1/E1 ports, shown in Figure 8-15
These three base-board SKUs also include a single VIC or VWIC slot for Foreign Exchange Station
(FXS), Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) or centralized automated message accounting trunk protocol
(CAMA), receive and transmit (E&M), Direct Inward Dial (DID), Basic Rate Interface (BRI), or E1/T1
interface cards.

Figure 8-13 NM-HDV2

NM-HDV2 See Manual before Installation.

V0

PVDM 3 PVDM 2 PVDM 1 PVDM 0 EN

95196

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 8-9
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module

Figure 8-14 NM-HDV2-1T1/E1

NM-HDV2-1T1/E1 See Manual before Installation.

V0
AL
PVDM 3 PVDM 2 LP PVDM 1 PVDM 0 EN
CD

95197
CTRLR T1/E1 0

Figure 8-15 NM-HDV2-2T1/E1

NM-HDV2-2T1/E1 See Manual before Installation.

V0
AL AL
PVDM 3 PVDM 2 LP LP PVDM 1 PVDM 0 EN
CD CD

95198
CTRLR T1/E1 1 CTRLR T1/E1 0

The NM-HDV2 network module converts voice and fax into IP packets or frames that can be transmitted
as VoIP over a variety of transport technologies (channelized T1, Frame Relay, Asynchronous Transfer
Mode [ATM], and others).

Packet Fax or Voice DSP Modules

The packet fax or voice digital signal processor (DSP) module (PVDM2) is available in five
stock-keeping units (SKUs):

Table 8-1 PVDM2 Module SKUs

Module Name Description

PVDM2-8 8-channel packet fax or voice DSP module
PVDM2-16 16-channel packet fax or voice DSP module
PVDM2-32 32-channel packet fax or voice DSP module
PVDM2-48 48-channel packet fax or voice DSP module
PVDM2-64 64-channel packet fax or voice DSP module

You can install up to four PVDM2 modules on all of the NM-HDV2 SKUs. The number of channels
supported depends on the number and density-type of PVDM2 modules installed.

Table 8-2 Channels Per PVDM2 Module Type

Max Channels for High Max Channels for Range of Channels for
Module Name Complexity1 Medium Complexity2 Flexi Complexity3
PVDM2-8 4 4 4-8
PVDM2-16 6 8 6-16

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

8-10 OL-2485-20
Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module

Table 8-2 Channels Per PVDM2 Module Type

Max Channels for High Max Channels for Range of Channels for
Module Name Complexity1 Medium Complexity2 Flexi Complexity3
PVDM2-32 12 16 12-32
PVDM2-48 18 24 18-48
PVDM2-64 24 32 24-64
1. High-complexity vocoders supported: G.711, G.726, G.729, G.723.1, G.728, and Fax Relay.
2. Medium-complexity vocoders supported: G.711, G.726, G.729a, and Fax Relay.
3. Flexi vocoders supported: G.711, G.726, G.729, G.723.1, G.728, and Fax Relay (number of channels depends on codec
selected).

Note PVDM and PVDM2 modules are not interchangeable. Use PVDM modules with the NM-HDV network
module only, and use PVDM2 modules with the NM-HDV2 network module only.

When used with PVDM2 modules and either the built-in T1/E1 ports or the T1/E1 voice or WAN
interface cards (VWIC), the NM-HDV2 network module provides the interface to the PBX, the PSTN,
or WAN. The following VWICs are supported:
• VWIC-1MFT-T1
• VWIC-2MFT-T1
• VWIC-2MFT-T1-DI
• VWIC-1MFT-E1
• VWIC-2MFT-E1
• VWIC-2MFT-E1-DI
• VWIC-1MFT-G703
• VWIC-2MFT-G703
When used with PVDM2 modules and next-generation analog or BRI voice interface cards (VIC2), the
NM-HDV2 network module provides the interface to telephony equipment (PBX, key systems,
telephones, and fax machines) and to the PSTN. The following VICs are supported:
• VIC-2DID
• VIC-1J1
• VIC-4FXS/DID (DID feature not supported)
• VIC2-2FXO
• VIC2-4FXO
• VIC2-2FXS
• VIC2-2E/M
• VIC2-2BRI-NT/TE

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 8-11
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module

Configuring E1 Ports for Normal or Wetting Current Mode

On the NM-HDV2-1T1/E1 and NM-HDV2-2T1/E1 network modules there is a jumper block for each
built-in T1/E1 port that controls whether the port supports normal or wetting current mode. Wetting
current is a small amount of electrical current (60 to 140 milliamps) sent from the central office to the
card to prevent the corrosion of electrical contacts in the module’s network connection. Depending on
how your E1 line is provisioned, you might have to change the jumper setting on the network module to
allow proper operation.
The jumper blocks are identified on the printed circuit board of the NM-HDV2-1T1/E1 and
NM-HDV2-2T1/E1 network modules as J6 and J7. (See Figure 8-16.) J6 is the jumper block for T1/E1
controller 1 and J7 is the jumper block for T1/E1 controller 0. The pins on each jumper block are
numbered 1 to 3 from right to left.
• To configure an E1 port for normal mode, set the jumper to pins 2 and 3.
• To configure an E1 port for wetting current mode, set the jumper to pins 1 and 2.
Figure 8-16 shows the jumper block configured for normal mode, with the jumper set to pins 2 and 3.

Tip If you are unsure whether your E1 line is configured for normal or wetting current mode, check with
your provider. You can also use the show controllers E1 command to look for line code violations and
path code violations. These errors can indicate that the jumper is not set correctly.

Figure 8-16 NM-HDV2-2T1/E1 Jumpers Configured for Normal Mode

J6 J7
135658

Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

8-12 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module

Installing PVDM2 Modules

The NM-HDV2 network modules contain four 80-pin SIMM sockets for PVDM2 modules, numbered 0
through 3. (See Figure 8-17.) Each socket can be filled with a single 80-pin PVDM2 module.

Figure 8-17 PVDM2 Module Slot Locations

3 2 1 0

95199

PVDM2 Module Orientation

PVDM2 modules are manufactured with a polarization notch to ensure proper orientation, and alignment
holes to ensure proper positioning. Figure 8-18 shows the polarization notch and alignment holes on a
PVDM2 module. PVDM2 modules are installed with the connector edge down, the polarization notch
near the back of the chassis.

Caution To avoid damaging ESD-sensitive components, observe all ESD precautions. To avoid damaging the
NM-HDV2 network module, avoid using excessive force when you remove or replace PVDM2 modules.

Figure 8-18 PVDM2 Module Orientation

Alignment holes
95200

Connector edge Polarization notch

Alignment notch

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 8-13
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module

Removing PVDM2 Modules

To remove PVDM2 modules, follow these steps:

Step 1 Find the PVDM2 sockets on the NM-HDV2 network module. (See Figure 8-17.)

Caution Handle PVDM2 modules by the card edges only. PVDM2 modules are ESD-sensitive components and
can be damaged by mishandling.

Step 2 Remove one PVDM2 module at a time. To make your job easier, if you have a PVDM2 module in both
socket 0 and socket 1, remove PVDM 1 before removing PVDM 0. Similarly, remove PVDM 3 before
removing PVDM 2. To lift the PVDM2 module out of its socket, pull the locking spring clips on both
sides outward and tilt the PVDM2 module toward the left side of the chassis, free of the clips. (See
Figure 8-19.)

Figure 8-19 Removing PVDM2 Modules

Top view

Front of chassis

2. Push the top of the

PVDM forward and down.

95201
PVDM
1. Pull the locking spring clips outward. polarization
notch

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

8-14 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module

Step 3 Hold the PVDM2 module by the edges with your thumb and index finger and lift it out of the socket.
Place the removed PVDM2 module in an antistatic bag to protect it from ESD damage.
Step 4 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for each PVDM2 module.

Installing PVDM2 Modules

To install PVDM2 modules, follow these steps:

Step 1 Find the PVDM2 sockets on the NM-HDV2 network module. (See Figure 8-17.)

Caution Handle PVDM2 modules by the card edges only. PVDM2 modules are ESD-sensitive components and
can be damaged by mishandling.

Step 2 Hold the PVDM2 module with the polarization notch on the right, near the back of the chassis, with the
connector edge at the bottom. (See Figure 8-18.)
Step 3 Again, to make your job easier, begin with socket 0, then socket 1, or socket 2, then socket 3. Insert the
PVDM2 module into the connector slot at an angle, tilted toward the left side of the chassis. Align the
PVDM2 module in a vertical position (see Figure 8-20), by using the minimum amount of force required.
When the PVDM2 module is properly seated, the socket guide posts fit through the alignment holes, and
the connector springs click into place.
Step 4 Ensure that each PVDM2 module is straight and that the alignment holes (as shown in Figure 8-19) line
up with the plastic guides on the socket.

Note Be sure to align the alignment notch in the bottom of the PVDM2 module with the rib in the
80-pin socket.

Figure 8-20 Installing PVDM2 Modules

View from front of board

1. Insert the PVDM2 into the socket

at an angle from vertical.
2. Push the top of the PVDM2
down and back.
3. The socket guide posts fit through
the holes in the PVDM2.
4. The locking springs clip the back
of the PVDM2.
103280

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 8-15
 Chapter 8 Connecting Voice Network Modules
IP Communications High-Density Digital Voice or Fax Network Module

Caution It is normal to feel some resistance, but do not use excessive force on the PVDM2 module, and do not
touch the surface components.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for each PVDM2 module.

NM-HDV2 Network Module LEDs

IP communications high-density digital voice or fax (NM-HDV2) network modules have an enable (EN)
LED, and four LEDs for the PVDM2 modules, numbered 0 through 3. The enable LED indicates that the
module has passed its self-tests and is available to the router. The PVDM 0 through PVDM 3 LEDs
indicate the current operating condition of the PVDM2 modules installed on the card. (See Figure 8-21.)
If the PVDM LEDs are not green after initial installation and configuration, check that the PVDM2
modules are properly seated in their slots.

Figure 8-21 NM-HDV2 Network Module LEDs

NM-HDV2 See Manual before Installation.

V0

PVDM 3 PVDM 2 PVDM 1 PVDM 0 EN

103881
PVDM 2 PVDM 1 ENABLE
PVDM 3 LED LED LED
LED PVDM 0
LED
The NM-HDV2-1T1/E1 and NM-HDV2-2T1/E1 network modules have LEDs monitoring the alarm
(AL), loopback (LP), and carrier detection (CD) conditions of the built-in T1/E1 ports. (See
Figure 8-22.)

Figure 8-22 NM-HDV2-2T1/E1 LEDs

NM-HDV2-2T1/E1 See Manual before Installation.

V0
AL AL
PVDM 3 PVDM 2 LP LP PVDM 1 PVDM 0 EN
CD CD
95203

CTRLR T1/E1 1 CTRLR T1/E1 0

PVDM 2 PVDM 1 ENABLE

LED LED LED
Alarm, Alarm,
PVDM 0
PVDM 3 loopback, and loopback, and
LED
LED carrier detect carrier detect
LEDs LEDs

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

8-16 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 9
Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect 6-, 12-, 18-, 24-, and 30-port digital modem network modules
(NM-6DM, NM-12DM, NM-18DM, NM-24DM, and NM-30DM) for Cisco modular routers and
contains the following sections:
• Digital Network Modem Network Modules Overview, page 9-1
• Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module, page 9-3
• Digital Modem Module LEDs, page 9-11

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Digital Network Modem Network Modules Overview

These modules (see Figure 9-1) contain 6, 12, 18, 24, or 30 V.34+ digital modems for a direct digital
connection to an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Primary Rate Interface (PRI) or Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) channel, allowing you to mix digital and analog calls to provide remote access to a LAN.

Figure 9-1 Digital Modem Network Module

DIGITAL MODEMS

MICA MICA MICA MICA MICA

BANK 0 BANK 1 BANK 2 BANK 3 BANK 4 EN
H10823

Digital modem network modules do not provide network interfaces of their own, but instead handle
analog calls passing through other router interfaces. In addition to the digital modem module, the router
must contain a PRI or BRI interface to connect to the ISDN channel, and another interface, such as
Ethernet, to provide connectivity to the LAN. The PRI or BRI module concurrently handles digital ISDN
data connections and remote voice-channel (analog) modem connections, allowing a dynamic mix of
digital and modem connections. The digital modem module acts as a pool of available modems that can
be used for both incoming and outgoing calls.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 9-1
 Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Digital Network Modem Network Modules Overview

The digital modems support all standard data rates from 300 bps through 33.6 kbps (V.34 bis); V.42 bis
and MNP 5 data compression; and V.42, LAPM, and MNP 4 error correction.
Each digital modem module contains from one to five banks of 6-port modem ISDN channel aggregation
(MICA) modules. You can add modems to a module, in groups of six, by installing additional MICA
modules (Cisco product number MICA-6MOD), up to a maximum of 30 modems.

Hardware and Software Requirements

In addition to the digital modem module, the router must contain a PRI or BRI network interface to
connect to the ISDN channel, and another interface, such as Ethernet or Fast Ethernet, to provide
connectivity to the LAN.
A PRI network module (NM-1CT1, NM-2CT1, NM-1CT1-CSU, NM-2CT1-CSU, NM-1CE1B,
NM-2CE1B, NM-1CE1U, or NM-2CE1U) used with a digital modem module must be revision level -03
or higher. A BRI S/T network module (NM-4B-S/T or NM-8B-S/T) must be revision level -03 or higher,
and a BRI U module (NM-4B-U or NM-8B-U) must be revision level -06 or higher. Earlier revisions of
these network modules cannot send modem calls to the digital modem module.
If the PRI or BRI module is the wrong revision, you see a message similar to this one when the router
boots:
The T1 or E1 network module in slot 0 is incompatible with the digital modems installed in
the router.

To determine the revision level, you can examine the network module itself (outside the router), or use
the Cisco IOS show diag command. The label on the module board should show a part number beginning
with 800- and ending with the revision level. The output of the show diag command looks similar to the
following:
Slot 3:
Port adapter is analyzed
Port adapter insertion time unknown
Hardware revision 1.0 Board revision A0
Serial number 4152626 Part number 800-01228-01
Test history 0x0 RMA number 00-00-00
EEPROM format version 1
EEPROM contents (hex):
0x20: 01 26 01 00 00 3F 5D 32 50 04 CC 01 00 00 00 00
0x30: 50 00 00 00 96 11 04 17 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

To order network module upgrades, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on page xi.

Interface Numbering
Individual digital modem ports are not physically distinct, but Cisco IOS software identifies each
modem uniquely through its slot number and port number. Slot numbering is explained in the “Network
Module Slot Locations and Numbering on Cisco Access Routers” section on page 1-3.
Each digital modem module can hold up to five banks of MICA modules, numbered 0 to 4 from left to
right (as viewed from the rear of the router). Each MICA module holds six modems, which are assigned
modem numbers 0 to 5.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

9-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module

Each modem in a digital modem module is also assigned a port number in the range 0 to 29. Modems in
the left MICA module (as viewed from the rear of the router), bank 0, are assigned port numbers 0 to 5.
Additional MICA modules, if present, are assigned port numbers as follows:
port-number = (6 x bank-number) + modem-number
For example, the third modem (modem 2) in the second MICA module from the left (bank 1) is assigned
port number (6 x 1) + 2 = 8.
Some Cisco IOS commands identify ports by interface number (or line number or TTY number, which
is the same as the interface number) rather than slot and port number. The interface number of a modem
port is related to its slot and port number in the following way:
interface-number = (32 x slot-number) + port-number + 1
This can also be expressed as:
interface-number = (32 x slot-number) + ((6 x bank-number) + modem-number) + 1
For example, if the module containing the modem in the last example is placed in slot 2, the modem is
assigned interface number (32 x 2) + ((6 x 1) + 2) + 1 = (32 x 2) + 8 + 1 = 73. This is also the line and
TTY number for the port. The modem in this position is always assigned interface 73, whether or not
there are other MICA modules in the digital modem network module or other digital modem network
modules in the router chassis. If you move the MICA module to a different position in the digital modem
network module, however, or move the digital modem network module to a different slot in the router
chassis, the interface number changes.
Table 9-1 shows the range of interface numbers available in each router slot. Interface 0 is automatically
assigned to the console.

Table 9-1 Digital Modem Network Module Interface Numbering

Slot Number Interface Numbers

0 1–30
1 33–62
2 65–94
3 97–126
4 129–158
5 161–190
6 193–222

Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem

Network Module
You can add modems to a digital modem network module, in groups of six, by installing additional 6-port
MICA modules, up to a maximum of five MICA modules (30 modems).
MICA modules are manufactured with a polarization notch to ensure proper orientation, and alignment
holes that fit over guide posts to ensure proper positioning. (See Figure 9-2.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 9-3
 Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module

Figure 9-2 6-Port MICA Module

Connector edge

H10826
Alignment holes
Polarization notch Polarization notch

Caution To avoid damaging electrostatic discharge (ESD)-sensitive components, observe all ESD precautions
when handling MICA modules. To avoid damaging the network module or the MICA module, avoid
excessive force when you remove or replace MICA modules.

To remove, replace, or install a MICA module, you must first remove the digital modem module from
the router chassis.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

9-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module

Removing the Digital Modem Network Module

Caution Digital modem network modules do not currently support online insertion and removal (hot swap) of
network modules. To avoid damaging the module, you must turn off electrical power and disconnect
network cables before you remove it from the chassis slot.

To remove a digital modem network module, follow these steps:

Step 1 Turn off electrical power to the router. However, to channel ESD voltages to ground, do not unplug the
power cable. Remove all network interface cables, including telephone cables, from the rear panel.
The following warning applies to routers that use a DC power supply:

Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC
circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services
the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the
circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 7

Step 2 Loosen the modules captive mounting screws, using a Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver.
Step 3 Hold the captive screws between two fingers, and pull the network module toward you until it slides free
of the chassis. (See Figure 9-3.)
Step 4 Set the network module on an ESD-preventive mat.

Figure 9-3 Removing a Digital Modem Network Module from a Router

cT1
PRI

2
LOOPBACK

CARRIER
REMOTE

DETECT
ALARM

ALARM
LOCAL

DIGITAL MODEMS
EN
3 CTRLR 0

ETHERNET MICA MICA MICA MICA MICA

4E 2E BANK 0 BANK 1 BANK 2
2W W1
BANK 3 BANK 4 EN
ACT

ACT

ETH 3 ETH 2 ETH 1 SERIAL

ETH 0
3 2 1 0

H11202
LINK STP
LNK
ACT

ACT

LNK

EN AUI
ACT
1 ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 0
EN

INPUT 100-240VAC 50/60HZ 3.0-1.5 AMPS

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 9-5
 Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module

Removing 6-Port MICA Modules

To remove a MICA module from the digital modem network module, follow these steps:

Step 1 Orient the digital modem network module so that the faceplate is on the right.

Caution Handle MICA modules by the card edges only. MICA modules are ESD-sensitive components and
can be damaged by mishandling.

Step 2 Remove one MICA module at a time, beginning with the one farthest from you.
Step 3 To lift the MICA module out of its socket, pull the spring clips on both sides outward (see Figure 9-4)
and tilt the MICA module away from you until it is free of the clips (see Figure 9-5).
Step 4 Hold the MICA module by the edges with your thumb and index finger and lift it out of the socket (see
Figure 9-6). Place the removed MICA module in an antistatic bag to protect it from ESD damage.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for any remaining MICA modules that you want to remove.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

9-6 OL-2485-20
Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module

Figure 9-4 Releasing the Mounting Clips

H10844

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 9-7
 Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module

Figure 9-5 Tilting a 6-Port MICA Module Free of the Mounting Clips

H10869
Figure 9-6 Lifting a 6-Port MICA Module Out of the Socket
H10870

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

9-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module

Installing 6-Port MICA Modules

To install new or replacement MICA modules, follow these steps:

Step 1 Orient the digital modem network module so that the faceplate is on the right.

Caution Handle MICA modules by the card edges only. MICA modules are ESD-sensitive components and
can be damaged by mishandling.

Step 2 Hold the MICA module with the connector edge at the bottom and the polarization notch at the right.
Step 3 Tilting the MICA module toward you at about a 45-degree angle, insert it into a socket, beginning with
the empty socket closest to you. (See Figure 9-7.) Rock it downward, using the minimum amount of
force required. (See Figure 9-8.) When the MICA module is properly seated, the socket guide posts fit
through the alignment holes, and the spring clips click into place.
Step 4 Ensure that the MICA module is straight and that the alignment holes line up with the plastic guides on
the socket. It is normal to feel some resistance, but do not use excessive force on the MICA module, and
do not touch the surface components.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for any additional MICA modules.

Figure 9-7 Inserting a 6-Port MICA Module into a Socket

H10872

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 9-9
 Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Adding 6-Port MICA Modules to a Digital Modem Network Module

Figure 9-8 Rocking a 6-Port MICA Module Downward

H10873

Reinstalling the Digital Modem Network Module

When you finish installing MICA modules, replace the digital modem network module in the router
chassis, following these steps:

Step 1 Align the network module with the guides in the chassis and slide it gently into the slot.
Step 2 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
motherboard.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

9-10 OL-2485-20
Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Digital Modem Module LEDs

Step 3 Fasten the module captive mounting screws into the holes in the chassis, using the Phillips or flat-blade
screwdriver.
Step 4 If the router was previously running, reinstall the network interface cables and turn on power to the
router.
The following warning applies to routers that use a DC power supply:

Warning After wiring the DC power supply, remove the tape from the circuit breaker switch handle and
reinstate power by moving the handle of the circuit breaker to the ON position. Statement 8

Digital Modem Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. (See Figure 9-9.) This LED indicates that the module
has passed its self-tests and is available to the router.
Digital modem modules have five additional LEDs, one for each MICA module bank. The LEDs blink
during initialization. After the enable LED comes on, the MICA module LEDs indicate that the
corresponding MICA module is functioning. If a MICA module fails its diagnostics, or if no MICA
module is installed in a position, its LED remains off.

Figure 9-9 Digital Modem Network Module LEDs

DIGITAL MODEMS

MICA MICA MICA MICA MICA

BANK 0 BANK 1 BANK 2 BANK 3 BANK 4 EN

LEDs H10824

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 9-11
 Chapter 9 Connecting Digital Modem Network Modules
Digital Modem Module LEDs

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

9-12 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 10
Connecting Analog Modem Network Modules

This chapter describes 8- and 16-port analog modem network modules for Cisco modular routers. It
contains the following sections:
• 8- and 16-Port Analog Modem Network Modules, page 10-1
• 8- and 16-Port Analog Modem Network Modules, Version 2, page 10-2
• Interface Numbering, page 10-4
• Connecting the Modules to the Telephone Network, page 10-5
• Analog Modem Network Module LEDs, page 10-5

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

8- and 16-Port Analog Modem Network Modules

The following analog modem network modules originate or terminate analog telephone transmissions
through RJ-11 modular jacks:
• 8-port analog modem network module (NM-8AM) (see Figure 10-1)
• 16-port analog modem network module (NM-16AM) (see Figure 10-2)

Figure 10-1 8-Port Analog Modem Network Module

MODEMS
8AM

IN USE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EN
H11603

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 10-1
 Chapter 10 Connecting Analog Modem Network Modules
8- and 16-Port Analog Modem Network Modules, Version 2

Figure 10-2 16-Port Analog Modem Network Module

MODEMS
16AM 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 IN USE

IN USE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EN

H11602
The following warning applies in Australia:

Warning This equipment will be inoperable when main power fails.

The following warning applies in New Zealand:

Warning This equipment does not fully meet Telecom’s impedance requirements. Performance limitations
may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no
responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.

Network Protocols Supported

The analog modems described in this chapter support the following protocols:
• All standard data rates from 300 bps to 33.6 kbps (V.34bis)
• V.42bis and Microcom Network Protocol (MNP) 5 data compression
• V.42, Link Access Procedure for Modems (LAPM), and MNP 2 to 4 error correction
• MNP 10 for high performance under all line conditions
• MNP 10EC for high performance in analog cellular environments

8- and 16-Port Analog Modem Network Modules, Version 2

The following analog modem network modules originate or terminate analog telephone transmissions
through RJ-11 modular jacks:
• 8-port analog modem network module (NM-8AM-V2) (see Figure 10-3)
• 16-port analog modem network module (NM-16AM-V2) (see Figure 10-4)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 16-port analog modem network module (NM-16AM-V2) only to intra-building or
non-exposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be
grounded at both ends.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

10-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 10 Connecting Analog Modem Network Modules
8- and 16-Port Analog Modem Network Modules, Version 2

Figure 10-3 8-Port Analog Modem Network Module (NM-8AM-V2)

NM-8AM-V2
MODEMS

IN USE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EN

95206
Figure 10-4 16-Port Analog Modem Network Module (NM-16AM-V2)

NM-16AM-V2
MODEMS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 IN USE

IN USE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EN

95205
The following warning applies in Australia:

Warning This equipment will be inoperable when main power fails.

The following warning applies in New Zealand:

Warning This equipment does not fully meet Telecom’s impedance requirements. Performance limitations
may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no
responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.

Network Protocols Supported

The analog modems described in this chapter support these protocols:
• Standardized modem protocols
– ITU-T V.90
– V.92 Quick Connect
– ITU-T V.34bis
– ITU-T V.34
– ITU-T V.34+ up to 33,600 bps
– ITU-T V.32bis
– ITU-T V.32
– ITU-T V.32 turbo up to 19,200 bps
– ITU-T V.22bis (with V.54 loopback)
– ITU-T V.22 A/B

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 10-3
 Chapter 10 Connecting Analog Modem Network Modules
Interface Numbering

– ITU-T V.23 at 75 and 1200 bps

– ITU-T V.21 at 300 bps
– BELL 103 and 212a
• Standardized fax protocols
– ITU-T V.17
– ITU-T V.29
– ITU-T V.27ter
– ITU-T V.21 channel 2
– EIA 578 Class 2
– Group 3 fax class 1 and class 2
• Standardized modem error correction and compression
– MNP 2 – 4
– ITU-T V.42 Link Access Procedure for Modems (LAPM)
– Microcom Network Protocol (MNP) 5
– V.42bis (with 4-K dictionaries)
– ITU-T V.44

Interface Numbering
Cisco IOS software identifies each modem uniquely by its slot number and port number.
Some Cisco IOS configuration commands identify asynchronous ports by an interface number (or a line
number, which is the same as the interface number). The interface number of a port on an 8- or 16-port
analog modem network module is related to the slot number where the module is installed and the
number of the port in the module.
Ports in the 8- and 16-port analog modem network modules are numbered in the same pattern as slot
numbers, beginning at 0 at the lower right and continuing from right to left and (in the 16-port module)
from bottom to top.
The interface number of a port is determined in the following way:
interface-number = (32 x slot-number) + port-number + 1
For example, modem port 12 in slot 1 corresponds to interface number (32 x 1) + 12 + 1 = 45. This is
also the line number for the port. Port 12 in slot 1 is always assigned interface number 45, regardless of
whether the module in slot 0 is an 8-port analog modem network module, a 16-port analog modem
module, or some other kind of module entirely, or even whether there is a network module in slot 0 at
all. If you move the module from slot 1 to a different slot, however, its interface numbers change.
Table 10-1 shows the range of interface numbers available for each type of analog modem network
module in each router slot. (Interface 0 is automatically assigned to the console.)

Table 10-1 16- and 32-Port Analog Module Interface Numbering

Slot Number Interface Numbers (8-Port Module) Interface Numbers (16-Port Module)
0 1–8 1–16
1 33–40 33–48

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

10-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 10 Connecting Analog Modem Network Modules
Connecting the Modules to the Telephone Network

Table 10-1 16- and 32-Port Analog Module Interface Numbering

Slot Number Interface Numbers (8-Port Module) Interface Numbers (16-Port Module)
2 65–72 65–80
3 97–104 97–112
4 129–136 129–144
5 161–168 161–176
6 193–200 193–208

Connecting the Modules to the Telephone Network

Each analog modem network module provides 8 or 16 RJ-11 jacks for standard modular cables. These
ports are color-coded pink. Cables are not provided with the network module.
To establish an analog connection, use a straight-through RJ-11 modular cable to connect the jack to a
wall telephone outlet. (See Figure 10-5.)

Figure 10-5 Connecting an Analog Modem Network Module

Analog modem port (RJ-11)

NM-16AM-V2
MODEMS 15
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 IN USE

IN USE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EN

Straight-through
RJ-11 cable
95209

RJ-11 jack

Analog Modem Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available.
Each modem in the module has an in use (IN USE) LED that lights when the modem is off-hook. (See
Figure 10-6 and Figure 10-7.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 10-5
 Chapter 10 Connecting Analog Modem Network Modules
Analog Modem Network Module LEDs

Figure 10-6 8-Port Analog Modem Network Module LEDs

In use LEDs Enable LED

NM-8AM-V2
MODEMS

IN USE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EN

95207
Figure 10-7 16-Port Analog Modem Network Module LEDs

In use LEDs Enable LED

NM-16AM-V2
MODEMS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 IN USE

IN USE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EN

95208
In use LEDs

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

10-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 11
Connecting ATM Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) network modules for Cisco
modular routers and contains the following sections:
• ATM-25 Network Module, page 11-1
• ATM T3 and E3 Network Modules, page 11-3
• ATM OC-3 Network Modules, page 11-5

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

ATM-25 Network Module

The ATM-25 network module (see Figure 11-1) provides ATM traffic shaping for use with asymmetric
digital subscriber line (ADSL) uplink speeds, and protocol support for permanent virtual circuit (PVC)
environments. The network module provides full support for multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM
Adaptive Layer 5 (RFC 1483), classic IP over ATM encapsulation (RFC 1577), and Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) over ATM.

Figure 11-1 ATM-25 Network Module

ATM 25Mbps
ATM-25

ATM 0

TX
RX
11705

EN

ATM traffic
LEDs Enable LED
RJ-45 port

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-1
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM-25 Network Module

Connecting ATM-25 Ports to the Network

The ATM-25 port is a standard RJ-45 jack, color-coded light green. Use a straight-through modular
RJ-45 UTP Category 3, 4, or 5 cable or STP Category 1, 1A, 9, or 9A cable to connect the port to an
external ADSL modem. See Figure 11-2.

Figure 11-2 Connecting the ATM-25 Module to an ADSL Modem

ATM-25 port
(RJ-45)

ATM
25MbPS

ATM 0

TX
RX EN

Straight-through
RJ-45-to-RJ-45 cable

11707
ADSL modem

ATM-25 Network Module LEDs

Figure 11-3 shows ATM-25 network module LEDs.

Figure 11-3 ATM-25 Network Module LEDs

ATM 25Mbps
ATM-25

ATM 0

TX
RX
11708

EN

ATM traffic
LEDs Enable LED

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. The enable LED indicates that the module has passed
its self-tests and is available to the router. The ATM-25 network module has the additional LEDs shown
in Table 11-1.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM T3 and E3 Network Modules

Table 11-1 ATM-25 Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
RX Module is receiving ATM traffic
TX Module is transmitting ATM traffic

ATM T3 and E3 Network Modules

ATM T3 and E3 network modules provide T3 and E3 ATM connectivity for high-bandwidth data
applications. There are three versions of these network modules: the ATM T3 Network Module, the ATM
E3 Network Module, and the ATM T3/E3 Network Module. See Figure 11-4, Figure 11-5 and
Figure 11-6. These network modules offer full support for multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM
Adaptive Layer 5 (RFC 1483), classic IP over ATM encapsulation (RFC 1577), Point-to-Point Protocol
(PPP) over ATM, and LAN Emulation (LANE). Up to 1024 virtual circuits (VCs) are supported on the
ATM T3/E3 network modules.

Figure 11-4 ATM Network Module with T3 Interface

ATM
1A-T3
SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING NETWORK MODULE
ATM 0
TX RX

FERF OOF AIS RCLK EN

30546
Figure 11-5 ATM Network Module with E3 Interface

ATM
1A-E3
SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING NETWORK MODULE
ATM 0
TX RX

FERF OOF AIS RCLK EN

30543

Figure 11-6 ATM Network Module with one T3/E3 Interface

ATM
NM-1A-T3/E3
ATM 0
TX RX SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING NETWORK MODULE

LP TXCL RXCL RXCR RXALM EN

155792

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-3
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM T3 and E3 Network Modules

Note The ATM T3 network module has a sensitive receiver. If you use a short T3 cable, it is possible to
saturate the receiver, leading to bit errors. If this occurs, we recommend one of the following:
• Reduce the transmit level of the device attached to the T3 network module. Many devices have a line
build-out (LBO) configuration setting for this purpose.
• Insert a 4-dB attenuator on the receive side of the T3 network module.

Connecting ATM T3 and E3 Ports to the Network

Use a coaxial cable to connect the module BNC port to a T3 or E3 network.

ATM T3 Network Module and ATM E3 Network Module LEDs

The ATM T3 network module and the ATM E3 network module have the LEDs shown in Table 11-2.

Table 11-2 ATM T3 Network Module and ATM E3 Network module LEDs

LED Color Meaning

EN Green Module has passed its self-tests and is available to the router.
RCLK Green Receive clock has been detected.
FERF Yellow Far-end receive failure.
OOF Yellow Out of frame.
AIS Yellow Alarm indication signal.

ATM T3/E3 Network Module LEDs

Table 11-3 shows the LEDs for the combined ATM T3/E3 network module.

Table 11-3 ATM T3/E3 Network Module LEDs

LED Color Meaning

TXCL Green Cell transmitted.
RXCL Green Cell received.
RXALM Yellow Alarm indication signal.
RXCR Green Carrier present.
Loopback LED Green Loopback

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

ATM OC-3 Network Modules

ATM OC-3 network modules provide full 155-Mbps ATM connectivity, including STS-3c and STM-1
framing, for high-bandwidth data applications and voice-data integration applications. Characteristics
and installation of these modules are described in the following sections.
• OC-3 Network Modules for Cisco 3600 and Cisco 3700 Series Routers, page 11-5
• ATM-OC3-POM Network Module for Cisco 3800 Series Routers, page 11-10
• Laser Safety Guidelines, page 11-13
• Fiber-Optic Transmission Specifications, page 11-14

OC-3 Network Modules for Cisco 3600 and Cisco 3700 Series Routers
This section describes the following OC-3 (Optical Carrier level 3) network modules for most
Cisco 3600 and Cisco 3700 series routers.

Note ATM OC-3 network modules are not supported by the Cisco 3631 router.

The following modules are supported on the Cisco 3600 series routers and the Cisco 3725 router:
• NM-1A-OC3MM provides a multimode (MM) fiber uplink port. See Figure 11-7.
• NM-1A-OC3SMI provides a single-mode intermediate-reach (SMI) fiber uplink port. See
Figure 11-8.
• NM-1A-OC3SML provides a single-mode long-reach (SML) fiber uplink port. See Figure 11-9.
The following modules are supported on the Cisco 3745 router:
• NM-1A-OC3MM-EP provides an MM fiber uplink port with enhanced performance. See
Figure 11-7 for a similar faceplate.
• NM-1A-OC3SMI-EP provides an SMI fiber uplink port with enhanced performance. See
Figure 11-8 for a similar faceplate.
• NM-1A-OC3SML-EP provides an SML fiber uplink port with enhanced performance. See
Figure 11-9 for a similar faceplate.
The following modules are supported on the Cisco 3600 series routers:
• NM-1A-OC3MM-1V provides an MM fiber uplink port and circuit emulation service. See
Figure 11-10.
• NM-1A-OC3SMI-1V provides an SMI fiber uplink port and circuit emulation service. See
Figure 11-11.
• NM-1A-OC3SML-1V provides an SML fiber uplink port and circuit emulation service. See
Figure 11-12.
Circuit emulation service allows the network module to carry voice traffic, such as telephone calls and
faxes, over an ATM network simultaneously with data traffic.
If you are using the ATM OC-3/STM-1 circuit emulation service network module, you need both the
network module and a 1- or 2-port T1 or E1 multiflex trunk interface card (VWIC-1MFT-T1,
VWIC-1MFT-E1, VWIC-2MFT-T1, VWIC-2MFT-E1, VWIC-2MFT-T1-DI, or VWIC-2MFT-E1-DI)
for a voice connection. You can install one multiflex trunk interface card (providing up to two voice

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-5
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

ports) in the ATM OC-3/STM-1 circuit emulation service network module. If a multiflex trunk interface
card is not installed, the ATM OC-3/STM-1 circuit emulation service network module continues to
perform data-routing functions.
To install a multiflex trunk interface card in a network module, see the Cisco Interface Cards Hardware
Installation Guide. To obtain this publication, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.

Note 1- or 2-port T1 or E1 multiflex trunk interface cards that support G.703 (VWIC-1MFT-G703,
VWIC-2MFT-G703) are not supported in ATM OC-3/STM-1 circuit emulation service network
modules.

Figure 11-7 ATM OC-3 Multimode Fiber Network Module

ATM CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERPRODUCT DER KLASSE 1
PRODUCT LASER DE CLASSE1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1A-OC3MM

ATM 0

RCLK FERF OOF AIS EN

14860
Figure 11-8 ATM OC-3 Single-Mode Intermediate-Reach Fiber Network Module

ATM CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERPRODUCT DER KLASSE 1
PRODUCT LASER DE CLASSE1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1A-OC3SMI

ATM 0

RCLK FERF OOF AIS EN

14858

Figure 11-9 ATM OC-3 Single-Mode Long-Reach Fiber Network Module

ATM CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERPRODUCT DER KLASSE 1
PRODUCT LASER DE CLASSE1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1A-OC3SML

ATM 0

RCLK FERF OOF AIS EN

14859

Figure 11-10 ATM OC-3/STM-1 Circuit Emulation Service Multimode Fiber Network Module
ATM
1A-OC3
MM-1V

CES
ATM 0
TX RX
FERF OOF AIS RCLK EN
VO
18705

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Figure 11-11 ATM OC-3/STM-1 Circuit Emulation Service Single-Mode Intermediate-Reach Fiber
Network Module

ATM
1A-OC3
SMI-1V
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1 1
CES
ATM 0
TX RX
FERF OOF AIS RCLK EN
VO

18704
Figure 11-12 ATM OC-3/STM-1 Circuit Emulation Service Single-Mode Long-Reach Fiber
Network Module
ATM
1A-OC3
SML-1V
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1 1
CES
ATM 0
TX RX

FERF OOF AIS RCLK EN

V0

18703
ATM OC-3 Network Module LEDs
Figure 11-13 and Figure 11-14 show ATM OC-3 network module LEDs. Table 11-4 describes their
functions.

Figure 11-13 ATM OC-3 Network Module LEDs

ATM CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERPRODUCT DER KLASSE 1
PRODUCT LASER DE CLASSE1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1A-OC3MM

ATM 0

RCLK FERF OOF AIS EN

14861

RCLK LED
OC-3 Enable LED
FERF LED
OOF LED
AIS LED

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-7
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Figure 11-14 ATM OC-3/STM-1 Circuit Emulation Service Network Module LEDs
ATM
1A-OC3
MM-1V

CES
ATM 0
TX RX
FERF OOF AIS RCLK EN
VO

26912
CES LED
FERF LED
OOF LED RCLK LED
AIS LED Enable LED

Table 11-4 ATM OC-3 Network Module LEDs

LED Color Meaning

EN Green Module has passed its self-tests and is available to the
router.
RCLK Green Receive clock has been detected.
FERF Yellow Far-end receive failure.
OOF Yellow Out of frame.
AIS Yellow Alarm indication signal.
CES Green An active CES connection is established (ATM
OC-3/STM-1 circuit emulation service network
module only).

Hardware Compatibility with Cisco 3620 Routers

Cisco 3620 routers require a minimum PCMCIA controller revision level to recognize ATM OC-3
network modules; otherwise, an error message appears. Cisco 3620 routers installed in the field before
April 1999 contain a Revision C PCMCIA controller, which is not compatible with these modules.
Starting in April 1999, all Cisco 3620 routers shipped from the factory include Revision E PCMCIA
controllers, which are fully compatible with all three ATM OC-3 network modules.
You can identify the version of PCMCIA controller in your Cisco 3620 router by entering the show pci
hardware command in privileged EXEC mode, or by examining the part number on the motherboard.
Supported versions are shown in Table 11-5.

Table 11-5 Cisco 3620 Router Versions for ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Does Not Support ATM OC-3 Supports ATM OC-3

PCMCIA controller 0x22, 0xE2 0x20, 0xE0
Motherboard 73-1850-10 and older 73-1850-11 or newer

The output of the show pci hardware command looks similar to this:
Router# show pci hardware

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

CLPD6729 registers:
(0x00) Chip Revision = 0x82
(0x1E) Misc Control 2 = 0x08
(0x1F) Chip Information = 0xE2

If you have incompatible hardware, contact the Cisco Systems Technical Assistance Center (TAC) at 800
553-24HR or 408 526-7209, or send e-mail to [email protected] to request a free replacement Cisco 3620
router.

CES Cross-Connection on the Cisco 3660 Router

The Cisco 3660 router can deliver traditional PCM-encoded 64-kbps circuit-based voice over the ATM
OC-3 CES network module. To use this functionality, the multiservice interchange card (MIX) must be
installed on the Cisco 3660 router. T1/E voice channels on NM-xFE2W and NM-HDV network modules
can be transported across the MIX module to ATM OC-3 network modules (NM-1A-OC3XX-1V) over
an ATM network. PVC-based (permanent virtual circuit) CES allows service providers to quickly deliver
local or long distance voice, while SVC (switched virtual circuit) capabilities ensure that these services
are optimized for maximum profitability.
To install the MIX card, see the Installing the Multiservice Interchange Card in Cisco 3660 Routers
document. To configure CES, see the OC-3/STM-1 ATM Circuit Emulation Service Network Module
document.

Connecting ATM OC-3 Ports to the Network

To connect an ATM OC-3 network module to the network, insert a fiber-optic cable with one duplex SC
connector (see Figure 11-15) or two simplex SC connectors (see Figure 11-16) into the ATM interface.

Note Some network modules are shipped with a dust plug to protect this interface. Pull to remove it.

Figure 11-15 Duplex SC Connector

H2214

Figure 11-16 Simplex SC Connector

H2399

Note Cisco Systems does not sell these fiber-optic cables, but they are available from many cable vendors.
Cables should perform to the specifications listed in Table 11-6.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-9
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Table 11-6 Fiber-Optic Cable Specifications

Standard Maximum Path Length Cabling

ISO/IEC 9314-3 1.24 miles (2 km) all cables 62.5-micron core with an
in a connection, end to end optical loss of 0 to 9 dB, or
50-micron core with an
optical loss of 7 dB
IEC 793-2 27.9 miles (45 km) for SML 9-micron core
and 9.3 miles (15 km) for
SMI
ANSI/TIA/EIA-492 27.9 miles (45 km) for SML 9-micron core
CAAA and 9.3 miles (15 km) for
SMI

Note A single fiber link should not mix 62.5- and 50-micron cable.

ATM-OC3-POM Network Module for Cisco 3800 Series Routers

The NM-1A-OC3-POM network module provides a high-performance fiber uplink port for Cisco 3800
series integrated services routers. See Figure 11-17. Supported platforms are:
• Cisco 3825 integrated services router
• Cisco 3845 integrated services router

Figure 11-17 ATM OC3-POM Network Module

ATM CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERPRODUCT DER KLASSE 1
PRODUCT LASER DE CLASSE1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
NM-1A-OC3-POM

ATM 0

RXCR RXCL TXCL RXALM EN

127722

The ATM interface is the small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical port labeled ATM 0. See
Figure 11-17. The optical interface is provided by an SFP module that is inserted into the SFP port.
Fiber-optic cables to the network are attached to the SFP module.
The network module has three modes of operation. The mode of operation is determined by the SFP
module that is used.

Caution Only SFP modules provided by Cisco should be used in the network module. SFP modules that are not
provided by Cisco have not been evaluated for reliability or user safety.

The modes of operation and usable SFP modules are:

• Multimode (MM)
– POM-OC3-MM

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-10 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

– SFP-OC3-MM
• Single-mode intermediate reach (SMI)
– POM-OC3-SMIR
– SFP-OC3-IR1
• Single-mode long reach (SML)
– POM-OC3-SMLR
– SFP-OC3-LR1

ATM-OC3-POM Network Module LEDs

Table 11-7 describes the functions of the LEDs on the ATM-OC3-POM network module shown in
Figure 11-17.

Table 11-7 ATM-OC3-POM Network Module LEDs

LED Color Meaning

RXCR Green Lit when carrier signal into the network module is present.
RXCL Green Blinks to indicate packet reception.
TXCL Green Blinks to indicate packet transmission.
RXALM Yellow Alarm indication signal.
EN Green Module has passed its self-tests and is available to the router.

Connecting ATM-OC3-POM Ports to the Network

The following sections describe how to remove and install SFP modules, and how to connect the ports
on a module to the network.

Handling an SFP Module

Before handling an SFP module, observe the following guidelines:

• SFP modules are static-sensitive. To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage, follow your
normal board- and component-handling procedures.
• SFP modules are dust-sensitive. When storing an SFP module or when a fiber-optics cable is not
plugged into the connector, always keep plugs in SFP module optical bores.

Note The most common source of contaminants in the optical bores is debris picked up on the ferrules of the
optical connectors. Use alcohol swabs or lint-free absorbent wipes to clean the ferrules of the optical
connector.

Removing an SFP Module

The following procedure describes removing an SFP module from the network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-11
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Warning Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and regulations.
Statement 1040

Caution You can remove and install SFP modules with power on to the system; however, we strongly recommend
that you do not remove or install an SFP module with optical fiber cables attached.

To remove an SFP module, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Attach an ESD wrist strap to your wrist and to the ESD connection socket on the chassis or to a bare
metal surface on the chassis or frame.
Step 2 Disconnect the network fiber cable from the SFP module connector.
Step 3 Remove the SFP module from the slot.
a. Using your thumb and forefinger, grip the colored latching band on the front of the SFP module.
b. Gently push the latching band back toward the SFP port. You may hear a click or feel the SFP
module disengage from the holding latch.

Note Not all SFP modules have the same kind of latching mechanism.

c. While still holding the latching band, pull the SFP module forward and out of the slot.
Step 4 Set the SFP module aside on an antistatic surface.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-12 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Installing an SFP Module

Use the following procedure to install an SFP module:

Step 1 Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap to your wrist and between yourself and an unpainted chassis
surface.
Step 2 Verify that you have the correct SFP module for your installation.
• Check the part number and distance information on the SFP module label.
• Alternatively, if the distance information is not on the label, use the show contr pos x/y command
to display the information after the SFP module is installed.
Step 3 Align the SFP module with the slot so that the label is facing away from the handle.
Step 4 Holding the module at the latching band (with your thumb and forefinger), insert the SFP module into
the slot on the SFP port. See Figure 11-18.

Figure 11-18 Installing an SFP Module

ATM
NM-
1A-O
C3-P
OM

CLA
S
LAS S 1 LA
ERP S
ROD ER PRO
UCT D
DER UCT
KLA
SSE
1 PRO
D
PRO UCT L
DUC ASER
TO L D
ASE E CLA
RC S
LAS SE1
E1

RXC
RR ATM
XCL 0
TXC
L R
XAL
M

EN
135226

Step 5 Push the module back into the slot until the latch engages. When fully inserted, only the band around the
front of the SFP module should be visible.
Step 6 Remove the plug from the SFP module optical bores and save the plug for future use.
Step 7 Attach the network interface fiber-optic cable, as described in the “Connecting ATM OC-3 Ports to the
Network” section on page 11-9.

Laser Safety Guidelines

ATM OC-3 network modules use a small laser to generate the fiber-optic signal. Keep the transmit port
covered whenever a cable is not connected to it.
The module faceplate carries a Class 1 laser warning label. See Figure 11-19.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-13
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Figure 11-19 Class 1 Laser Warning Label

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1

ATM CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERPRODUCT DER KLASSE 1
PRODUCT LASER DE CLASSE1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1A-OC3MM

ATM 0

RCLK FERF OOF AIS EN

14862
Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable
is connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 240

Fiber-Optic Transmission Specifications

This section describes Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) specifications for fiber-optic
transmissions, defines the power budget, and helps you estimate your power margin for multimode and
single-mode transmissions. This section contains the following information:
• SONET Distance Limitations
• Power Budget and Power Margin
• Link Loss
• Estimating the Power Margin
• Single-Mode Transmission

SONET Distance Limitations

The SONET specification for fiber-optic transmission defines two types of fiber, single-mode and
multimode. Single-mode fiber allows only one bundle of light rays to propagate through the fiber,
whereas multimode fiber allows multiple bundles entering at different angles. Because different bundles
(referred to as modes) travel different distances, depending on the entry angle, they arrive at the
destination at different times (modal dispersion). Single-mode fiber is capable of higher bandwidth and
greater cable run distances than multimode fiber.
Table 11-8 lists typical maximum distances for single-mode and multimode transmissions, as defined by
SONET. Use the calculations described in this section to determine the actual maximum for your
network. If the distance between two connected stations exceeds this limit, transmission can become
unreliable.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-14 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Table 11-8 Typical SONET Maximum Fiber-Optic Transmission Distances

Transceiver Type Maximum Distance Between Stations

MM 1.5 miles (2 km)
SMI 9 miles (15 km)
SML 28 miles (40 km)

Power Budget and Power Margin

Proper operation of an optical data link depends on modulated light reaching the receiver with enough
power to be demodulated. The power budget (PB) is the difference between transmitter power (PT) and
receiver sensitivity (PR). For instance, if transmitter power is –20 dB and receiver sensitivity is –30 dB,
the power budget is 10 dB:
PB = PT – PR
PB = –20 dB – (–30 dB)
PB = 10 dB
The SONET specification requires that the signal meet the worst-case requirements listed in Table 11-9.

Table 11-9 SONET Signal Requirements

MM SMI SML
Transmitter power –20 dBm –15 dBm –5 dBm
Receiver sensitivity –30 dBm –31 dBm –34 dBm
Power budget 10 dBm 16 dBm 29 dBm

The difference between the power budget and the link loss (LL) is called the power margin (PM). If the
power margin is zero or positive, the link should work. If it is negative, the signal may not arrive with
enough power to operate the receiver.

Link Loss
Power loss over a fiber-optic link arises from the following causes:
• Passive components—Attenuation caused by cables, cable splices, and connectors is common to
both multimode and single-mode transmission. Attenuation is significantly lower for optical fiber
than for other media.
• Chromatic dispersion—The signal spreads in time because of differing speeds of the different
wavelengths of light.
• Modal dispersion—In multimode fiber, the signal spreads in time because of the different
propagation modes.
• Higher-order mode loss (HOL)—This loss results from light radiated into the fiber cladding.
• Clock recovery at the receiver—This recovery consumes a small amount of power.
The power lost over the data link is the sum of all these losses. Table 11-10 gives an estimate of the
amount of loss attributable to each cause.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-15
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Table 11-10 Link Loss Causes and Amounts

Cause Amount of Loss

Fiber attenuation SM: 0.5 dB/km
MM: 1 dB/km
Splice 0.5 dB
Connector 0.5 dB
Modal and chromatic dispersion Depends on fiber and wavelength1
Higher-order mode losses 0.5 dB
Clock recovery 1 dB
1. Dispersion is usually negligible for single-mode fiber. For multimode fiber, the product of bandwidth and distance should be
less than 500 MHz-km.

Estimating the Power Margin

The following example calculates a multimode power margin based on these values:
• Power budget 10 dB (SONET worst-case specification for multimode fiber)
• Link length 3 km
• Four connectors
• Three splices
• Higher-order loss (HOL)
• Clock recovery
The power margin is:
PM = PB – LL
= 10 dB – [3 km x (1.0 dB/km) + 4 x (0.5 dB) + 3 x (0.5 dB) + 0.5 dB + 1 dB] = 2 dB
The positive result means this link should have enough power for transmission. The product of
bandwidth and distance is 155 MHz x 3 km = 465 MHz-km; this is within the dispersion limit of
500 MHz-km.

Single-Mode Transmission
Single-mode transmission is useful for longer distances, because there is a single transmission path
within the fiber and modal dispersion does not occur.
The maximum receive power for SML is –10 dBm, and the maximum transmit power is 0 dBm. The
SML receiver can be overloaded when using short lengths of fiber. Overloading the receiver does not
damage it, but can cause unreliable operation. To prevent overloading an SML receiver, insert a
minimum 10-dB attenuator on the link between any SML transmitter and the receiver.
The SMI receiver cannot be overloaded by the SMI transmitter and does not require a minimum fiber
cable length or loss.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-16 OL-2485-20
Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

The following example of a single-mode power margin assumes these values:

• Power budget 16 dB (SONET worst-case specification for SMI)
• Two buildings 8 kilometers apart
• Connections through a patch panel in an intervening building with a total of 12 connectors
PM = PB – LL
= 16 dB – 8 km x (0.5 dB/km) – 12 x (0.5 dB)
= 6 dB
The positive value means this link should have enough power for transmission.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 11-17
 Chapter 11 Connecting ATM Network Modules
ATM OC-3 Network Modules

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

11-18 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 12
Connecting T1/E1 IMA Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect 4- and 8-port T1 and E1 IMA (inverse multiplexing for ATM)
network modules for Cisco modular routers and contains the following sections:
• IMA Network Modules, page 12-1
• Connecting T1/E1 IMA Ports to the Network, page 12-3
• IMA Network Module Interface Numbering, page 12-3
• T1/E1 IMA Network Module LEDs, page 12-4

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

IMA Network Modules

This section provides information about the following network modules for Cisco modular routers:
• 4-port T1 IMA network module (NM-4T1-IMA) (see Figure 12-1)
• 8-port T1 IMA network module (NM-8T1-IMA) (see Figure 12-2)
• 4-port E1 IMA network module (NM-4E1-IMA) (see Figure 12-3)
• 8-port E1 IMA network module (NM-8E1-IMA) (see Figure 12-4)
Each port provides 1.544 Mbps/2.048 Mbps connectivity. The IMA aggregation of multiple T1/E1 links
increases bandwidth inexpensively to allow WAN uplinks at speeds ranging up to those of a T3/E3 link.

Figure 12-1 4-Channel IMA T1 Network Module

ATM-T1 SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING NETWORK MODULE

T1-IMA 3 T1-IMA 2 T1-IMA 1 T1-IMA 0
4T1-IMA

AL AL AL AL
LP LP LP LP
CD CD CD CD EN
17922

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 12-1
 Chapter 12 Connecting T1/E1 IMA Network Modules
IMA Network Modules

Figure 12-2 8-Channel IMA T1 Network Module

ATM-T1
T1-IMA 7 T1-IMA 6 T1-IMA 5 T1-IMA 4 T1-IMA 3 T1-IMA 2 T1-IMA 1 T1-IMA 0
8T1-IMA
SEE MANUAL BEFORE
INSTALLATION

AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL
LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP
CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD EN

17924
Figure 12-3 4-Channel IMA E1 Network Module

ATM-E1 SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING NETWORK MODULE

E1-IMA 3 E1-IMA 2 E1-IMA 1 E1-IMA 0
4E1-IMA

AL AL AL AL
LP LP LP LP
CD CD CD CD EN

17923
Figure 12-4 8-Channel IMA E1 Network Module

ATM-E1
8E1-IMA E1-IMA 7 E1-IMA 6 E1-IMA 5 E1-IMA 4 E1-IMA 3 E1-IMA 2 E1-IMA 1 E1-IMA 0

SEE MANUAL BEFORE

INSTALLATION

AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL
LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP
CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD EN

17925

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

12-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 12 Connecting T1/E1 IMA Network Modules
Connecting T1/E1 IMA Ports to the Network

Connecting T1/E1 IMA Ports to the Network

To connect a T1/E1 IMA network module to a network, use a straight-through RJ-48C-to-RJ-48C cable
to connect the T1 or E1 port to an RJ-48C wall jack. (See Figure 12-5.)

Figure 12-5 Connecting a T1/E1 IMA Network Module to an RJ-48C Wall Jack

IMA port (RJ-48C)

ATM-T1
8ATM ATM-T17 ATM-T16 ATM-T15 ATM-T14
ATM-T13 ATM-T12 ATM-T11 ATM-T10

AL AL AL AL
LP LP AL
LP LP AL AL
CD CD AL
CD LP LP
CD LP LP
CD CD CD CD EN

17926
Straight-through
RJ-48C-to-RJ-48C
cable

RJ-48C jack

IMA Network Module Interface Numbering

An individual (ungrouped) interface on the IMA network module is numbered by interface type and slot
and port number, for example atm 0/2.
An interface that is part of an IMA group loses its individual port number, but adopts the IMA group
number, for example atm 0/ima2.
Up to four groups can be created (numbered 0 through 3).

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 12-3
 Chapter 12 Connecting T1/E1 IMA Network Modules
T1/E1 IMA Network Module LEDs

T1/E1 IMA Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. The enable LED indicates that the module has passed
its self-tests and is available to the router. T1/E1 IMA network modules have the additional LEDs shown
in Figure 12-6 and described in Table 12-1.

Figure 12-6 T1/E1 IMA Network Module LEDs

ATM-T1
T1-IMA 7 T1-IMA 6 T1-IMA 5 T1-IMA 4 T1-IMA 3 T1-IMA 2 T1-IMA 1 T1-IMA 0
8T1-IMA
SEE MANUAL BEFORE
INSTALLATION

AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL
LP LP LP LP LP LP LP LP
CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD EN

17960
Status LEDs Enable LED

Table 12-1 T1/E1 IMA Network Module LEDs

LED Color Meaning

AL Yellow Alarm indicating loss of signal, loss of frame, or unavailability because of
excessive errors.
LP Yellow Controller local loopback.
CD Green Carrier received on telco link.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

12-4 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 13
Connecting HSSI Network Modules

This chapter describes the 1-port High-Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) network module for Cisco 3600
series and Cisco 3700 series routers and contains the following sections:
• HSSI Network Modules, page 13-1
• Connecting HSSI Modules to the Network, page 13-1
• HSSI Network Module LEDs, page 13-3

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

HSSI Network Modules

The 1-port High-Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) network module (see Figure 13-1) provides connectivity
for fractional DS3 rate links and slower.

Figure 13-1 HSSI Network Module

HIGH SPEED SERIAL

1HSSI

HSSI 0
LB/CN

RC

RD

TC

TD

11709

EN

HSSI port LEDs

HSSI port Enable LED

Connecting HSSI Modules to the Network

The HSSI module contains a 50-pin receptacle, color-coded blue. You can connect this port to a network
in either of two ways:
• To an external data service unit (DSU), using a HSSI data terminal equipment (DTE) cable for
operation in DTE mode (see Figure 13-2). The HSSI port is configured to operate in this mode by
default.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 13-1
 Chapter 13 Connecting HSSI Network Modules
Connecting HSSI Modules to the Network

• To another router for back-to-back operation, using a HSSI null modem cable. (See Figure 13-3.)
Both routers must be at the same site. Back-to-back operation allows you to verify operation of the
HSSI port or link routers directly to build a larger node. Both routers must be configured to use a
51.84-MHz internal clock.

Figure 13-2 Connecting the 1-Port HSSI Module to an External DSU

HIGH SPEED SERIAL

1HSSI

LB/CN
HSSI 0

RC

RD

TC

TD
EN

HSSI DTE cable

HSSI port

11710
External DSU

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

13-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 13 Connecting HSSI Network Modules
HSSI Network Module LEDs

Figure 13-3 Connecting Two Routers Back to Back

HIGH SPEED SERIAL

1HSSI

LB/CN
HSSI 0

RC

RD

TC

TD
EN
Null modem cable

HSSI port

3
2E
NT1

W1
ACT

2W
B1 WO FAST ETHERNET
BRI 1FE
B2 NT1 SERIAL
SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLATION

10/100 bTX
LNK
ACT

LNK

11711
ACT

AUI

MBPS

DPLX
FULL
LINK
COL

100
EN
1 ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 0
EN

INPUT 100-240VAC 50/60HZ 3.0-1.5 AMPS

HSSI network Router

module

HSSI Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. The enable LED indicates that the module has passed
its self-tests and is available to the router. The HSSI network module has the additional LEDs shown in
Figure 13-4 and described in Table 13-1.

Figure 13-4 HSSI Network Module LEDs

HIGH SPEED SERIAL

1HSSI

HSSI 0
LB/CN

RC

RD

TC

TD

11712

EN

HSSI port LEDs

Enable LED

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 13-3
 Chapter 13 Connecting HSSI Network Modules
HSSI Network Module LEDs

Table 13-1 HSSI Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
LB/C Green indicates normal operation. The module is connected to the external
(Loopback/Connect) DSU, and the signals TA (DTE available) and CA (DCE available) are active.
Yellow indicates that the module is in loopback mode.
If this LED is off, the port is neither connected to the DSU nor in loopback
mode.
RC (Receive Clock) Module has detected a receive clock signal. During normal operation, this
signal is received from the external DSU. During loopback, it is generated
internally.
RD (Receive Data) Module has detected a receive clock signal. During normal operation, this
signal is received from the external DSU. During loopback, it is generated
internally.
TC (Transmit Clock) Module is transmitting a clock signal to the external DSU. During normal
operation, this signal is derived from the DSU’s RT signal. During loopback,
it is generated internally.
TD (Transmit Data) Module has been detected by and can send packets to the external DSU.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

13-4 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 14
Connecting Compression Network Modules

This chapter describes the compression network module for Cisco 3600 series routers and contains the
following sections:
• Compression Network Modules, page 14-1
• Interfaces Supported, page 14-2
• Compression Network Module LEDs, page 14-2
This module provides hardware assistance to protocols that use compression and decompression,
reduces the load on the CPU caused by software compression, and improves router performance.

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Compression Network Modules

The compression network module (NM-COMPR) does not provide network interfaces of its own, but
instead compresses and decompresses data passing through interfaces on other network modules or
WAN interface cards in the router. (See Figure 14-1.)
Hardware compression is supported only over Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) links. The compression
network module supports only the Stacker compression algorithm.
Cisco IOS Release 11.3 and later releases allow Frame Relay compression support using the FRF.9
compression algorithm.

Figure 14-1 Compression Network Module

COMPRESSION
ERROR

ACTIVE

EN
H10480

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 14-1
 Chapter 14 Connecting Compression Network Modules
Interfaces Supported

Interfaces Supported
The compression network module supports the following interfaces:
• Channelized T1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
• Channelized E1 ISDN PRI
• ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
• Synchronous serial
• Switched 56-kbps data service unit/channel service unit (DSU/CSU)

Compression Network Module LEDs

Figure 14-2 shows compression network module LEDs. Table 14-1 describes their meaning.

Figure 14-2 Compression Network Module LEDs

COMPRESSION

ERROR

ACTIVE
EN

H10482
Error LED Enable LED

Active LED

Table 14-1 Compression Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
EN Green indicates that the module has passed its self-tests and is available to the router.
ERROR Amber indicates that an error was found, and if the LED remains on, that the error might
prevent accurate compression.
Off during normal operation.
ACTIVE Green indicates that the module is ready to process data. It comes on when the boot
process is complete and stays on during normal operation.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

14-2 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 15
Connecting Wireless Multipoint Network
Modules

This chapter explains how to connect the wireless multipoint network module and contains the following
sections:
• Wireless Multipoint Network Modules, page 15-1
• Subscriber-Unit System, page 15-2
• Hardware and Software Requirements, page 15-3
• Connecting Wireless Ports to the Network, page 15-3
• Wireless Multipoint Network Module LEDs, page 15-3
• Related Documents, page 15-4

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Wireless Multipoint Network Modules

The wireless multipoint network module, shown in Figure 15-1, also referred to as a subscriber unit
(SU), provides a high-speed broadband fixed wireless radio-frequency (RF) link between each
subscriber site and a single headend site. This link delivers full-duplex data in the licensed MMDS band
(2.500 to 2.690 GHz) or unlicensed U-NII band (5.725 to 5.825 GHz).
The headend of the system consists of a Cisco uBR7200 series universal broadband router, one or more
wireless modem cards, and the required subsystem for each modem card. The diversity option, which
minimizes the effects of fading, uses two wireless transverters at each site, with each transverter
connected to its own antenna. (See Figure 15-2.)

Figure 15-1 Wireless Multipoint Network Module with Diversity

NM-WMDA DIVERSITY MAIN

OUT OF SERVICE

MAJOR ALARM
RECEIVE DATA

MINOR ALARM
SEND DATA

CARRIER

EN
30547

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 15-1
 Chapter 15 Connecting Wireless Multipoint Network Modules
Subscriber-Unit System

Figure 15-2 Multipoint Communications with Multipath and Diversity Reception

The network module provides the control and data interface to the radio frequency (RF) subsystem in
the wireless transverter. It also provides the up-down conversion from baseband to intermediate
frequency (IF). One network module supports one or two wireless transverters (main and diversity).

Subscriber-Unit System
Each subscriber unit system (see Figure 15-3) consists of the necessary cables and these items:
• A wireless multipoint network module in the router
• One or two antennas to transmit and receive RF signals to and from the headend. (Diversity
reception of headend transmissions requires two antennas.)
• One wireless transverter for each antenna. The transverter can be attached to the back of the
subscriber antenna, as shown in Figure 15-3, or mounted separately.
• One power injector for each transverter. The power injector connects the network module to the
wireless transverter, and provides the transverter with DC power, control signals, and IF signals.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

15-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 15 Connecting Wireless Multipoint Network Modules
Hardware and Software Requirements

Figure 15-3 Components of the Multipoint Subscriber-Unit System

Note The antenna, wireless transverter, and power injector are third-party products. For further
information about these components, see the manufacturer’s documentation.

Hardware and Software Requirements

Wireless multipoint network modules require that the router have at least 16 MB of flash memory.
The wireless multipoint network modules require an external microcode bundle. You can download this
microcode at http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/tablebuild.pl/rsu.

Connecting Wireless Ports to the Network

Use an indoor IF coaxial cable to connect the wireless network module Main connector to a power
injector. If you are using the diversity feature, connect the network module Diversity connector to a
second power injector.

Wireless Multipoint Network Module LEDs

Wireless multipoint network modules have the LEDs shown in Table 15-1.

Table 15-1 Wireless Multipoint Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
EN (Enable) The module has passed its self-tests and is available to the router.
RECEIVE DATA The module is receiving packets.
SEND DATA The module is sending packets.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 15-3
 Chapter 15 Connecting Wireless Multipoint Network Modules
Related Documents

Table 15-1 Wireless Multipoint Network Module LEDs (continued)

LED Meaning
CARRIER Indicates the state of the radio link. Green means that the radio link is
synchronized and the line protocol is up. Yellow indicates loss of link
synchronization.
OUT OF SERVICE Yellow means that the radio link is still up, but not available for use (typically
in a test or loopback mode).
MINOR ALARM Yellow means that the link is degraded and may need maintenance action, or
one or more user-defined event thresholds have been exceeded.
MAJOR ALARM The link is down.

Related Documents
For additional information, see the following documents.

Subscriber Unit
• Multipoint Wireless Support for the Cisco 2600 and 3600 Series Routers feature document

Headend
• Multipoint Support for the Cisco uBR7200 Series Universal Broadband Router feature document
• Cisco uBR7200 Series Multipoint Wireless Modem Card and Subsystem Installation
• Cisco Multipoint Headend Wireless Transverter Duplexer Replacement Instructions
• Cisco Multipoint Headend Power Feed Panel Replacement Instructions
• Cisco Multipoint Headend Wireless Transverter Replacement Instructions
• Cisco Wireless Transverter Hail Shield Installation Instructions

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

15-4 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 16
Connecting High-Density Analog Telephony
Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect high-density analog telephony network modules for Cisco
modular routers. It contains the following sections:
• High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module, page 16-1
• Connecting the High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module to the Network, page 16-3
• Adding DSP Expansion Modules, page 16-3
• Adding Port Expansion Modules, page 16-4
• High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module LEDs, page 16-6
• High-Density Analog Voice Card Pinouts, page 16-6

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module

The high-density analog telephony network module is a modular, high-density voice network module
that provides dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) detection, voice compression and decompression, call
progress tone generation, voice activity detection (VAD), echo cancellation, and adaptive jitter
buffering.
The high-density analog telephony network module supports two different expansion modules,
providing up to 12 ports in addition to the 4 Foreign Exchange Service (FXS) ports on the base
high-density analog telephony network module (NM-HDA). See Table 16-1 for expansion module
support information.

Table 16-1 Expansion Modules Supported on the Cisco High-Density Analog Telephony Network
Module (NM-HDA)

Expansion Modules Port Type Number of Ports

EM-HDA-8FXS FXS 8
EM3-HDA-8FXS FXS 8
EM-HDA-4FXO FXO 4
1
EM2-HDA-4FXO FXO 4

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 16-1
 Chapter 16 Connecting High-Density Analog Telephony Network Modules
High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module

1. FXO = Foreign Exchange Office

These expansion modules can be used in the following combinations:

• 12 Foreign Exchange Station (FXS) ports (NM-HDA with installed EM-HDA-8FXS and
EM3-HDA-8FXS expansion modules)
• Ten Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) ports and four FXS ports (NM-HDA with two installed
EM-HDA-4FXO or EM2-HDA-4FXO expansion modules)
• 12 FXS and 4 FXO ports (NM-HDA with installed EM-HDA-8FXS, EM3-HDA-8FXS, and
EM-HDA-4FXO or EM2-HDA-4FXO expansion modules)
The FXO expansion module supports a power failure port that connects directly to the central office
(CO) in case of failure. Physical ports are added as shown in Table 16-2.

Table 16-2 Physical Ports on the High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module

Physical Port Location FXS Ports FXO Ports

1–4 Default on card 1–4 —
5–14 Expansion module 0 5–12 FXS 5–8 FXO
13–14 Not used 9–13 Not used
14 Power failure port
Note Port 8 is hard-wired to port 14.
15–24 Expansion module 1 15–22 FXS 15–18 FXO
23–24 Not used 19–23 Not used
24 Power fail port
Note Port 18 is hard-wired to port 24.
25 Not used — —

Tip To maintain an emergency connection during power outages, connect port 14 or port 24 to the public
switched telephone network (PSTN). Phones connected to port 8 or port 18 fail over to the PSTN
connections through port 14 or port 24 during power outages.

The digital signal processors (DSPs) on the card support up to 8 ports of high-complexity codecs or up
to 16 ports of medium- and low-complexity codecs. The number of DSPs must be increased if more than
eight ports of high-complexity codecs are needed. In this case, a DSP expansion module must be
installed.
The high-density analog telephony network module is connected to the network using an RJ-21
Amphenol connector on the front panel. The front of the card is shown in Figure 16-1.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

16-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 16 Connecting High-Density Analog Telephony Network Modules
Connecting the High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module to the Network

Figure 16-1 High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module

NM-
HDA Port # Type
1-
4 4 FXS
5-
14 26 50
15-
24
ACT EN

62292
1 25

Connecting the High-Density Analog Telephony Network

Module to the Network
The high-density analog telephony network module is connected to a distribution frame with an RJ-21
cable. (See Figure 16-2.) RJ-21 cables are not provided with the network module. Some recommended
cables are as follows:
• 253PP10GYADI male-to-male cable and 253PC10GYADI male-to-female cable from Gray Bar
• AT125-SM patch panel (supports both male and female connection) from Gray Bar
For ordering information, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on page xi.

Figure 16-2 High-Density Analog Telephony Card Connected to a Main Distribution Frame
NM-
HDA Port # Type
1-
4 4 FXS
5-
14 26
15- 50
24

ACT EN
1 25

RJ-21 connector

PSTN
PBX
62293

Main distribution frame (MDF) or patch panel

Adding DSP Expansion Modules

DSP expansion modules can be used if more than eight ports using high-complexity codecs are needed
on the high-density analog telephony network module.
To install DSP expansion modules, follow these steps:

Step 1 Insert the connector on the DSP expansion module into the module connector on the network module.
(See Figure 16-3.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 16-3
 Chapter 16 Connecting High-Density Analog Telephony Network Modules
Adding Port Expansion Modules

Note Be sure to press firmly on the DSP expansion module until the board seats onto the connector.

Step 2 Insert the screws from the hardware kit through the DSP expansion module into the brackets on the
network module.
Step 3 Install the network module into the router, as described in the “Installing Cisco Network Modules in
Cisco Access Routers” section on page 2-5.

Figure 16-3 Installing a DSP Expansion Module

NM
HD -
AP
ort
1- # T
4 4 ype
5- FX
14 S
15
24-

26

62294
1

50

25 AC
T
EN

Adding Port Expansion Modules

Port expansion modules can be used to increase the number of ports supported on the high-density
analog telephony network module.
To install port expansion modules, follow these steps:

Step 1 Decide if the expansion board is going in the EM0 slot or EM1 slot, as shown in Figure 16-4.
Step 2 Insert the connector on the port expansion module into the module connector on the network module, as
shown in Figure 16-4. Use the alignment pins on the bracket to correctly align the expansion module. If
the pin does not properly align with the expansion module, the rear bracket can be adjusted by
loosening the screw underneath the bracket and tightening it when the module is correctly in place.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

16-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 16 Connecting High-Density Analog Telephony Network Modules
Adding Port Expansion Modules

Note Be sure to press firmly on the port expansion module until the board seats securely on the
connector.

Caution For each expansion module, two mounting screws must be installed with 6-8 lbs-in (67.8 N-cm) of
torque. Failure to properly secure the expansion module to the base module with two screws
compromises product reliability. In the case of FXO ports, failure to properly tighten both mounting
screws causes FXO ground-start outgoing call operation to fail.

Step 3 Insert the screws from the hardware kit through the port expansion module into the brackets on the
network module.

Warning Failure to secure the expansion module to the base module with two screws defeats the earth ground,
causing a potential safety hazard. Statement 347

Figure 16-4 Installing a Port Expansion Module

EM 0 installed
on this side

NM
HD -
AP
ort
1- # T
4 4 ype
5- FX
14 S
15
24-

26
62295

50

25 AC
T
EN

EM 1 installed
on this side

Step 4 Apply the appropriate label on the front of the card, as shown in Figure 16-5.
Step 5 Install the network module into the router, as described in the “Installing Cisco Network Modules in
Cisco Access Routers” section on page 2-5.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 16-5
 Chapter 16 Connecting High-Density Analog Telephony Network Modules
High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module LEDs

Figure 16-5 Label Locations for Expansion Ports

Apply label for EM0 here

NM-
HDA Port # Type
1-
4 4 FXS
5-
14 26
15-
24

62693
1

Apply label for EM1 here

High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module LEDs

Figure 16-6 shows high-density analog telephony network module LEDs. Table 16-3 describes their
meaning.

Figure 16-6 High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module LEDs

NM-
HDA Port # Type
1-
4 4 FXS
5-
14 26 50
15-
24
ACT EN

1 25 62296

Active LED
Enable LED

Table 16-3 High-Density Analog Telephony Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
EN Green indicates that the module has passed its self-tests and is available to the router.
ACT Green indicates that the module is ready to process data. It goes on when the boot process
is complete and stays on during normal operation.

High-Density Analog Voice Card Pinouts

Figure 16-7 shows the RJ-21 connector wiring for the cable used for the high-density analog voice card;
Table 16-4 lists the pinouts. The port usage depends on the type of expansion cards installed.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

16-6 OL-2485-20
Chapter 16 Connecting High-Density Analog Telephony Network Modules
High-Density Analog Voice Card Pinouts

Figure 16-7 RJ-21 Connector Wiring

1 25

26 50

36484
RJ-21 cable RJ-21 connector

Table 16-4 RJ-21 Connections for the High-Density Analog Voice Network Module

RJ-21 Connector NM-HDA

Pair Tip Conductor Ring Conductor Port Network Module Reference
1 26 1 0 FXS Base card
2 27 2 1 FXS
3 28 3 2 FXS
4 29 4 3 FXS
5 30 5 4 FXS FXO Expansion
6 31 6 5 FXS FXO board in
slot 0
7 32 7 6 FXS FXO
8 33 8 7 FXS FXO
9 34 9 8 FXS Unused
10 35 10 9 FXS Unused
11 36 11 10 FXS Unused
12 37 12 11 FXS Unused
13 38 13 12 Unused Unused
14 39 14 13 Unused FXO failover
15 40 15 14 FXS FXO Expansion
16 41 16 15 FXS FXO board in
slot 1
17 42 17 16 FXS FXO
18 43 18 17 FXS FXO
19 44 19 18 FXS Unused
20 45 20 19 FXS Unused
21 46 21 20 FXS Unused
22 47 22 21 FXS Unused
23 48 23 22 Unused Unused
24 49 24 23 Unused FXO failover
25 50 25 — Unused

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 16-7
 Chapter 16 Connecting High-Density Analog Telephony Network Modules
High-Density Analog Voice Card Pinouts

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

16-8 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 17
Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Ethernet switch network modules and contains the following
sections:
• Ethernet Switch Network Modules, page 17-1
• Requirements for Installing Two Ethernet Switch Network Modules in a Single Chassis, page 17-2
• Power Considerations, page 17-2
• Connecting the Ethernet Switch Network Module to the Network, page 17-4
• Adding an Optional Gigabit Ethernet Expansion Board, page 17-5
• Adding an Optional Power Board, page 17-7
• Ethernet Switch Network Module LEDs, page 17-10

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Ethernet Switch Network Modules

This chapter explains how to install the 16- and 36-port Ethernet switch network modules. The Ethernet
switch network module is a modular, high-density voice network module that provides Layer 2
switching across Ethernet ports. The 16-port Ethernet switch network module has 16 10/100BASE-TX
ports and an optional 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet port. The 36-port Ethernet switch network
module has 36 10/100BASE-TX ports and 2 optional 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet ports. The
36-port Ethernet switch network module requires a double-wide slot. An optional power module can also
be added to provide inline power for IP telephones.
The10/100BASE-TX ports and Gigabit Ethernet ports on the Ethernet switch network module are
connected to the network using RJ-45 connectors on the front panel. The power module is connected to
an external power supply using a power connection cable. The front of the 16-port card is shown in
Figure 17-1. The front panel of the 36-port card is shown in Figure 17-2.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 17-1
 Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Requirements for Installing Two Ethernet Switch Network Modules in a Single Chassis

Figure 17-1 16-Port Ethernet Switch Network Module

NM- FastEthernet Ports

ESW- 15x 8x Ext
16 Pwr

-48V GE
10/100/
1000
Base-Tx
EN
7x 0x

62347
15x 7x 14x 6x 13x 5x 12x 4x 11x 3x 10x 2x 9x 1x 8x 0x

Figure 17-2 36-Port Ethernet Switch Network Module

NMD- FastEthernet Ports
ESW- 35x 18x Ext
36 GE1
Pwr

-48V GE0
10/100/
1000
Base-Tx
EN

72004
10/100/1000 17x 0x
Base-Tx
35x 17x 34x 16x 33x 15x 32x 14x 31x 13x 30x 12x 29x 11x 28x 10x 27x 9x 26x 8x 25x 17 24x 6x 23x 5x 22x 4x 21x 3x 20x 2x 19x 1x 18x 0x

Requirements for Installing Two Ethernet Switch Network

Modules in a Single Chassis
A maximum of two Ethernet switch network modules can be installed in a single chassis. If two Ethernet
switch network modules of any type are installed in the same chassis, the following configuration
requirements must be met:
• Both Ethernet switch network modules must have an optional Gigabit Ethernet expansion board
installed.
• An Ethernet crossover cable is connected to the two Ethernet switch network modules using the
optional Gigabit Ethernet expansion board ports.
• Intrachassis stacking for the the optional Gigabit Ethernet expansion board ports is configured. For
information about intrachassis stacking configuration, see the 16- and 36-Port Ethernet Switch
Module for Cisco 2600 Series, Cisco 3600 Series, and Cisco 3700 series feature document.
Without this configuration and connection, duplications will occur in the VLAN databases, and
unexpected packet handling may occur.

Power Considerations
The Ethernet switch network module supports inline powering of IP telephones with –48-V power. This
allows IP phones to be plugged into the standard RJ-45 jack and be powered from this source rather than
having a separate plug into an AC wall outlet. The Ethernet switch network module requires delivery of
–48-V power to the network module in order to provide inline powering of IP telephones.
Cisco 2800 series, Cisco 3700 series, and Cisco 3800 series routers supply –48 V power internally (with
AC-IP power supplies) to the Ethernet switch service modules. To support Cisco 2600 series and Cisco
3600 series routers, which do not supply –48-V internal power, the network module has an external
connector for connection to an external –48-V power supply.
The Ethernet switch network module distributes the –48-V power to each of the Ethernet ports that are
configured for line power. Each port can be independently configured for line power.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

17-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Power Considerations

Note When using the NM-16ESW network module with the MWR 1941-DC router, shielded cables are
required, and IP phone inline power is not supported.

Restrictions for Cisco 3700 Series Routers

Cisco 3700 series routers contain internal –48-V power supplies to supply power to the Ethernet switch
network module.
For the Cisco 3745 router, the following specifications apply:
• The Cisco 3745 router can have one or two internal –48-V power supplies. The internal supplies of
the Cisco 3745 router are configured to be redundant by default.
• With a single power supply, the Cisco 3745 router can provide up to 360 W. This is enough power
for up to 36 10-W IP phones. With two nonredundant power supplies, 640 W can be provided,
supporting up to 64 10-W IP phones.
• The Cisco 3745 router main board has four independent signals to indicate status on both internal
power supplies. Changes on the state of any of these four signals interrupts the main processor on
the Cisco 3745 router so software can take the appropriate action.
Cisco 3725 routers have a single –48-V supply. Cisco 3725 routers do not report any power supply
status. The only software indication of –48-V status is the –48-V status bit provided on the 16-port
Ethernet switch network module board.

Restrictions for Cisco 2600 Series and Cisco 3600 Series Routers
Cisco 2600 series and Cisco 3600 series routers do not supply –48-V power, so an external –48-V supply
is required to support inline power for IP phones. This external power supply connects to the Ethernet
switch network module faceplate with a cable.
An external power supply plugged into an Ethernet switch network module provides power only for that
specific network module. To supply redundant power, a Y cable can be used so that two external power
supplies are connected to the same card.
For more information about external power supplies, see the Cisco External Power Supply for Cisco
Ethernet Switch Network Modules Installation Guide.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 17-3
 Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Connecting the Ethernet Switch Network Module to the Network

Connecting the Ethernet Switch Network Module to the

Network
Warning Voltages that present a shock hazard can exist on inline power circuits if interconnections are made
by using uninsulated exposed metal contacts, conductors, or terminals. Avoid using such
interconnection methods unless the exposed metal parts are in a restricted access location and users
and service people who are authorized to access the location are made aware of the hazard. A
restricted access area can be accessed only through the use of a special tool, lock and key, or other
security means. Statement 1072

The Ethernet switch network module is connected to an Ethernet switch or hub with RJ-45 cables. (See
Figure 17-3.) RJ-45 cables are not provided with the network module. For ordering information, see the
“Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on page xi.

Note When using the NM-16ESW with the MWR 1941-DC router, shielded cables are required.

Tip For information about RJ-45 crossover cables, go to the following URL:
http://www-tac.cisco.com/Support_Library/Hardware/LAN_Switches_and_
Modules/Cat6000/Troubleshooting/QuickTip.998950447.html

Figure 17-3 16-Port Ethernet Switch Card Connected to Ethernet Switch or Hub
NM-
ESW- 15x
FastEthernet Ports
16 8x
Ext
Pwr

-48V GE
10/100/
1000
Base-Tx
7x EN
0x
15x 7x 14x 6x 13x 5x 12x 4x 11x 3x 10x 2x 9x 1x 8x 0x

Ethernet port
(RJ-45)

Ethernet cable
62348

Ethernet hub

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

17-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Adding an Optional Gigabit Ethernet Expansion Board

Adding an Optional Gigabit Ethernet Expansion Board

An optional Gigabit Ethernet expansion board can be installed to support a 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit
Ethernet port.
To install a Gigabit Ethernet expansion board, follow these steps:

Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the cover on the Gigabit Ethernet board port, as shown in
Figure 17-4.

Figure 17-4 Gigabit Ethernet Board Port Cover on the Ethernet Switch Network Module

NM- External power supply port cover

ESW-
15x
16
FastEthe
rnet Ports

8x
Ext
7x Pwr
-48V
GE
15x 7x
14x 6x 10/100/
13x 5x 1000

62426
12x 4x Base-Tx
11x 3x
10x 2x 0x EN
9x 1x 8x 0x

Gigabit Ethernet port cover

Step 2 Guide the external connector through the Gigabit Ethernet expansion port opening on the card faceplate.
Step 3 Insert the connector on the Gigabit Ethernet expansion board into the board connector on the network
module. Inspect the board to ensure that the board is fully connected. (See Figure 17-5 for 16-port
Ethernet switch network modules or Figure 17-6 for 36-port Ethernet switch network modules.)

Caution Be sure to press firmly on the Gigabit Ethernet expansion board until the board seats correctly onto
the connector. When the Gigabit Ethernet expansion board is seated properly, the standoff is flush
with the board. If this board is not firmly seated, failures can occur.

Step 4 Insert the screw from the board installation kit through the Gigabit Ethernet expansion board into the
standoff on the network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 17-5
 Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Adding an Optional Gigabit Ethernet Expansion Board

Figure 17-5 Installing a Gigabit Ethernet Expansion Board on a 16-Port Cisco Ethernet Switch
Network Module

NM
ES -
16 W-
15
x

Fa
7x stE
the
rne
tP
ort
15 s
x
7x
14
x
6x
13
x
5x

62349
12
x
4x
8x
11
x
3x
10
x
2x Ex
-48 Pwt
9x V r
1x
G
8x 0x 10 E
0x 10/100
Ba00 /
se
-T
E x N

Figure 17-6 Installing a Gigabit Ethernet Expansion Board on a 36-Port Cisco Ethernet Switch Network
Module

NM
ES D-
36 W-

3E5x
xt
GE Pwr
1

10
Ba/10
se 0/1
-T 00
x 0
17
x

35
x
17
x
34
x
16
x
33
x
15
x
32
x
14
x
31
x Fa
13 stE
x th
30 er
x ne
12 tP
x or
ts
29
x
11
x
28
x
10
x
27
x
9x
26
x
8x
25
x
17
24
x
6x

23
x
75279

5x
22
x
4x
21 18
x x
3x
20
x
2x
19 Exxt
E
x -48
1x V Pwwrt
P
r
18
x 8 G
0x 0x x 10 E
10/100
Ba00 /
se
-Tx
EN

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

17-6 OL-2485-20
Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Adding an Optional Power Board

Adding an Optional Power Board

An optional power board can be used if the Ethernet switch network module requires external –48-V
power for IP telephones. Installation and configuration of the external power supply system is described
in the Cisco External Power Supply for Cisco Ethernet Switch Network Modules Installation Guide.
To install power boards, follow these steps:

Step 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the cover on the external power board port, as shown in
Figure 17-7.

Figure 17-7 Power Board Port Cover on the Ethernet Switch Network Module

NM- External power supply port cover

ESW-
15x
16
FastEthe
rnet Ports

8x
Ext
7x Pwr
-48V
GE
15x 7x
14x 6x 10/100/
13x 5x 1000

62426
12x 4x Base-Tx
11x 3x
10x 2x 0x EN
9x 1x 8x 0x

Gigabit Ethernet port cover

Step 2 On the power board, remove the thumb screws on either side of the power board port. Put these in a safe
place, because they will be replaced when the power board is installed.
Step 3 Guide the external connector through the power board port opening on the card faceplate.
Step 4 Insert the connector on the power board into the connector on the network module. (See Figure 17-8 for
16-port Ethernet switch network modules and Figure 17-9 for 36-port Ethernet switch network
modules.)

Note Be sure to press firmly on the power board until the board seats correctly onto the connector.

Step 5 Insert the screws from the board installation kit through the power board into the standoffs on the
network module.
Step 6 Replace the thumbscrews on either side of the power board port. Make sure that the thumbscrews are
tightened firmly.

Warning Do not connect the external power supply cable to the power connector on the front of the network
module until the network module has been inserted into the router chassis.

Step 7 After installing the network module into the chassis, connect the power cable to the power module
connector on the front of the network module. See the Cisco External Power Supply for Cisco Ethernet
Switch Network Modules Installation Guide for more information.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 17-7
 Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Adding an Optional Power Board

Figure 17-8 Installing a Power Board in a 16-Port Ethernet Switch Network Module

NM
ES -
16 W-
15
x

Fa
7x stE
the
rne
tP
ort
15 s
x
7x
14
x
6x
13
x
5x

62350
12
x
4x
8x
11
x
3x
10
x
2x Ex
-48 Pwt
9x V r
1x
G
8x 0x 10 E
0x 10/100
Ba00 /
se
-Tx
EN

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

17-8 OL-2485-20
Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Adding an Optional Power Board

Figure 17-9 Installing a Power Board in a 36-Port Ethernet Switch Network Module

NM
ES D-
36 W-

35
x
GE
1

10
Ba/10
se 0/1
-T 00
x 0
17
x

35
x
17
x
34
x
16
x
33
x
15
x
32
x
14
x
31
x Fa
13 stE
x th
30 er
x ne
12 tP
x or
ts
29
x
11
x
28
x
10
x
27
x
9x
26
x
8x
25
x
17
24
x
6x

23
x
5x
22
x

72275
4x
21 18
x x
3x
20
x
2x
19 Ex
x -48 Pwt
1x V r
18
x 8 G
0x 0x x 10 E
10/100
Ba00 /
se
-Tx
EN

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 17-9
 Chapter 17 Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules
Ethernet Switch Network Module LEDs

Ethernet Switch Network Module LEDs

Figure 17-10 shows 16-port Ethernet switch network module LEDs. Figure 17-11 shows 36-port
Ethernet switch network module LEDs. Table 17-1 describes their meaning.

Figure 17-10 16-Port Ethernet Switch Network Module LEDs

Gigabit
Ethernet LED
-48V LED
NM- FastEthernet Ports
ESW- 15x 8x Ext
16 Pwr

-48V GE
10/100/
1000
Base-Tx
EN
7x 0x

62586
15x 7x 14x 6x 13x 5x 12x 4x 11x 3x 10x 2x 9x 1x 8x 0x

Ethernet port
LEDs Enable LED

Figure 17-11 36-Port Ethernet Switch Network Module LEDs

Gigabit
Gigabit
Ethernet LED
Ethernet LED
-48V LED
NMD- FastEthernet Ports
ESW- 35x 18x Ext
36 GE1
Pwr

-48V GE0
10/100/
1000
Base-Tx
EN

72005
10/100/1000 17x 0x
Base-Tx
35x 17x 34x 16x 33x 15x 32x 14x 31x 13x 30x 12x 29x 11x 28x 10x 27x 9x 26x 8x 25x 17 24x 6x 23x 5x 22x 4x 21x 3x 20x 2x 19x 1x 18x 0x

Ethernet port Enable LED

LEDs

Table 17-1 Ethernet Switch Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
0–16 (for 16-port) Green indicates that individual Ethernet port is functioning.
0–36 (for 36-port)
–48-V Off indicates that no –48-V power is going to the network module.
Green indicates –48-V power is present on the network module.
Amber indicates that there is a problem with one or more of the internal or external
–48-V power supplies.
GE Green indicates that the Gigabit Ethernet port is functioning.
EN Green indicates that the module has passed its self-tests and is available to
the router.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

17-10 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 18
Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Cisco EtherSwitch service modules. It contains the following
sections:
• Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules, page 18-1
• Power Considerations, page 18-13
• Connecting to the EtherSwitch Service Module Ports, page 18-14
• Stacking the Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules, page 18-15

Note This document describes the Cisco EtherSwitch service modules only. For information about other Cisco
Ethernet switch network modules, see the “Connecting Ethernet Switch Network Modules to a Network”
section at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_module_installation_guide_chapt
er09186a00800b168c.html

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Cisco EtherSwitch service modules are complete switching platforms and can be stacked with other
Cisco switches to form a switching stack integrated with the router and capable of supporting the
following features:
• Dynamic addition and removal of individual Cisco EtherSwitch service modules from the switching
stack
• Integrated management through all management interfaces (command-line interface [CLI], Simple
Network Management Protocol [SNMP], and HTTP)
• Features such as UplinkFast, EtherChannel, and equal-cost routing across the switching stack that
provide redundancy and reduce network disruption from individual component failure
For information about these and other Cisco EtherSwitch service module features, see the Cisco
EtherSwitch Service Modules Feature Guide at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_feature_guide09186a0080415bae
.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-1
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Note For release note information about Cisco Ethernet switch network modules, see the Release Notes for
the EtherSwitch Service Modules, Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SEC at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/lan/cat3750/12225sec/index.htm

This section describes the Cisco EtherSwitch service modules. It contains the following sections:
• Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module Overview
• Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module Ports
• Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module LEDs

Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module Overview

The Cisco EtherSwitch service modules are stackable modules to which you can connect Cisco IP
telephones, Cisco wireless access point workstations, and other network devices such as servers, routers,
switches, and other network switch modules.
The following modules are available with this release of the hardware:
• NME-16ES-1G—16 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 10/100/1000 Ethernet port, no StackWise connector
ports, single-wide, no Power over Ethernet (PoE) support (see Figure 18-1)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 16-port EtherSwitch service module (NME-16ES-1G) only to intra-building or non-exposed
wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

• NME-16ES-1G-P—16 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 10/100/1000 Ethernet port, no StackWise connector

ports, single-wide, with PoE support (see Figure 18-1)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 16-port EtherSwitch service module with PoE (NME-16ES-1G-P) only to intra-building or
non-exposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be
grounded at both ends.

• NME-X-23ES-1G—23 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 10/100/1000 Ethernet port, no StackWise connector

ports, extended single-wide, no PoE support (see Figure 18-2)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 23-port EtherSwitch service module (NME-X-23ES-1G) only to intra-building or
non-exposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be
grounded at both ends.

• NME-X-23ES-1G-P—23 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 10/100/1000 Ethernet port, no StackWise

connector ports, extended single-wide, with PoE support (see Figure 18-2)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 23-port EtherSwitch service module with PoE (NME-X-23ES-1G-P) only to intra-building
or non-exposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be
grounded at both ends.

• NME-XD-24ES-1S-P—24 10/100 Ethernet ports, 1 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) port, 2

StackWise connector ports, extended double-wide, with PoE support (see Figure 18-3)

Warning To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 24-port EtherSwitch service module with PoE (NME-XD-24ES-1S-P) only to intra-building
or non-exposed wiring or cabling. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly must
not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces
are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary
Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Note This module is hereafter referred to as the Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module.

• NME-XD-48ES-2S-P—48 10/100 Ethernet ports, 2 SFP ports, no StackWise connector ports,

extended double-wide, with PoE support (see Figure 18-4)

Warning To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the NME-XD-48ES-2S-P network module only to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cable.
The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends. The
intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly must not be metallically connected to
interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as
intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and
require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-3
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Note • You can install only one Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch NME-XD-24ES-1S-P service module in a
single router chassis.
• You can install one Cisco EtherSwitch service module into a single Cisco 2821 or Cisco 2851 router,
up to two Cisco EtherSwitch service modules into a single Cisco 3825, Cisco 3845 router, or up to
four Cisco EtherSwitch NME-16ES-1G or NME-16ES-1G-P service modules in the Cisco 3745 or
Cisco 3845 routers.
• Installing more than two Cisco EtherSwitch service modules in a router chassis requires specific
cabling. For information about cabling multiple Cisco EtherSwitch service modules, see the
Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_module_installation_guide_b
ook09186a00802d2910.html

Table 18-1 shows the Cisco router platforms that support the Cisco EtherSwitch service modules.

Table 18-1 Router Platforms Supporting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules

NME-16ES-1G, NME-X-23ES-1G,
Router NME-16ES-1G-P NME-X-23ES-1G-P NME-XD-24ES-1S-P NME-XD-48ES-2S-P
Cisco 3845 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cisco 3825 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cisco 2851 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cisco 2821 Yes Yes No No
Cisco 2811 Yes No No No
Cisco 3745 Yes No No No
Cisco 3725 Yes No No No
Cisco 2691 Yes No No No
(without –48 V)

16-Port Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module

Figure 18-1 shows the 16-port Cisco EtherSwitch service module.

Note The 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet port on the 16-port Cisco EtherSwitch service module does not
support PoE.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Figure 18-1 NME-16ES-1G and NME-16ES-1G-P Faceplate

16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x

NME-16ES-1G-P

GE 1

121360
EN
16x 2x

23+1-Port Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module

Figure 18-2 shows the 23+1-port Cisco EtherSwitch service module.

Figure 18-2 NME-X-23ES-1G and NME-X-23ES-1G-P Faceplate

NME-X-
23ES- 24x 23x 22x 21x 20x 19x 18x 17x 16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x GE 1
1G-P

121361
EN

24x 2x

24-Port Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch Service Module

Figure 18-3 shows the 24-port Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module.

Figure 18-3 NME-XD-24ES-1S-P Faceplate Showing Two Cisco StackWise Connector Ports
NME-XD-
24ES- 24x 23x 22x 21x 20x 19x 18x 17x 16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x
WHILE STACKWISE CABLES
1S-P CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT ARE ON THE FACEPLATE,
LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 ALL 6-32 THUMB SCREWS MUST
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 BE SECURED
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1

121362
GE 1

MODE
MASTR
DUPLX
STACK

SPEED

SYST
STAT

STACK 1 STACK 2
PoE

EN

24x 2x

48-Port Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module

Figure 18-4 shows the 48-port Cisco EtherSwitch service module.

Figure 18-4 NME-XD-48ES-2S-P Faceplate

NME-XD-
48ES- 48x 47x 46x 45x 44x 43x 42x 41x 40x 39x 38x 37x 36x 35x 34x 33x 32x 31x 30x 29x 28x 27x 26x 25x 24x 23x 22x 21x 20x 19x 18x 17x 16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2S-P LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1

GE 2 GE 1
121424

EN
48x 2x

Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module Ports

The following sections describes the port types and port numbering on the service modules:
• Port Types
• Port Numbering

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-5
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Port Types
All Cisco EtherSwitch service modules, including the Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module, use
RJ-45 connectors to provide Fast Ethernet (FE) connections.
The single-wide 16- and 24-port Cisco EtherSwitch service modules have one additional RJ-45
connector to support a Gigabit Ethernet connection. The double-wide, 48-port Cisco EtherSwitch service
module has two SFP Gigabit Ethernet module slots.
The double-wide Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module has one SFP Gigabit Ethernet module
slot.

Note Both SFP and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces can support trunks.

Note Cisco EtherSwitch service modules do not have a physical console interface, but are accessible for
software configuration and other operational procedures through console sessions between the Cisco
EtherSwitch service module and the host router.

10/100 and 10/100/1000 Ports

You can set the 10/100 ports on the Cisco EtherSwitch service module to operate in any combination of
half duplex, full duplex, 10 Mbps, or 100 Mbps. You can set the 10/100/1000 ports to operate at
10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps in full duplex. You can also set these ports for speed and duplex
autonegotiation in compliance with IEEE 802.3ab. (The default setting is autonegotiate.)
When set for autonegotiation, the port senses the speed and duplex settings of the attached device and
advertises its own capabilities. If the connected device also supports autonegotiation, the Cisco
EtherSwitch service module port negotiates the best connection (that is, the fastest line speed that both
devices support and full-duplex transmission if the attached device supports it) and configures itself
accordingly. In all cases, the attached device must be within 100 meters
(328 feet).
All 10/100 ports on the NME-16ES-1G-P, NME-X-23ES-1G-P, NME-XD-24ES-1S-P, and
NME-XD-48ES-2S-P Cisco EtherSwitch service modules can provide power to IEEE 802.3af-compliant
and noncompliant Power over Ethernet (PoE) devices. PoE devices are Cisco IP phones, Cisco access
points, and some Cisco switches. PoE, formerly referred to as inline power, is available in all network
module form factors supported by Cisco modular access routers.
Table 18-2 provides information on Cisco EtherSwitch service module port speed and duplex
information.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Table 18-2 Port Speed and Duplex

Port Function Explanation

Speed The operating speed of the switch port. You can choose Auto (autonegotiation) if the
connected device can negotiate the link speed with the switch port.
The default settings are:
• Auto for the external 10/100-Mbps Fast Ethernet ports
• Auto for the external Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 (10/100/1000-Mbps) ports
• 1000 Mbps for the SFP module ports
Duplex The duplex mode of the switch port. Choose from one of the following:
• Auto (autonegotiation) if the connected device can negotiate with the switch
• Full (full duplex) if both devices can send data at the same time
• Half (half duplex) if one or both devices cannot send data at the same time
The default settings are:
• Auto for the external 10/100-Mbps Fast Ethernet ports
• Auto for the external Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 (10/100/1000-Mbps) ports
• Full for the 1000-Mbps ports (SFP)
Note You cannot set the port to half duplex if the port speed is set to Auto.

SFP Modules
The Cisco EtherSwitch service module supports Gigabit Ethernet SFP modules for fiber-optic
connections. These laser optical transceiver modules are field-replaceable, and you can insert them into
an SFP module slot. You use fiber-optic cables with LC connectors to connect to an SFP module. You
can use the SFP modules for gigabit uplink connections to other devices.
The SFP modules support 850- to 1550-nm nominal wavelengths.
The Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module and the 48-port Cisco EtherSwitch service module
have one or two SFP module slots into which you can install these SFP module types:
• 1000BASE-CWDM
• 1000BASE-LH
• 1000BASE-LX
• 1000BASE-SX
• 1000BASE-T
• 1000BASE-ZX
For more information about SFP modules, see the Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide
at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_module_installation_guide_book
09186a00802d2910.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-7
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Port Numbering
The Ethernet ports are numbered right to left, top to bottom. The port numbering scheme to configure
the ports on the Cisco EtherSwitch service module includes the port type (such as fa or fastethernet for
Fast Ethernet, or gi or gigabitethernet for Gigabit Ethernet), the stack member number (range is 1 to 9),
the module slot number (always 0), and the switch port number.
For example, to configure the Fast Ethernet port 3 on stack member 1, the interface configuration
command would be:
switch (config)# interface fa1/0/3

Cisco EtherSwitch Service Module LEDs

Cisco EtherSwitch service module LEDs provide green, amber, and off states for system and port status.
The following sections describe LEDs on the service modules:
• EN LED
• System LED
• Master LED
• Port Mode LEDs
• Port LEDs
• Port LEDs in Stack Mode

Note LEDs for System, Master, Port Mode, and PoE are available on the 24-port Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch
service module only. Port LEDs on nonstacking Cisco EtherSwitch service modules only show link
status.

EN LED
All Cisco EtherSwitch service modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module
has passed its self-test and is available to the router. (See Figure 18-5.) Table 18-3 lists the EN LED
colors and their meanings.

Figure 18-5 EN LED

16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x

NME-16ES-1G-P

GE 1
121533

EN
16x 2x

EN

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Table 18-3 EN LED

Color System Status

Off The Cisco EtherSwitch service module is not yet operational.
Green The Cisco EtherSwitch service module is operational.
Amber A stack error has occurred.

System LED
The Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module has a system (SYST) LED (see Figure 18-6), which
indicates that the module POST is in progress. Table 18-4 lists the system LED colors and their
meanings.

Figure 18-6 Mode Button and the EN, SYST, MASTR, and Mode LEDs

121531
NME-XD-
24ES- 24x 23x 22x 21x 20x 19x 18x 17x 16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x
1S-P WHILE HULC STACK CABLES
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT ARE ON THE FACEPLATE,
LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 ALL 6-32 THUMB SCREWS MUST
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 BE SECURED
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1

LINE PWR
GE 1

MODE
MASTR
DUPLX
STACK

SPEED

SYST
STAT
STACK 1 STACK 2
EN

24x 2x

LINE PWR

MODE
MASTR
DUPLX
STACK

SPEED

SYST
STAT
EN

Table 18-4 System (SYST) LED

LED Color Description

Off Module POST is not in progress.
Green Module POST is in progress.
Amber System is receiving power but is not functioning properly.

Master LED
The Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module has a master LED (see Figure 18-6) that shows the
stack master status. Table 18-5 lists the master LED colors and their meanings.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-9
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Table 18-5 Master (MASTR) LED

LED Color Description

Off The Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module is not the stack master.
Green The Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module is the stack master or a standalone
module.
Amber An error occurred when the Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module was
electing the stack master, or a stack error occurred.

Port Mode LEDs

The Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module has a Mode button that allows you to toggle through
the port LED modes. (See Figure 18-6.) The port modes determine the type of information displayed
through the port LEDs. For more information about port LEDs, see the “Port LEDs” section on
page 18-11.
To choose or change a mode, press the Mode button until the desired mode is highlighted. When you
change port modes, the meanings of the port LED colors also change.
Table 18-6 lists the modes and their meanings.

Table 18-6 Mode LEDs

LED Mode Description

STAT Port status The port status. In this mode, the LED shows link status and
link activity.
This is the default mode.
DUPLX Port duplex mode The port duplex mode: full duplex or half duplex.
SPEED Port speed The port operating speed: 10, 100, or 1000-Mbps.
STACK Stack member status The stack member status.
If your Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service modules are
stacked and you press the Mode button on any one of the Cisco
StackWise EtherSwitch service modules in the stack, all the
Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service modules in the stack
change to display the same selected mode. For example, if you
press the Mode button on the stack master to display SPEED,
all the other Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service modules in
the stack also display SPEED.
Cisco StackWise port The Cisco StackWise port status. In STACK mode, the last two
status port LEDs show the StackWise port status. See the “Port LEDs
in Stack Mode” section on page 18-12 for more information.
LINE PWR Inline power The inline power status.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-10 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Port LEDs
Each port has a port LED. These port LEDs, as a group or individually, display information about the
module and about the individual ports.
Table 18-7 explains how to interpret the port LED colors in different port modes on the Cisco StackWise
EtherSwitch service module.
Table 18-8 explains how to interpret the port LED colors for link status on the Cisco EtherSwitch service
modules.

Table 18-7 Port LEDs on the Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch Service Module

Port LED
Port Mode Color Meaning
STAT Off No link, or the port was administratively shut down.
(default mode) Green A link is present.
Flashing Activity is occurring. The port is transmitting or receiving data.
green
Alternating Link fault. Error frames can affect connectivity, and errors such as
green-amber excessive collisions, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) errors, and
alignment and jabber errors are monitored for a link fault.
Amber The port is blocked by the Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP) and is not
forwarding data.
Note After a port is reconfigured, the port LED can remain amber
for up to 30 seconds while STP checks the Cisco StackWise
EtherSwitch service module for possible loops.
Flashing The port is blocked by STP and is transmitting or receiving packets.
amber
DUPLX Off The port is operating in half-duplex mode.
Green The port is operating in full-duplex mode.
SPEED 10/100 and 10/100/1000 ports
Off The port is operating at 10 Mbps.
Green The port is operating at 100 Mbps.
Flashing The port is operating at 1000 Mbps.
green
SFP ports
Off The port is not operating.
Green The port is operating at 1000 Mbps.
STACK Off No stack member corresponds to that member number.
Flashing Member number of the selected Cisco EtherSwitch service module.
green
Green Member number of other stack member Cisco EtherSwitch service
modules.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-11
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Cisco EtherSwitch Services Modules

Table 18-7 Port LEDs on the Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch Service Module (continued)

Port LED
Port Mode Color Meaning
LINE PWR Off PoE mode is not selected. None of the 10/100 or 10/100/1000 ports
have been denied power or are in a fault condition.
Green PoE mode is selected, and the PoE status is shown on the port LEDs.
Blinking PoE mode is not selected. At least one of the 10/100 or 10/100/1000
amber ports has been denied power, or at least one of the 10/100 or
10/100/1000 ports has a PoE fault.

Table 18-8 Port LED on the Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules (Excluding the Cisco StackWise
EtherSwitch Service Module)

Port LED Color Description

Off No link, or the port was administratively shut down.
On PoE ports, no inline powered device (PD) detected, or the port is not
connected.
Green A link is present. The port or system is functioning normally.
On PoE ports, the Cisco EtherSwitch service module is providing power to a PD.
Flashing green Activity is occurring. The port is transmitting or receiving data. Module POST is
in progress.
Alternating Link fault.
green-amber
On PoE ports, the Cisco EtherSwitch service module is denying power to a PD,
or is experiencing a power delivery fault.
Amber The port is blocked by the Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP) and is not forwarding
data.
Note After a port is reconfigured, the port LED can remain amber for up to
30 seconds.

On a PoE port, indicates that the port is denied power and that the port is
administratively disabled.
The system is receiving power but is not functioning properly.
Flashing amber The port is blocked by STP and is transmitting or receiving packets.
On a PoE port, indicates an inline power delivery fault.

Port LEDs in Stack Mode

The port LEDs in Stack mode show the stack member number of the Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch
service modules in the stack. Up to nine service modules or switches can be members of a stack.
Therefore, only the first nine port LEDs are used in Stack mode to reflect stack membership.
For example, you have a stack of three EtherSwitch service modules. Their stack member numbers are
3, 4, and 8. If you select the Stack mode on member number 8, then port 8x flashes green. Ports 3x and
4x display continuous green, showing you have two other stack members whose member numbers 3 and
4. All other LEDs are off since there are no other members in the stack. (See Figure 18-7.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-12 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Power Considerations

In addition, the last two port LEDs on the Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service module show the status
of the StackWise ports.
For more information on stack member numbers, see the Catalyst 3750 Switch Software Configuration
Guide, Cisco IOS Release 12.2 at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/lan/cat3750/index.htm

Figure 18-7 Stack LEDs

12x 11
x 10x
9x 8x
7x 6x
5x 4x
3x 2x
1x

NME
24ES-XD-
2ST W- 24x 23x
22x 21x
20x 19x
18x 17x
16x
15x
14x 13x
12x 11x
10x
9x
8x 7x
6x 5x
4x
3x
24x 2x
1x

CLASS
NME-XD- LASERP1 LASER
PRODUI RODUKTPRODUCT
24ES- PRODUT LASER DEDER KLASSE
1S-P 24x 23x CTO LASERCLASSE 1
1 CLASE 1
22x 21x 1
20x 19x WHILE
GE 1 ARE ONHULC STACK
18x 17x ALL 6-32 THE FACEPL CABLES
THUMB ATE,
16x BE SECUR SCREW
15x

122217
ED S MUST
14x 13x
12x 11x
10x
9x 2x STACK
8x 7x
6x
1
5x
4x
3x
24x 2x STACK
LINE PWR

1x
2
STACK

CLASS
SPEED

LASERP1 LASER
DUPLX

PRODUI RODUKTPRODUCT
MASTR

MODE

PRODUT LASER DEDER KLASSE

STAT

CTO LASERCLASSE 1
SYST

1 CLASE 1
1
WHILE
GE 1 ARE ONHULC STACK
ALL 6-32 THE FACEPL CABLES EN
BE SECUR THUMB ATE,
SCREW
ED S MUST

2x STACK
1
STACK
LINE PWR

2
STACK

SPEED

DUPLX

MASTR

MODE
STAT

SYST

EN

Power Considerations
This section describes the power considerations for the router, the service module, and stacking the
service modules:
• Power Considerations for the Router
• Power Considerations for the Service Module
• Powering Considerations for a Switch Stack

Warning Voltages that present a shock hazard may exist on Power over Ethernet (PoE) circuits if
interconnections are made using uninsulated exposed metal contacts, conductors, or terminals.
Avoid using such interconnection methods, unless the exposed metal parts are located within a
restricted access location and users and service people who are authorized within the restricted
access location are made aware of the hazard. A restricted access area can be accessed only through
the use of a special tool, lock and key or other means of security. Statement 1072

Power Considerations for the Router

Cisco 2800 series, Cisco 3700 series, and Cisco 3800 series routers supply –48 V power internally (with
AC-IP power supplies) to the Cisco EtherSwitch service modules.
Note that the Cisco 3700 routers are not 802.3af-compliant, and the Cisco 2691 routers do not provide
PoE.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-13
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Connecting to the EtherSwitch Service Module Ports

For the Cisco 3745 router, the following specifications apply:

• These routers can have one or two internal –48 V power supplies. The internal supplies of these
routers are configured to be redundant by default.
• With a single power supply, these routers can provide up to 360 W. This is enough power for up to
forty-eight 7-W IP phones.

Power Considerations for the Service Module

The Cisco EtherSwitch service module supports inline powering of IP telephones with –48 V power.
This allows IP phones to be plugged into a standard RJ-45 jack and be powered from the switch rather
than from an AC wall outlet.

Caution To comply with Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS, this product is suitable for connection to intrabuilding or
nonexposed wiring or cabling only. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be
grounded at both ends.

The Cisco EtherSwitch service module distributes the –48 V power to each of the Ethernet ports that are
configured for PoE. Each port can be independently configured for PoE.

Powering Considerations for a Switch Stack

Consider the following guidelines before you power the Cisco EtherSwitch service modules in a stack:
• The sequence in which the Cisco EtherSwitch service modules are initially powered up might affect
the Cisco EtherSwitch service module that becomes the stack master.
• If you want a particular Cisco EtherSwitch service module to become the stack master, power up
that Cisco EtherSwitch service module first. This Cisco EtherSwitch service module becomes the
stack master and remains the stack master until a stack master re-election is required. After
approximately 10 seconds, power up the other Cisco EtherSwitch service modules in the stack.
• If you have no preference about which Cisco EtherSwitch service module becomes the stack master,
power up both Cisco EtherSwitch service modules in the stack within 10 seconds. These Cisco
EtherSwitch service modules participate in the stack master election.

Connecting to the EtherSwitch Service Module Ports

Fast Ethernet (FE) ports are used to connect PCs or workstations to the network.
A 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet (GE) port or a SFP module port can be used as an uplink port to connect
to another router or a server, or can trunk to another Cisco EtherSwitch service module or switch located
in the same chassis or in a separate installation.
Connecting a FE or GE port to the network requires a Category 5 cable with RJ-45 male connectors, not
provided with the network module. Category 5 cables are widely available.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-14 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Stacking the Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules

Stacking the Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules

This section provides this information:
• Planning the Stack
• Stack Cabling Considerations
• Connecting to the Cisco StackWise Ports

Planning the Stack

You can stack two Cisco EtherSwitch service modules in a stack by connecting them through their Cisco
StackWise ports.
Before connecting the Cisco EtherSwitch service modules in a stack, observe these planning
considerations:
• Length of cable. Depending on the configurations you have, you might need different sized cables.
If you require a 0.5-meter (0.6-ft) cable, 1-meter (3.3-ft) cable, or 3-meter (9.8-ft) cable, you can
order it from your Cisco supplier.
• Make sure that there is access to the front of the rack if you are planning to stack the Cisco
EtherSwitch service modules.
• For concepts and procedures to manage Cisco EtherSwitch service module stacks, see the
Catalyst 3750 Switch Software Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 12.2 at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/lan/cat3750/index.htm
• See these sections for additional considerations: the “Powering Considerations for a Switch Stack”
section on page 18-14 and the “Stack Cabling Considerations” section on page 18-15.

Note Creating a stack of multiple Catalyst 3750 switch modules or service modules (using the stacking ports
on the Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service modules) requires specific cabling.

Stack Cabling Considerations

The illustrations in this section display cabling configuration examples that show the stack bandwidth
and possible stack partitioning.
Figure 18-8 shows a stack of Cisco EtherSwitch service modules and Catalyst 3750 switches that
provides full bandwidth and redundant connections.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-15
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Stacking the Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules

Figure 18-8 Switch Stack with Full Bandwidth Connections

A= ACT A= FDX
S= SPEED A= LINK
A FE 0/1 FE 0/0 A
F F
S S
L L

PVDM2 PVDM1 PVDM0 AIM1 AIM0

NME-XD- 24x 23x 22x 21x 20x 19x 18x 17x 16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x
24ES- WHILE HULC STACK CABLES
ARE ON THE FACEPLATE,
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
1S-P LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1
ALL 6-32 THUMB SCREWS MUST
BE SECURED
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1

LINE PWR
GE 1

MODE
MASTR
DUPLX
STACK

SPEED

SYST
STAT
EN

24x 2x

A B

121915
Figure 18-9 shows a stack of Cisco EtherSwitch service modules and Catalyst 3750 switches with
incomplete cabling connections. This stack provides only half bandwidth and does not have redundant
connections.

Figure 18-9 Switch Stack with Half Bandwidth Connections

A= ACT A= FDX
S= SPEED A= LINK
A FE 0/1 FE 0/0 A
F F
S S
L L

PVDM2 PVDM1 PVDM0 AIM1 AIM0

NME-XD-
24ES- 24x 23x 22x 21x 20x 19x 18x 17x 16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x WHILE HULC STACK CABLES
ARE ON THE FACEPLATE,
1S-P CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT ALL 6-32 THUMB SCREWS MUST
LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 BE SECURED
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1

LINE PWR
GE 1

MODE
STACK 2

MASTR
DUPLX
STACK

SPEED

SYST
STAT
EN

24x 2x

B
121918

STACK 2

Figure 18-10 and Figure 18-11 show examples of stacks of Cisco EtherSwitch service modules and
Catalyst 3750 switches with failover conditions.
In Figure 18-10, the cable in link B is bad; therefore, this stack provides only half bandwidth and does
not have redundant connections.
In Figure 18-11, link B is bad, and the stack is partitioned into two separate stacks. The Cisco
EtherSwitch service module 1 becomes the stack master of one stack and one of the Catalyst 3750
switches becomes the stack master of the second stack.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-16 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Stacking the Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules

Figure 18-10 Example of a Stack with a Failover Condition

A= ACT A= FDX
S= SPEED A= LINK
A FE 0/1 FE 0/0 A
F F
S S
L L

PVDM2 PVDM1 PVDM0 AIM1 AIM0

NME-XD-
24ES- 24x 23x 22x 21x 20x 19x 18x 17x 16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x WHILE HULC STACK CABLES
ARE ON THE FACEPLATE,
1S-P CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT ALL 6-32 THUMB SCREWS MUST
LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 BE SECURED
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1

LINE PWR
GE 1

MODE
MASTR
DUPLX
STACK

SPEED

SYST
STAT
EN

24x 2x

A B

121916
Figure 18-11 Example of a Partitioned Stack with a Failover Condition

A= ACT A= FDX
S= SPEED A= LINK
A FE 0/1 FE 0/0 A
F F
S S
L L

PVDM2 PVDM1 PVDM0 AIM1 AIM0

NME-XD-
24ES- 24x 23x 22x 21x 20x 19x 18x 17x 16x 15x 14x 13x 12x 11x 10x 9x 8x 7x 6x 5x 4x 3x 2x 1x WHILE HULC STACK CABLES
ARE ON THE FACEPLATE,
1S-P CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT ALL 6-32 THUMB SCREWS MUST
LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 BE SECURED
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
1

LINE PWR
GE 1

MODE
STACK 2

MASTR
DUPLX
STACK

SPEED

SYST
STAT
EN

24x 2x

B
STACK 2 121917

Connecting to the Cisco StackWise Ports

Follow these steps to connect the cable to the Cisco StackWise ports:

Step 1 Insert one end of the Cisco StackWise cable into the Cisco StackWise port. See Figure 18-12.

Note Always use a Cisco-approved Cisco StackWise cable to connect the Cisco StackWise
EtherSwitch service modules.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 18-17
 Chapter 18 Connecting Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules
Stacking the Cisco EtherSwitch Service Modules

Figure 18-12 Connecting the Cisco StackWise Cable

CLASS
LASERP1 LASER PRO
PRODUI RODUKT DERDUCT
T
PRODUC LASER DE CLAKLASSE 1
TO LAS SSE
1 ER CLA 1
SE 1 WHILE
ARE ONHULC STACK
GE 1 ALL 6-32 THE FACEPL CABLES
BE SEC THUMB SCREWSATE,
URED MUST

STACK
2x 1
ST

122215
Step 2 Insert the other end of the cable into the connector of the other Cisco StackWise EtherSwitch service
module and secure the screws tightly. See Figure 18-13.

Figure 18-13 Securing the Cisco StackWise Cable

CLASS
LASERP1 LASER PRO
PRODUI RODUKT DERDUCT
T
PRODUC LASER DE CLAKLASSE 1
TO LAS SSE
1 ER CLA 1
SE 1 WHILE
ARE ONHULC STACK
GE 1 ALL 6-32 THE FACEPL CABLES
BE SEC THUMB SCREWSATE,
URED MUST

STACK
2x 1
ST
122216

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

18-18 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 19
Connecting Content Engine Network Modules for
Caching and Content Delivery

This chapter describes how to connect content engine (CE) network modules for caching and content
delivery and contains the following sections:
• CE Network Modules, page 19-1
• CE Network Module LEDs, page 19-4
• Online Insertion and Removal with a CE Network Module, page 19-5
• Related Documents, page 19-7

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

CE Network Modules
This section provides overview information on CE network modules. The following CE network
modules are available on Cisco modular routers:
• CE network module with a 40-GB Disk Expansion Module (NM-CE-BP-40G-K9) (see Figure 19-1)
• CE network module with a 80-GB Disk Expansion Module (NM-CE-BP-80G-K9) (see Figure 19-1)
• CE network module with a SCSI Controller Expansion Module and a 68-pin SCSI connector for
connection to an external storage array (NM-CE-BP-SCSI-K9) (see Figure 19-2)
The 80-GB CE network module can run Application and Content Networking System (ACNS) software
or Cisco Wide Area File Services (WAFS) software. The 40-GB CE network module and the CE network
module with a SCSI controller can run ACNS software only. For information on configuring ACNS or
WAFS, see the documentation listed in the “Related Documents” section on page 19-7.

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the CE network modules (NM-CE-BP-40G-K9 and NM-CE-BP-80G-K9) only to intrabuilding
or nonexposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be
grounded at both ends.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 19-1
 Chapter 19 Connecting Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery
CE Network Modules

Note The NM-CE-BP network module clock may be reset to 1980 if it is powered off for a long period. Several
applications that depend on correct time being configured on the network module may not work in such
a scenario. Therefore we strongly recommended that the NM-CE-BP network module be configured for
NTP using the ntp server server Cisco IOS command, either after a software upgrade from Application
and Content Networking System software Release 4.2.x to Release 5.x, or on obtaining a new network
module, to maintain correct time on the network module.

Note There is no backup power for a network module’s real time clock. Once power has been turned off or the
network module has been removed from the router, the real time clock stops.

Figure 19-1 Faceplate for the CE Network Module with 40- or 80-GB Disk Expansion Module

NM-CE-BP
DISK

LINK ACT

PWR EN CF

72090
FastEthernet 0

Figure 19-2 Faceplate for the CE Network Module with SCSI Connector Expansion Module

NM-CE-BP
DISK

LINK ACT

PWR EN CF

72089
FastEthernet 0

Note Some early CE network modules have an inactive USB port on the faceplate. This USB port has been
removed in later Cisco CE network modules.

Tip For information on removing, replacing, and installing the expansion modules, see the Installing
Expansion Modules on Cisco CE Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery document.

Connecting CE Network Modules to the Network

To connect a CE network module to the network, from the RJ-45 port on the CE network module use a
straight-through two-pair Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable to connect to a switch, hub,
repeater, server, or other network device. (See Figure 19-3.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

19-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 19 Connecting Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery
CE Network Modules

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5 cables.

Figure 19-3 Connecting a CE Network Module to a Fast Ethernet Hub

NM-CE-BP
DISK

LINK ACT

PWR EN
FastEthernet 0
CF

Fast Ethernet
RJ-45
Category 5
or UTP cable

72347
Fast Ethernet hub

Connecting CE Network Modules with SCSI Controller Expansion Modules to

an External Cisco Storage Array

Timesaver Connecting the external Cisco storage array requires you to reboot the network module or router. To save
time, connect the external Cisco storage array to the CE network module before powering on the router
or network module.

To connect a CE network module with a SCSI controller expansion module to an external storage array,
use a 68-pin, low-voltage differential (LVD) SCSI cable. Connect the cable to the SCSI port on the
network module to the SCSI port on the external Cisco storage array. (See Figure 19-4.)
Cisco Storage Array 6 is supported on the CE network module with SCSI controller expansion module.
(See the Cisco Storage Array 6 Installation and Configuration Guide.)

Tip Use either a 36- or 108-inch LVD SCSI cable, depending on the length required between the router and
the external storage array.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 19-3
 Chapter 19 Connecting Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery
CE Network Module LEDs

Figure 19-4 Connecting a CE Network Module with SCSI Controller Expansion Module to an External
Cisco Storage Array

NM-CE-BP
DISK

LINK ACT

PWR EN CF
FastEthernet 0

72351
VHDCI
connector
on I/O module

CE Network Module LEDs

All CE network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
CE network modules also display an additional power (PWR) LED and a CompactFlash (CF) LED on
the faceplate, and two additional LEDs for the Fast Ethernet port. (See Figure 19-5 and Table 19-1.)

Figure 19-5 CE Network Module LEDs

DISK LINK ACT

NM-CE-BP
DISK

LINK ACT

EN
72353

PWR
CF
FastEthernet 0

PWR EN CF

Table 19-1 Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery LEDs

LED Meaning
ACT There is activity on the Fast Ethernet connection.
CF The compact flash module is active.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

19-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 19 Connecting Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery
Online Insertion and Removal with a CE Network Module

Table 19-1 Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery LEDs (continued)

LED Meaning
DISK There is activity on the 40- or 80-GB disk expansion module hard
drive.
Note The faceplate for the CE network module with SCSI controller
expansion module also displays the disk LED, but the LED is
not active.
EN The module has passed self-test and is available to the router.
LINK The Fast Ethernet connection is available to the network module.
PWR Power is available to the network module.

Online Insertion and Removal with a CE Network Module

Some Cisco modular access routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the
router or affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal
(OIR). OIR of network modules provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing
information, and ensures session preservation. To find out if the router you are working on allows OIR,
see the router model’s hardware installation guide.

Caution Unlike other network modules, CE network modules use hard disks. Online removal of disks without
proper shutdown can result in file system corruption and might render the disk unusable. The
operating system on the CE network module must be shut down in an orderly fashion before the
network module is removed.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a network module, install
another module exactly like it in its place. If you remove a 2-slot network module (along with any
installed WAN or voice interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your type of router.
To perform online removal of a CE network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps
with the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a CE network module console access session using the following command:
Router# service-module content-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

CE-netmodule con now available

Press RETURN to get started!

CE-netmodule> enable
CE-netmodule#

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 19-5
 Chapter 19 Connecting Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery
Online Insertion and Removal with a CE Network Module

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the content engine using the following command from the
CE-netmodule prompt:
CE-netmodule# copy running-config tftp tftp-server-address filename

Step 3 Exit the CE network module console access session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.
Step 4 On the router, clear the CE console access session using the following command:
Router# service-module content-engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful halt of the CE network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# copy tftp running-config tftp-server-addresss filename

Step 6 Shut down the content engine interface:

Router (config)# interface content-engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Step 7 Unplug all network interface cables from the CE network module.
Step 8 Loosen the two captive screws holding the CE network module in the chassis slot.
Step 9 Slide the CE network module out of the slot.
Step 10 Align the replacement CE network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the
slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill
the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 11 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 12 Reconnect the network interface cables previously removed in Step 7.
Step 13 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power and enable LEDs on the front panel also
are on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is operational.
Step 14 Initiate a CE network module console access session with the following command:
Router# service-module content-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

CE-netmodule con now available

Press RETURN to get started!

CE-netmodule> enable
CE-netmodule#

Step 15 Restore the content engine’s running configuration by using the following command from the
CE-netmodule prompt:
CE-netmodule# copy tftp running-config tftp-server-address filename

Step 16 Exit the CE network module console access session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

19-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 19 Connecting Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery
Related Documents

Step 17 On the router, clear the CE console access session using the following command:
Router# service-module content-engine slot/unit session clear

Related Documents
For information on configuring ACNS, see the documentation at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/webscale/uce/
For information on configuring WAFS, see the documentation at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6469/tsd_products_support_series_home.html

Tip For information on obtaining documentation, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
For information on obtaining technical assistance, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on
page xi.

Hardware Documentation
For information on installing and removing CE network module expansion modules, see the Installing
Expansion Modules on Cisco CE Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery document.

Cisco IOS Software Documentation

For a description of the Cisco IOS features supported on CE network modules, see the Content Engine
Network Module for Caching and Content Delivery document.

Content Engine Documentation

For information on the Cisco Content Engine, refer to the documents listed under Cisco Content Engine.

Cisco Storage Array Documentation

For information on installing and configuring the Cisco Storage Array 6, refer to the Cisco Storage Array
6 Installation and Configuration Guide.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 19-7
 Chapter 19 Connecting Content Engine Network Modules for Caching and Content Delivery
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

19-8 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 20
Connecting T3/E3 Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect T3/E3 network modules for modular access routers and contains
the following sections:
• 1-Port T3/E3 Network Modules, page 20-1
• Connecting T3/E3 Network Modules to the Network, page 20-2
• T3/E3 Network Module LEDs, page 20-3
• Related Documents, page 20-3

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

1-Port T3/E3 Network Modules

The NM-1T3/E3 network module is a single-port universal T3/E3 network module with integrated
CSU/DSU, clear channel, and subrate support. (See Figure 20-1.) Channels on the network module can
be configured as either T3 or E3 through Cisco IOS software.

Figure 20-1 1-Port T3/E3 Network Module Faceplate

NM-1T3/E3 SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING NETWORK MODULE

T3/E3
TX RX

CD LP AIS FERF/RAI AL EN
72536

Note The NM-1T3/E3 network module provides subrate T3 support for Digital Link, Kentrox, Larscom,
Verilink, and Adtran. The NM-1T3/E3 network module also provides subrate E3 support for Digital
Link and Kentrox.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 20-1
 Chapter 20 Connecting T3/E3 Network Modules
Connecting T3/E3 Network Modules to the Network

Connecting T3/E3 Network Modules to the Network

To connect a T3/E3 network module to the network, use a 75-ohm 728-A coaxial cable to connect the
BNC connector on the network module to a networking device. (See Figure 20-2.)

Warning This equipment contains a ring signal generator (ringer), which is a source of hazardous voltage. Do
not touch the RJ-11 (phone) port wires (conductors), the conductors of a cable connected to the RJ-11
port, or the associated circuit-board when the ringer is active. The ringer is activated by an incoming
call. Statement 1042

Warning If the symbol of suitability with an overlaid cross appears above a port, you must not connect the port
to a public network that follows the European Union standards. Connecting the port to this type of
public network can cause severe injury or damage your router. Statement 1031

Caution To minimize transient surges, the internal wiring should not be routed in the same conduit with power
lines or external telephone lines.

Figure 20-2 Connecting a T3/E3 Network Module to a Networking Device (Cisco 7603 Router Shown)

WS-X6K-SUP2-2GE

T
US LE M
EM O G
AT ST NS
M T
ST SY
R SE
CO PW RE
Switch Load
CONSOLE 100%
PORT
CONSOLE MODE PORT 1
SUPERVISOR2 PORT 2
PCMCIA
EJECT
1%

OSM-4OC12 POS-SI K
LIN K
LIN

72715
1 E
3 TIV E
AC RX TX TIV E
TX AC RX TX TIV
US E
AT TX AC RX TX TIV
ST T RX TX AC RX TX
2 SE
4 RE R RX TX
IE M 1 RX
4 PORT OC-12 POS SM RR AR RT R
IR
CA AL PO
IE M 2 RX
K K RR AR RT R
IE M 3
LIN 1 2 LIN K K CA AL PO RR AR RT R
IE M
LIN 4 LIN CA AL PO
4
3 RR AR RT
CA AL PO
OSM-4OC12 POS-SI

1 E
3 TIV E
AC RX TX TIV E
TX AC RX TX TIV
US E
AT TX AC RX TX TIV
ST T RX TX AC RX TX
2 SE
4 RE R RX TX
IE M 1 RX
4 PORT OC-12 POS SM RR AR RT R
IR
CA AL PO
IE M 2 RX
K K RR AR RT R
IE M 3
LIN 1 2 LIN K K CA AL PO RR AR RT R
IE M
LIN 4 LIN CA AL PO
4
3 RR AR RT
CA AL PO

RX TX
NM-1T3/E3 SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING NETWORK MODULE

T3/E3
TX RX

CD LP AIS FERF/RAI AL EN

TX RX

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

20-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 20 Connecting T3/E3 Network Modules
T3/E3 Network Module LEDs

Tip When connecting the T3/E3 network module to a port adapter used in another router series, verify that
you are connecting the TX port on the network module with the RX port on the port adapter, and the TX
port on the port adapter to the RX port on the network module.

T3/E3 Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router. See Figure 20-3 and Table 20-1 for LEDs on the T3/E3 network
module.

Figure 20-3 T3/E3 LEDs

NM-1T3/E3 SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING NETWORK MODULE

T3/E3
TX RX

CD LP AIS FERF/RAI AL EN

72537
CD FERF/RAI AL EN
LED LED LED LED
LP AIS
LED LED

Table 20-1 T3/E3 Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
CD Green indicates that a signal is present on the port.
LP Yellow indicates that a loopback condition is present on the port.
AIS Yellow indicates an alarm on the DS3 transmission.
FERF/RAI Yellow indicates a remote failure at the far end of the connection.
AL Yellow indicates that the port is out of frame.
EN Green indicates that the network module has passed self-test and is available to
the router.

Related Documents
For additional information, see the following documents.

Tip For information on obtaining documentation, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
For information on obtaining technical assistance, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on
page xi.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 20-3
 Chapter 20 Connecting T3/E3 Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco IOS Software Documentation

For information on Cisco IOS software features specific to the T3/E3 network module, see the Clear
Channel T3/E3 Network Module with Integrated CSU/DSU document.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

20-4 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 21
Connecting Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Gigabit Ethernet network modules for modular access routers and
contains the following sections:
• Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules, page 21-1
• Gigabit Ethernet Network Module LEDs, page 21-4
• Related Documents, page 21-5

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules

The Gigabit Ethernet network module provides single-port Gigabit Ethernet connectivity through an
installed Gigabit interface converter (GBIC). The GBIC determines the type of connectivity available to
the network module. (See Figure 21-1.)

Figure 21-1 Gigabit Ethernet Network Module Faceplate

NM-1GE
LINK
RX
TX

GBIC EN
72534

See Table 21-1 for information on connection types supported by each GBIC.

Note 1000BASE-T ports cannot be looped back through use of an external loopback cable.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 21-1
 Chapter 21 Connecting Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules
Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules

Table 21-1 Gigabit Ethernet Connection and Cable Types Supported on Gigabit Ethernet Network
Modules

GBIC Part Number GBIC Description Required Cable Specifications

GBIC-ZX= Extended distance 1000BASE-ZX 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connectors1
GBIC-LX/LH= Long-wavelength or long-haul 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
1000BASE-LX/LH SC connectors1
Tip If using an MMF cable, install
a mode-conditioning patch
cord (CAB-GELX-625).
GBIC-SX= Short-wavelength 1000BASE-SX 62.5-micron MMF cable (orange) with
SC connectors
GBIC-T= UTP Category 5 or 6 1000BASE-T Category 5 or 6 UTP cable with RJ-45
connectors
CWDM-GBIC-1470= 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC 1470 nm 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connectors1
CWDM-GBIC-1490= 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC 1490 nm 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connectors1
CWDM-GBIC-1510= 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC 1510 nm 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connectors1
CWDM-GBIC-1530= 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC 1530 nm 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connectors1
CWDM-GBIC-1550= 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC 1550 nm 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connectors1
CWDM-GBIC-1570= 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC 1570 nm 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connectors1
CWDM-GBIC-1590= 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC 1590 nm 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connector1s
CWDM-GBIC-1610= 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC 1610 nm 10-micron SMF cable (yellow) with
SC connectors1
1. 10-dB SMF optical attenuators with SC connectors (two per duplex cable) are required for distances less than 25 km (15.5
miles). Install the attenuators between the male SC connector on the cable and the female SC connector on the network
module.

Installing and Removing GBICs

Gigabit Ethernet network modules support GBIC hot-swapping. To save time, do not power down the
router and network module before installing or removing the GBIC.

Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable
is connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 240

Note GBICs from other vendors are not supported by the Cisco Gigabit Ethernet network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

21-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 21 Connecting Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules
Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules

Step 1 Hold down the clips on the side of the GBIC while inserting the GBIC into the GBIC slot in the network
module faceplate. (See Figure 21-2.)

Figure 21-2 Installing a GBIC into a Network Module

NM-1GE

LINK
RX
TX
GBIC EN

72705
Step 2 Release the side clips on the GBIC.
Step 3 Connect the Gigabit Ethernet network module to the network. (See Figure 21-4.) If installing the GBIC
in an uninstalled network module, install the network module (see Chapter 2, “Installing Cisco Network
Modules in Cisco Access Routers”) before connecting the network module to the network.

Laser Safety Guidelines

Optical GBICs use a small laser to generate the fiber-optic signal. Keep the transmit port covered
whenever a cable is not connected to the port.
The module faceplate carries a Class 1 laser warning label. (See Figure 21-3.)

Figure 21-3 Class 1 Laser Warning Label

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1

NM-1GE CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERPRODUCT DER KLASSE 1
PRODUCT LASER DE CLASSE1
PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1
LINK
RX
TX

GBIC EN
82495

Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable
is connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 240

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 21-3
 Chapter 21 Connecting Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules
Gigabit Ethernet Network Module LEDs

Warning Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and regulations.
Statement 1040

Connecting Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules to the Network

Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber cable
is connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 240

Use the cables listed in Table 21-1 to connect the GBIC connectors on the network module to a
networking device. (See Figure 21-4.)

Figure 21-4 Connecting a Gigabit Ethernet Network Module to a Cisco 7200 Series Router

TOKEN RING

6
3
2
1
0
5

FAST ETHERNET
ETHERNET 10BT
D
LE

5
K

RJ4
AB
LINK

4
LIN
D

MII
LE

EN
AB

3
1
EN
3

2
0

0
ETHERNET-10BFL
FAST SERIAL
EN

TX
RX
EN

TX
RX
TX
RX
CD
RC

LB
RD

TX
RX
TC
TD
CD
RC

LB

TX
RD

RX
TC

2
TD
CD
RC

LB
RD
TC
TD
CD
RC

LB
RD
TC
TD

4
3
2
1
0
1

Cisco 7200
ET

FAST ETHERNET INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER

1

II

ES
T

M
O

R
FE
SL

PU
45
J-

C
R

72706
Series

0
D
LE
AB
EN

K R
N 5
T

O PW
0

IN 5
IA

E J4
E II
EC

L J4
M
T

K
N
C

R
O

1O
EJ
M

SL
PC

NM-1GE
LINK
RX
TX

GBIC EN

Gigabit Ethernet Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router. See Figure 21-5 and Table 21-2 for LEDs specific to the Gigabit
Ethernet network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

21-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 21 Connecting Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules
Related Documents

Figure 21-5 Gigabit Ethernet Network Module LEDs

NM-1GE

LINK
RX
TX
GBIC EN

72535
RX TX LINK EN
LED LED LED LED

Table 21-2 Gigabit Ethernet Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
LINK Green indicates that a link has been established between the network module and another
networking device.
TX Flashing green indicates transmit activity.
RX Flashing green indicates receive activity.
EN Green indicates that the network module has passed its self-test and is available to the router.

Related Documents
For additional information, see the following documents.

Tip For information on obtaining documentation, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
For information on obtaining technical assistance, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on
page xi.

CWDM Passive Optical System Documentation

For more information on the CWDM Passive Optical System, which is often used with CWDM GBICs,
see the Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM Series Passive Optical System Installation Note document.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 21-5
 Chapter 21 Connecting Gigabit Ethernet Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

21-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 22
Connecting Cisco Intrusion Detection System
Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Cisco intrusion detection system (CIDS) network modules for
modular access routers and contains the following sections:
• CIDS Network Modules, page 22-1
• CIDS Network Module LEDs, page 22-2
• Online Insertion and Removal with a CIDS Network Module, page 22-3
• Related Documents, page 22-4

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

CIDS Network Modules

This section provides information on the CIDS network module (NM-CIDS-K9) (see Figure 22-1)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the CIDS network module (NM-CIDS-K9) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or
cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Figure 22-1 Faceplate for the NM-CIDS-K9 Network Module

NM-CIDS-K9
DISK

Command & Control

LINK ACT

PWR EN
95059

CF
FastEthernet 0

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 22-1
 Chapter 22 Connecting Cisco Intrusion Detection System Network Modules
CIDS Network Module LEDs

Connecting CIDS Network Modules to the Network

To connect a CIDS network module to the network, use a straight-through two-pair Category 5
unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable to connect the RJ-45 port on the CIDS network module to a switch,
hub, repeater, server, or other network device. (See Figure 22-2.)

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5 cables.

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the CIDS network module (NM-CIDS-K9) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or
cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Figure 22-2 Connecting a CIDS Network Module to a Fast Ethernet Hub

NM-CIDS-K9
DISK

Command & Control

LINK ACT

PWR EN CF
FastEthernet 0

Fast Ethernet
RJ-45
Category 5
or UTP cable

95061

Fast Ethernet hub

CIDS Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
All CIDS network modules display an additional power (PWR) LED and a CompactFlash (CF) LED on
the faceplate, and two additional LEDs for the Fast Ethernet port (see Figure 22-3 and Table 22-1).

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

22-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 22 Connecting Cisco Intrusion Detection System Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal with a CIDS Network Module

Figure 22-3 CIDS Network Module LEDs

LINK ACT

NM-CIDS-K9
DISK

Command & Control

LINK ACT

EN

95060
PWR
CF
FastEthernet 0

PWR EN CF

Table 22-1 CIDS Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
ACT There is activity on the Fast Ethernet connection.
CF The CompactFlash module is active.
Note Since CompactFlash is not supported on the NM-CIDS-K9, this LED is not active
except during self-test.
DISK There is activity on the 20-GB disk expansion module hard drive.
EN The module has passed self-test and is available to the router.
LINK The Fast Ethernet connection is available to the network module.
PWR Power is available to the network module.

Online Insertion and Removal with a CIDS Network Module

Some Cisco modular access routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the
router or affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal
(OIR). OIR of network modules provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing
information, and ensures session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, CIDS network modules use hard disks. Online removal of disks without
proper shutdown can result in file system corruption and might render the disk unusable. The operating
system on the CIDS network module must be shut down in an orderly fashion before the network module
is removed.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a network module, install another
module exactly like it in its place. If you remove a two-slot network module (along with any installed
WAN or voice interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your type of router.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 22-3
 Chapter 22 Connecting Cisco Intrusion Detection System Network Modules
Related Documents

To perform online removal of a CIDS network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps
with the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Perform a graceful halt of the CIDS network module by using the following command:
Router# service-module IDS-Sensor slot/0 shutdown
Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

Wait for the following status message (it may take a minute or two):
%SERVICEMODULE-5-SHUTDOWN2:Service module IDS-Sensor1/0 shutdown complete

Step 2 Unplug the network interface cable from the CIDS network module.
Step 3 Loosen the two captive screws holding the CIDS network module in the chassis slot.
Step 4 Slide the CIDS network module out of the slot.
Step 5 Align the replacement CIDS network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into
the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill the
unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 6 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 7 Reconnect the network interface cable previously removed in Step 2.
Step 8 Tighten the two captive screws on the faceplate.
Step 9 Reset the CIDS network module using the reset command.
Router# service-module IDS-Sensor slot/0 reset

Use reset only to recover from shutdown or failed state

Warning: May lose date on the hard disc!
Do you want to reset?[confirm]

Step 10 Press Enter to confirm the request. The CIDS network module resets itself.
Step 11 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power and enable LEDs on the front panel also
are on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is operational.

Related Documents
For additional information, refer to the following documents.

Tip For information on obtaining documentation, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
For information on obtaining technical assistance, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on
page xi.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

22-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 22 Connecting Cisco Intrusion Detection System Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco IDS Software Documentation

Tip For more information on Cisco IDS software documentation, see the Cisco Intrusion Detection System
(IDS) Hardware and Software Documentation Guide.

For a list of caveats, documentation changes, and important last-minute information for Cisco Intrusion
Detection System Version 4.1, see the Release Notes for the Cisco Intrusion Detection System Version
4.1.
For a quick overview of the tasks required to install and initially configure Cisco IDS components, see
the Quick Start Guide for the Cisco Intrusion Detection System Version 4.1.
For installation instructions for all Cisco IDS version 4.1 hardware components, including appliances,
modules, accessories, and upgrades (such as the IDS XL card), and basic configuration tasks using
command line interface (CLI), see the Cisco Intrusion Detection System Appliance and Module
Installation and Configuration Guide Version 4.1.
For information on installing and using Cisco IDS Device Manager and Cisco IDS Event Viewer, see
the Installing and Using the Cisco Intrusion Detection System Device Manager and Event Viewer
Version 4.1.
For IDS CLI reference, including syntax and usage guidelines, see the Cisco Intrusion Detection System
Command Reference Version 4.1.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 22-5
 Chapter 22 Connecting Cisco Intrusion Detection System Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

22-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 23
Connecting Cisco Unity Express Network
Modules

This chapter describes Cisco Unity Express network modules for modular access routers and contains
the following sections:
• Cisco Unity Express Network Module Overview, page 23-1
• Cisco Unity Express Network Module LEDs, page 23-2
• Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Unity Express Network Module, page 23-3
• Related Documents, page 23-5

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Cisco Unity Express Network Module Overview

This section provides information on the Cisco Unity Express network module (NM-CUE). (See
Figure 23-1.)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the Cisco Unity Express network module (NM-CUE) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring
or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Note The Fast Ethernet port and CompactFlash slot, though available on the hardware, are not supported by
the Cisco Unity Express network module. The compact Flash slot has a metal cover.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 23-1
 Chapter 23 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Network Modules
Cisco Unity Express Network Module LEDs

Figure 23-1 NM-CUE Faceplate

NM-CUE
DISK

NOT SUPPORTED
LINK ACT

EN

88734
PWR
CF
FastEthernet 0

Cisco Unity Express Network Module LEDs

All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
All Cisco Unity Express network modules display an additional power (PWR) LED and a CompactFlash
(CF) LED on the faceplate, and two additional LEDs for the Fast Ethernet port. (See Figure 23-2 and
Table 23-1.)

Note The CF and Fast Ethernet port LEDs are not used by the Cisco Unity Express network module.

Figure 23-2 NM-CUE LEDs

DISK LINK ACT

NM-CUE
DISK

NOT SUPPORTED
LINK ACT

EN
88735
PWR
CF
FastEthernet 0

PWR EN CF

Table 23-1 Cisco Unity Express Network Module LEDs

LED Meaning
ACT There is activity on the Fast Ethernet connection.
Note This LED is not used on the NM-CUE.
CF The compact Flash module is active.
Note This LED is not used on the NM-CUE.
DISK There is activity on the 20-GB disk-expansion module hard drive.
EN The module has passed self-test and is available to the router.
LINK The Fast Ethernet connection is available to the network module.
Note This LED is not used on the NM-CUE.
PWR Power is available to the network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

23-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 23 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Unity Express Network Module

Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Unity Express

Network Module
Some Cisco modular access routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the
router or affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is often called hot-swapping or online
insertion and removal (OIR). Hot-swapping of network modules provides uninterrupted operation to
network users, maintains routing information, and ensures session preservation.

Caution Cisco Unity Express network modules use hard disks. Online removal of disks without proper shutdown
can result in file system corruption and might render the disk unusable. The operating system on the
Cisco Unity Express network module must be shut down in an orderly fashion before the network
module is removed.

Caution Cisco routers support hot-swapping with similar modules only. If you remove a network module, install
another module exactly like it in its place.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your type of router.
To perform online removal of a Cisco Unity Express network module and insertion of a replacement,
follow these steps with the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a Cisco Unity Express network module console access session using the following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

SE-netmodule> enable
Password:
SE-netmodule#

SE-netmodule con now available

Press RETURN to get started!

SE-netmodule> enable
Password:
SE-netmodule#

Timesaver The Cisco Unity Express network module uses a blank password. Press Enter at the password prompt.

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the Cisco Unity Express network module using the following
command from the SE-netmodule prompt:
SE-netmodule# copy running-config ftp:

Address or name or remote host? username/password/remote host

Destination filename? filename

Step 3 Exit the Cisco Unity Express network module console access session by pressing Ctrl-Shift-6, followed
by x.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 23-3
 Chapter 23 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Unity Express Network Module

Step 4 On the router, clear the Cisco Unity Express network module console access session by using the
following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful halt of the Cisco Unity Express network module disk drive by using the following
command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port shutdown

Step 6 Loosen the two captive screws holding the Cisco Unity Express network module in the chassis slot.
Step 7 Slide the Cisco Unity Express network module out of the slot.
Step 8 Align the replacement Cisco Unity Express network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide
it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill the
unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 9 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 10 Tighten the two captive screws on the module faceplate.
Step 11 Check that the network module LEDs come on and that the power and enable LEDs on the front panel
have also come on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is operational.
Step 12 Initiate a Cisco Unity Express network module console access session with the following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

SE-netmodule con now available

Press RETURN to get started!

SE-netmodule> enable
SE-netmodule#

Step 13 Restore the Cisco Unity Express running configuration by using the following command from the
SE-netmodule prompt:
SE-netmodule# copy ftp: running-config

Address or name or remote host? username/password/remote host

Source filename? filename

Step 14 Exit the Cisco Unity Express network module console access session by pressing Ctrl-Shift-6, followed
by x.
Step 15 On the router, clear the console access session using the following command:
Router# service-module service-engine slot/port session clear

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

23-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 23 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Network Modules
Related Documents

Related Documents
For additional information, see the following documents.

Tip For information on obtaining documentation, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
For a list of orderable documentation, search the Cisco Price List under “Documentation.”

Cisco Unity Express Software Documentation

For end-user information on Cisco Unity Express software, see the Cisco Unity Express End-User Card.
For system admininstrator information on the Cisco Unity Express software, see the Cisco Unity Express
System Administrator’s Guide.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 23-5
 Chapter 23 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

23-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 24
Connecting Cisco Unity Express Enhanced
Network Modules

This chapter describes Cisco Unity Express enhanced network modules for Cisco integrated services
routers, and contains the following sections:
• Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules, page 24-1
• Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules, page 24-3
• Additional References, page 24-6

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules

The Cisco Unity Express enhanced network module (NME-CUE) provides 24 ports that store a
maximum of 250 voice mailboxes and 300 hours of voice messages. (See Figure 24-1.)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the Cisco Unity Express enhanced network module (NME-CUE) only to intrabuilding or
nonexposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded, and the shield must be grounded
at both ends

The NME-CUE ships from the factory with the following hardware preinstalled. (See Table 24-1.)

Table 24-1 Preinstalled Hardware in Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules

Model Hard Disk Memory

NME-CUE 80 GB (SATA) 512 MB

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 24-1
 Chapter 24 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules
Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules

Note The Gigabit Ethernet port and compact flash (CF) slot, though available on the hardware, are not
supported by the Cisco Unity Express enhanced network module. The CF slot has a metal cover.

Figure 24-1 NME-CUE Faceplate

NME-CUE
XXX-XXXXX-XX XX

Never remove compact

SHUTDOWN: flash during operation
GRACEFUL <1 s LINK ACT Shut down
application
IMMEDIATE >4 s before removing or
power cycling.
NOT
EN

231685
DISK SYS SUPPORTED

CF GigE USB

CF LINK ACT DISK EN

Shutdown SYS

SHUTDOWN Press the SHUTDOWN button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully shut down the
module. Press the SHUTDOWN button for more than 4 seconds to cause an immediate
module shutdown, which may impact file operations that are in progress.
DISK Status of hard drive activity:
On—Active.
Off—Inactive.
SYS Status of system shutdown:
Note Do not remove power without first shutting down the application.

On—Application is stable.
Off—System is shut down and ready for host power down.
Flashing—System shutdown is in progress.
EN Status of the network module:
On—Detected by the host Cisco IOS software and enabled.
Off—Disabled.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

24-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 24 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules

Shutting Down Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules

Press the Shutdown button on the network module faceplate for less than 2 seconds to perform a graceful
shutdown of the network module before removing power from the router or before starting an online
insertion and removal (OIR) sequence on the router. The application may take up to 2 minutes to fully
shut down.

Caution If you press the Shutdown button for more than 4 seconds, a nongraceful shutdown of the hard disk will
occur and may corrupt files on the network module’s hard disk. After a nongraceful shutdown, the HD
and SYS LEDs remain lit. Press the Shutdown button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully reboot the
network module.

Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Unity Express Enhanced

Network Modules
Some Cisco routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the router or affecting
the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal (OIR). OIR of a
module provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing information, and ensures
session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, Cisco Unity Express enhanced network modules use hard disks.
Online removal of disks without proper shutdown can cause file system corruption and might render
the disk unusable. You must shut down the operating system on the network module in an orderly
way before removing or powering down the module.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a module, install another module
exactly like it in its place. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any installed WAN or voice
interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.

Caution If you need to preserve the data on the Cisco Unity Express enhanced network module, or need to
transfer the data to a new Cisco Unity Express enhanced network module, perform a backup of the data
before removing the module, and restore the data after installing the new module. For more information
about backing up and restoring data, see the “Backup and Restore” chapter in the Cisco Unity Express
3.0 Voice-Mail and Auto-Attendant CLI Administrator Guide:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/voicesw/ps5520/products_administration_guide_chapter091
86a0080874eb2.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 24-3
 Chapter 24 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules

To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps, with
the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a network module session by using the following command:

Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

SE-Module> enable
SE-Module#

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the network module by using the following command from the
SE-Module# prompt:
SE-Module# copy running-config tftp tftp-server-address filename

Step 3 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by pressing x.
Step 4 On the router, clear the integrated-service-engine console session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit shutdown

Step 6 Shut down the network module interface:

Router (config)# interface integrated-service-engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Step 7 Unplug all network interface cables from the network module.
Step 8 Loosen the two captive screws that are holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 9 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 10 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill
the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 11 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 12 Reconnect the network interface cables previously removed in Step 7.
Step 13 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power (PWR) and enable (EN) LEDs on the
front panel are also on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is
operational.
Step 14 Initiate a network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

ISE-network module now available

SE-Module> enable

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

24-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 24 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules

SE-Module#

Step 15 Restore the network module running configuration by using the following command from the service
module prompt:
Se# copy tftp running-config tftp-server-address filename

Step 16 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by pressing x.
Step 17 On the router, clear the network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 24-5
 Chapter 24 Connecting Cisco Unity Express Enhanced Network Modules
Additional References

Additional References
For additional information, see the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

Cisco Unity Express software installation Cisco Unity Express at
and administration, configuration, and http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/voicesw/ps5520/tsd_products_suppo
operation rt_series_home.html
Cisco IOS software website and reference Cisco IOS Software at
documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
gory_home.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of new
feedback and assistance and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

24-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 25
Connecting Cisco Network Analysis Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Cisco network analysis modules for modular access routers and
contains the following sections:
• Network Analysis Module Overview, page 25-1
• Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Network Analysis Module, page 25-3
• Related Documents, page 25-4

Note The Network Analysis Module (NAM) is available in multiple hardware forms for some Cisco routers
and Catalyst switches. This document applies only to the NAM for branch routers, also known as
modular access, multiservice, or integrated services routers.

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Network Analysis Module Overview

This section provides information on the network analysis module (NM-NAM). (See Figure 25-1.)
All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module has passed its
self-tests and is available to the router.
All network analysis modules display an additional power (PWR) LED, a disk (DISK) LED, and two
additional LEDs for the Fast Ethernet port (see Figure 25-1 and Table 25-1).

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the network analysis module (NM-NAM) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or cabling.
The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 25-1
 Chapter 25 Connecting Cisco Network Analysis Modules
Network Analysis Module Overview

Figure 25-1 Cisco Network Analysis Module (NM-NAM) Faceplate and LEDs

1 2 3

NM-NAM
WARNING!!
DISK Shut down NM-NAM application
before removing or power cycling.

LINK ACT

EN

95749
PWR CF
FastEthernet 0

4 5

Table 25-1 Cisco Network Analysis Module (NM-NAM) LEDs

Callout LED Meaning

1 DISK There is activity on the hard drive.
2 LINK The Fast Ethernet connection is available to the network module.
3 ACT There is activity on the Fast Ethernet connection.
4 PWR Power is available to the network module.
5 EN The module has passed self-test and is available to the router.

Connecting Cisco Network Analysis Modules to the Network

To connect a network analysis module to the network, use a straight-through 2-pair Category 5
unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable to connect the RJ-45 port on the network analysis module to a
switch, hub, repeater, server, or other network device. (See Figure 25-2.)

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the network analysis module (NM-NAM) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or cabling.
The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5 cables.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

25-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 25 Connecting Cisco Network Analysis Modules
Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Network Analysis Module

Figure 25-2 Connecting a Cisco Network Analysis Module to a Fast Ethernet Hub

NM-NAM
WARNING!!
DISK Shut down NM-NAM application
before removing or power cycling.

LINK ACT

PWR EN CF
FastEthernet 0

Fast Ethernet
RJ-45
Category 5
or UTP cable

98727
Fast Ethernet hub

Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Network Analysis

Module
Some Cisco modular access routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the
router or affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal
(OIR). OIR of network modules provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing
information, and ensures session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, network analysis modules use hard disks. Online removal of disks
without proper shutdown can result in file system corruption and might render the disk unusable. The
operating system on the network analysis module must be shut down in an orderly fashion before the
network module is removed.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a network module, install another
module exactly like it in its place. If you remove a two-slot network module (along with any installed
WAN or voice interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your type of router.
To perform online removal of a network analysis module and insertion of a replacement, follow these
steps with the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Perform a graceful halt of the network analysis module by using the following command:
Router# service-module analysis-module slot/0 shutdown

Shutdown is used for Online removal of Service Module.

Do you want to proceed with shutdown? [confirm]
Use service module resent command to recover from shutdown

Step 2 Press Enter to confirm the request. Wait for the following status message (it may take a minute or two):
%SERVICEMODULE-5-SHUTDOWN2:Service module NAM-Sensor1/0 shutdown complete

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 25-3
 Chapter 25 Connecting Cisco Network Analysis Modules
Related Documents

Step 3 Unplug the network interface cable from the network analysis module.
Step 4 Loosen the two captive screws holding the network analysis module in the chassis slot.
Step 5 Remove the network analysis module from the slot.
Step 6 Align the replacement network analysis module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently
into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill the
unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 7 Push the module into place until you feel the edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 8 Reconnect the network interface cable previously removed in Step 3.
Step 9 Tighten the two captive screws on the faceplate.
Step 10 Reset the network analysis module using the reset command.
Router# service-module analysis-module slot/0 reset

Use reset only to recover from shutdown or failed state

Warning: May lose date on the hard disc!
Do you want to reset?[confirm]

Step 11 Press Enter to confirm the request. The network analysis module resets itself.
Step 12 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power and enable LEDs on the front panel also
are on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is operational.

Related Documents
For additional information, see the following documents.

Tip For information on obtaining documentation, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
For information on obtaining technical assistance, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on
page xi.

Cisco IOS Software Documentation

For information on Cisco IOS software configuration, see the Network Analysis Module (NM-NAM)
document.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

25-4 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 26
Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules

This chapter describes Network Analysis Module (NAM) enhanced network modules for
Cisco integrated services routers, and contains the following sections:
• NAM Enhanced Network Modules, page 26-1
• Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules, page 26-3
• Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco NAM Enhanced Network Modules Procedure, page 26-3
• Additional References, page 26-5

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

NAM Enhanced Network Modules

The NAM enhanced network module (NME-NAM-80S) monitors and analyzes network traffic using
remote monitoring (RMON), RMON extensions for switched networks (SMON), and other management
information bases (MIBs). (See Figure 26-1 on page 26-2.)
The NAM enhanced network module ships from the factory with the following hardware preinstalled.
(See Table 26-1.)

Table 26-1 Preinstalled Hardware in NAM Enhanced Network Modules

Model Hard Disk Memory Daughter Card CompactFlash

NME-NAM-80S 80 GB (SATA) 512 MB Included 64 MB

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 26-1
 Chapter 26 Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules
NAM Enhanced Network Modules

Figure 26-1 NME-NAM-80S Faceplate

f

NME-NAM-80S
XXX-XXXXX-XX XX

Never remove compact

SHUTDOWN: flash during operation
GRACEFUL <1 s LINK ACT Shut down
application
IMMEDIATE >4 s before removing or
power cycling.
NOT
EN

230226
DISK SYS SUPPORTED

CF GigE USB

CF CF card LINK ACT DISK EN

Shutdown SYS

CF Status of the CompactFlash

Off—CompactFlash is not used
Flashing—Application detected CompactFlash at boot up
SHUTDOWN Press the SHUTDOWN button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully shut down the
module. Press the SHUTDOWN button for more than 4 seconds to cause an immediate
module shutdown, which may impact file operations that are in progress.
LINK Status of Gigabit Ethernet link
On—Link is enabled
Off—Link is disabled
ACT Status of Gigabit Ethernet activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive
DISK Status of hard drive activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive
SYS Status of system shutdown
Note Do not remove power without first shutting down the application.

On—Application is stable.
Off—System is shut down and ready for host power down
Flashing—System shutdown is in progress
EN Status of the enhanced network module
On—Detected by the host Cisco IOS software and enabled
Off—Disabled

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

26-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 26 Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules
Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules

Shutting Down NAM Enhanced Network Modules

Press the reset button on the network module faceplate for less than 2 seconds to perform a graceful
shutdown of the network module before removing power from the router or before starting an online
insertion and removal (OIR) sequence on the router. The application may take up to 2 minutes to fully
shut down.

Caution If you press the shutdown button for more than 4 seconds, a nongraceful shutdown of the hard disk will
occur and may cause file corruption on the network module’s hard disk. After a nongraceful shutdown,
the HD and SYS LEDs remain lit. Press the shutdown button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully reboot
the network module.

Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules

Warning To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the NAM enhanced network module (NME-NAM-80S) only to intra-building or non-exposed
wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both
ends. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly must not be metallically connected
to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as
intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and
require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

To connect NAM enhanced network modules to an external device, use a straight-through two-pair
Category 5e unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable, and connect the RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet port on the
network module to a switch, hub, repeater, server, or other Gigabit Ethernet network device.

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems, Inc. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5e cables.

Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco NAM Enhanced Network

Modules Procedure
Some Cisco routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the router or affecting
the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal (OIR). OIR of a
module provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing information, and ensures
session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, NAM enhanced network modules use hard disks. Online removal of
disks without proper shutdown can result in file system corruption and might render the disk
unusable. The operating system on the network module must be shut down in an orderly way before
removing or powering down the module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 26-3
 Chapter 26 Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco NAM Enhanced Network Modules Procedure

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a module, install another module
exactly like it in its place. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any installed WAN or voice
interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.
To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps, with
the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a network module session using the following command:

Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the network module using the following command from the
Router # prompt:
[email protected]# config upload ftp://username@host/path

Step 3 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.

Step 4 On the router, clear the integrated-service-engine console session using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit shutdown

Step 6 Shut down the network module interface:

Router (config)# interface integrated-service-engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Step 7 Unplug all network interface cables from the network module.
Step 8 Loosen the two captive screws holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 9 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 10 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill
the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 11 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 12 Reconnect the network interface cables previously removed in Step 7.
Step 13 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power (PWR) and enable (EN) LEDs on the
front panel are also on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is
operational.
Step 14 Initiate a network module session with the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

26-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 26 Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules
Additional References

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

Step 15 Restore the network module running configuration by using the following command from the service
module prompt:
[email protected]# config network ftp://username@host/path/filename
Step 16 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.
Step 17 On the router, clear the network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Additional References
For additional information, see the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

NAM software installation and Cisco Branch Router Series (NME-NAM) Installation and
administration, configuration, and Configuration Note at
operation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/cscowork/ps5401/products_installati
on_and_configuration_guide09186a00807ee90a.html
Cisco IOS software website and reference Cisco IOS Software at
documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
gory_home.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of new
feedback and assistance and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 26-5
 Chapter 26 Connecting NAM Enhanced Network Modules
Additional References

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

26-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 27
Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network
Modules

This chapter describes how to connect circuit emulation over Internet Protocol (CEoIP) network
modules and contains the following sections:
• Cisco CEoIP Network Modules, page 27-1
• 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules (NM-CEM-4SER), page 27-2
• Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules to the Network, page 27-3
• 4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Modules (NM-CEM-4TE1), page 27-9
• Connecting 4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Modules (NM-CEM-4TE1) to the Network, page
27-9

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Cisco CEoIP Network Modules

Cisco CEoIP network modules provide a virtual circuit through an IP network (similar to a leased line).
Transport of data, regardless of the content or structure of the data stream, is entirely transparent to the
destination; bits arriving at one end are delivered unchanged to the destination address.
This chapter provides information on the following two Cisco CEoIP network modules:
• 4-port serial interface network module (NM-CEM-4SER), shown in Figure 27-1
• 4-port T1/E1 RJ-48 interface network module (NM-CEM-4TE1), shown in Figure 27-2

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 27-1
 Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules (NM-CEM-4SER)

Figure 27-1 4-Port Serial Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4SER) Faceplate

88898
NM-CEM-4SER See Manual before installation.

Connectors for Extended

Control Signals
CEM 3 CEM 2
ACT LP LP ACT

AL EN
CEM 1 CEM 0

Figure 27-2 4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4TE 1) Faceplate

88897
NM-CEM-4TE1 See Manual before installation

T1/E1 3 T1/E1 2 T1/E1 1 T1/E1 0

AL EN

4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules (NM-CEM-4SER)

The 4-port serial interface network module (NM-CEM-4SER) is a single-wide CEoIP network module
with four serial ports that support the following interfaces:
• EIA/TIA-232
• EIA/TIA-449
• EIA-530
• EIA-530A
• V.35
• X.21

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 4-port serial interface network module (NM-CEM-4SER) only to intrabuilding or
nonexposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded
at both ends.

The interface type provided by the port is determined by the cable connected to the port. For information
on interface-specific cabling requirements, see the “Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network
Modules to the Network” section on page 27-3.
For information on network module LEDs, see the “4-Port Serial Interface Network Module
(NM-CEM-4SER) LEDs” section on page 27-3.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

27-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules to the Network

4-Port Serial Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4SER) LEDs

See Figure 27-3 for the location of network module LEDs and Table 27-1 for LED descriptions.

Figure 27-3 4-Port Serial Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4SER) LEDs

88922
NM-CEM-4SER See Manual before installation.

Connectors for Extended

Control Signals
CEM 3 CEM 2
ACT LP LP ACT

AL EN
CEM 1 CEM 0

Active Active
Loopback
Alarm
Enable

Table 27-1 4-Port Serial Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4SER) LEDs

LED Color Meaning

ACT Green The channel on this port is operational.
LP Yellow A local or network loopback is present on the port.
AL Red Not used.
EN Green The network module has passed self-test and is available to the router.

Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules to the

Network
The 4-port serial interface network module uses Smart Serial connectors, permitting each port to support
a basic or extended set of serial control signals, depending on the cable connected to the port.

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 4-port serial interface network module (NM-CEM-4SER) only to intrabuilding or
nonexposed wiring or cabling. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded
at both ends.

The following basic set of control signals is used on Cisco 12-in-1 cables:
• Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
• Data Set Ready (DSR)
• Request to Send (RTS)
• Clear to Send (CTS)
• Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
• Local Loop (LL)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 27-3
 Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules to the Network

The following control signals are part of the extended set, in addition to the basic set listed above, and
are used on Cisco Extended 12-in-1 cables:
• Remote Loop (RL)
• Test Mode (TM)
• Ring Indicator (RI)

Note Control signal support depends on the interface type. Not all of the control signals listed above are
supported by every interface type.

Note The control signal names used in this document are the names commonly used in the industry for
RS-232. Other interface types may use other names for the equivalent control signals.

The 4-port serial interface network module (NM-CEM-4SER) supports both Cisco 12-in-1 interface
cables and Cisco Extended 12-in-1 interface cables with user-defined end-connectors permitting
connection to either DTE or DCE interfaces.
Interfaces and DTE or DCE modes are defined by the type of cable connected to the network module.

Tip Use the Cisco 12-in-1 cable for X.21 interfaces. The X.21 interface connector does not require an
additional DIN connector.

For information on using Cisco 12-in-1 cables with the 4-port serial interface network module, see
Table 27-3. Figure 27-4 illustrates how to connect the Cisco 12-in-1 cable to the network module.
For information on using Cisco Extended 12-in-1 cables with the 4-port serial interface network module,
see Table 27-4. Figure 27-5 illustrates how to connect the Cisco Extended 12-in-1 cable to the network
module.
All serial interface types are available in DTE or DCE format: DTE requires a plug connector at the
customer premises equipment (CPE) end, and DCE requires a receptacle connector at the CPE end.

Serial Interface Data Rates and Distance Limitations

All serial signals are subject to distance limits, beyond which the signal degrades significantly or is
completely lost. Generally, the slower the data rate, the greater the distance the signal can travel.
Table 27-2 lists maximum recommended speeds and distances for each serial interface type. If you
understand and compensate for potential electrical problems, you may get good results at speeds and
distances greater than those listed. For instance, the recommended maximum rate for V.35 is 2 Mbps,
but 4 Mbps is commonly used.

Table 27-2 Maximum Recommended Speeds and Distances for Each Serial Interface Type

EIA/TIA-232 Distance EIA/TIA-449, -530, -530A, V.35, X.21 Distance

Data Rate, bps Feet Meters Feet Meters
2400 200 60 4100 1250
4800 100 30 2050 625

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

27-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules to the Network

Table 27-2 Maximum Recommended Speeds and Distances for Each Serial Interface Type (continued)

EIA/TIA-232 Distance EIA/TIA-449, -530, -530A, V.35, X.21 Distance

Data Rate, bps Feet Meters Feet Meters
9600 50 15 1025 312
19200 25 8 500 150
38400 12 4 250 75
56000 9 3 100 30

Balanced drivers allow EIA/TIA-449, EIA/TIA-530, EIA/TIA-530A, V.35, and X.21 signals to travel
greater distances than EIA/TIA-232 signals. All balanced interfaces easily support 4 to 8 Mbps.

Using Cisco 12-in-1 Interface Cables with the 4-Port Serial Interface Network
Module (NM-CEM-4SER)
Table 27-3 lists the Cisco 12-in-1 interface cables supported by the 4-port serial interface network
module. Use the cable part number to order replacement or spare cables for the interface and DTE or
DCE mode appropriate for your network.
Figure 27-4 illustrates how to connect the Cisco 12-in-1 cable to the network module.

Table 27-3 Cisco 12-in-1 Interface Cable Part Numbers Used with the 4-Port Serial Interface Network
Module (NM-CEM-4SER)

Interface DCE/DTE Cisco Cable Part Number

EIA/TIA-232 Female DCE CAB-SS-232FC
Male DTE CAB-SS-232MT
EIA/TIA-449 Female DCE CAB-SS-449FC
Male DTE CAB-SS-449MT
EIA-530 Male DTE CAB-SS-530MT
EIA-530A Male DTE CAB-SS-530AMT
V.35 Female DCE CAB-SS-V35FC
Female DTE CAB-SS-V35FT
Male DCE CAB-SS-V35MC
Male DTE CAB-SS-V35MT
X.21 Female DCE CAB-SS-X21FC
Male DTE CAB-SS-X21MT

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 27-5
 Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules to the Network

Figure 27-4 Connecting the Cisco 12-in-1 Interface Cable to the 4-Port Serial Interface Network Module
(NM-CEM-4SER)

88994
NM-CEM-4SER See Manual before installation.

Connectors for Extended

Control Signals
CEM 3 CEM 2
ACT LP LP ACT

AL EN
CEM 1 CEM 0

EIA/TIA-232 EIA/TIA-449 V.35 EIA-530 X.21

EIA-530A
Connections at the CPE

Using Cisco Extended 12-in-1 Interface Cables with the 4-Port Serial Interface
Network Module (NM-CEM-4SER)
Table 27-4 lists the Cisco Extended 12-in-1 interface cables supported by the 4-port serial interface
network module. Use the cable part number to order replacement or spare cables for the interface and
DTE or DCE mode appropriate for your network.
Figure 27-5 illustrates how to connect the Cisco 12-in-1 cable to the network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

27-6 OL-2485-20
Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules to the Network

Table 27-4 Cisco Extended 12-in-1 Interface Cable Part Numbers Used with the 4-Port Serial Interface
Network Module (NM-CEM-4SER)

Interface DCE/DTE Cisco Cable Part Number

EIA/TIA-232 Female DCE CAB-SS-232FC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-232MT-EXT
EIA/TIA-449 Female DCE CAB-SS-449FC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-449MT-EXT
EIA-530 Female DCE CAB-SS-530FC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-530MT-EXT
EIA-530A Female DCE CAB-SS-530AFC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-530AMT-EXT
V.35 Female DCE CAB-SS-V35FC-EXT
Female DTE CAB-SS-V35FT-EXT
Male DCE CAB-SS-V35MC-EXT
Male DTE CAB-SS-V35MT-EXT

Note Cisco Extended 12-in-1 cables provide additional control signals through the DIN cable connection.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 27-7
 Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
Connecting 4-Port Serial Interface Network Modules to the Network

Figure 27-5 Connecting the Cisco Extended 12-in-1 Interface Cable to the 4-Port Serial Interface
Network Module (NM-CEM-4SER)

88923
NM-CEM-4SER See Manual before installation.

Connectors for Extended

Control Signals
CEM 3 CEM 2
ACT LP LP ACT

AL EN
CEM 1 CEM 0

EIA/TIA-232 EIA/TIA-449 V.35 EIA/TIA-530

EIA/TIA-530A
Connections at the CPE

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

27-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Modules (NM-CEM-4TE1)

4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Modules (NM-CEM-4TE1)

The 4-port T1/E1 RJ-48 interface network module (NM-CEM-4TE1) is a single-wide CEoIP network
module with four T1/E1 ports. (See Figure 27-2.) The NM-CEM-4TE1 connects to any T1/E1 interface
for voice or data.

4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4TE1) LEDs

See Figure 27-6 for the location of network module LEDs and Table 27-5 for LED descriptions.

Figure 27-6 4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4TE1) LEDs

88921
NM-CEM-4TE1 See Manual before installation

T1/E1 3 T1/E1 2 T1/E1 1 T1/E1 0

AL EN

Alarm
Alarm, loopback,
Enable
carrier LEDs

Table 27-5 4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4TE1) LEDs

LED Color Meaning

AL Yellow Loss of signal or loss of frame has occurred, or the network module is
unavailable because of excessive errors on the interface.
LP Yellow A local or network loopback on the port.
CD Green Activity is occurring on the interface (carrier detect).
EN Green The network module has passed self-test and is available to the router.
AL Yellow Not used.

Connecting 4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Modules

(NM-CEM-4TE1) to the Network
The 4-port T1/E1 RJ-48 interface network module (NM-CEM-4TE1) uses a RJ-48 straight-through cable
to connect to the customer premises equipment (CPE) for use in T1 or E1 circuit emulation. (See
Figure 27-7.)

Note All four ports on the network module must operate in the same software-configured mode, either as T1
ports or as E1 ports. The NM-CEM-4TE1 network module does not support combinations of T1 and E1
ports on the same network module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 27-9
 Chapter 27 Connecting Circuit Emulation Over IP Network Modules
Connecting 4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Modules (NM-CEM-4TE1) to the Network

When configured for E1 operation, the NM-CEM-4TE1 network module provides four 120-ohm
balanced ports. To connect any of these ports to a 75-ohm unbalanced network, use Cisco cable
CAB-ADP-75-120. For more information, see the Installing the 75-120-Ohm Adapter Cable on E1
Multichannel Port Adapters document.

Figure 27-7 Connecting the 4-Port T1/E1 RJ-48 Interface Network Module (NM-CEM-4TE1) to the
Network

88924
NM-CEM-4TE1 See Manual before installation

T1/E1 3 T1/E1 2 T1/E1 1 T1/E1 0

AL EN

T1/E1 CPE

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

27-10 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 28
Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension
Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Cisco high-density extension modules to the network and contains
the following sections:
• Cisco High-Density Analog and Digital Extension Module for Voice and Fax, page 28-1
• Installing Expansion Modules on Cisco High-Density Extension Modules, page 28-4
• Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules to the Network, page 28-6
• Cisco High-Density Extension Module Cable Pinouts, page 28-9

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-5 on page 1-15.

Cisco High-Density Analog and Digital Extension Module for

Voice and Fax
The Cisco high-density analog and digital extension module for voice and fax is available as an 8-port
analog voice module (EVM-HD-8FXS/DID). Each port can be configured in Foreign Exchange Station
(FXS) or Direct Inward Dialing (DID) mode through Cisco IOS software commands.

Note FXS supports on-premises applications only.

Cisco high-density extension modules provide an integrated high-density analog and digital voice
interface for small or medium branch offices. Together with certain expansion modules (see the
“Expansion Modules for Cisco High-Density Extension Modules” section on page 28-3), the Cisco
high-density extension module provides a maximum of 24 analog voice ports with 8 ports of DID
capability.

Note Cisco high-density extension modules can only be used in certain slots of modular access routers. To
determine which slots on your router support high-density extension modules, see the “Platform and Slot
Limitations for Cisco Network Modules” section in Chapter 1, “Overview of Cisco Network Modules
for Cisco Access Routers.”

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 28-1
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Cisco High-Density Analog and Digital Extension Module for Voice and Fax

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 8-port analog voice/fax expansion module (EM-HDA-8FXS) and 4-port digital voice/fax
expansion module (EM-4BRI-NT/TE) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or cabling. The
intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

Cisco High-Density Extension Module LEDs and Interfaces

Figure 28-1 shows high-density extension module LEDs and interfaces.

Figure 28-1 Cisco High-Density Extension Module (EVM-HD-8FXS/DID) LEDs

EVM-HD
8FXS/DID
EM None
0
EM None
1
26 50

EM0 EM1 EN

103159
1 25

1 2 4 3

1 EM0: Green indicates presence of an installed 3 EN: Green indicates that the network module
expansion module in slot EM0. has passed self-test and is available to the
router.
2 EM1: Green indicates presence of an installed 4 RJ-21 connector for use with RJ-21 cable.
expansion module in slot EM1.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

28-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Cisco High-Density Analog and Digital Extension Module for Voice and Fax

Expansion Modules for Cisco High-Density Extension Modules

The Cisco high-density extension module supports up to two expansion modules (EMs) in the
configurations shown in Table 28-1.

Table 28-1 Example Hardware Configurations Supported on Cisco High-Density Extension Modules (EVM-HD-8FXS/DID)

Total Ports
BRI Total
Base Board FXS or B- Voice
(FXS or DID) EM0 EM1 DID FXS FXO Ports channel Sessions
EVM-HD-8FXS/ — — 8 — — — — 8
DID
EM-HDA-8FXS — 8 8 — — — 16
EM-HDA-8FXS EM-HDA-8FXS 8 16 — — — 24
EM-HDA-8FXS EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO 8 11 4 — — 23
EM-HDA-8FXS EM-HDA-6FXO 8 8 6 — — 22
EM-HDA-8FXS EM-4BRI-NT/TE 8 8 — 4 8 24
EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO — 8 3 4 — — 15
EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO 8 6 8 — — 22
EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO EM-HDA-6FXO 8 3 10 — — 21
EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO EM-4BRI-NT/TE 8 3 4 4 8 23
EM-HDA-6FXO — 8 — 6 — — 14
EM-HDA-6FXO EM-HDA-6FXO 8 — 12 — — 20
EM-HDA-6FXO EM-4BRI-NT/TE 8 — 6 4 8 22
EM-4BRI-NT/TE — 8 — — 4 8 16
EM-4BRI-NT/TE EM-4BRI-NT/TE 8 — — 8 16 24

The 4-port digital voice/fax expansion module (EM-4BRI-NT/TE) operates as an S/T interface and is
capable of NT or TE functionality. In NT mode, the expansion module can supply in-line power for the
far end of the connection.
The 7-port analog voice/fax expansion module (EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO) provides three additional FXS
ports and four FXO ports for off-premises analog voice applications.
The 6-port analog voice/fax expansion module (EM-HDA-6FXO) provides six FXO ports for
off-premises analog voice applications. The sixth port (port 5) provides a trunk bypass (TBP) or power
failover capability.
The 8-port analog voice/fax expansion module (EM-HDA-8FXS) adds an additional eight FXS ports to
the Cisco high-density extension module.

Tip When router power is off, connect an analog phone to the FXO line to make a call. (See the “Connecting
Cisco High-Density Extension Modules to the Network” section on page 28-6 for more information).

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 28-3
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Installing Expansion Modules on Cisco High-Density Extension Modules

Installing Expansion Modules on Cisco High-Density Extension

Modules
Expansion modules can be used to increase the number of ports supported on the high-density extension
module.

Note ESD straps should be worn when handling all modules, including during installation of
expansion modules. An ESD wrist strap is shipped with the product.

To install expansion modules, follow these steps:

Step 1 Decide if the expansion board is going in the EM0 slot or EM1 slot.

Note The EM0 slot is on the left, and the EM1 slot is on the right as you look at the face plate.

Step 2 Align the connectors on the underside of the expansion module with the connectors for the slot you
plan to use on the network module. (See Figure 28-2.)
Step 3 Using gentle pressure, insert the connectors on the underside of the expansion module into the
connectors on the network module.

Tip Use the alignment pins on the network module brackets to guide the expansion module during
installation.

Note Press firmly on the expansion module until the board seats to ensure proper network
connections.

Caution For each expansion module, two mounting screws must be installed with 6-8 lbs-in (67.8 N-cm) of
torque. Failure to properly secure the expansion module to the base module with two screws
compromises product reliability. In the case of FXO ports, failure to properly tighten both mounting
screws causes FXO ground-start outgoing call operation to fail.

Step 4 Insert two screws from the hardware kit through the screw guides on the expansion module into the
threaded holes on the network module brackets.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

28-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Installing Expansion Modules on Cisco High-Density Extension Modules

Figure 28-2 Installing an Expansion Module on Extension Module Slot EM1

NM
EV -
H DMA-HD
V
8F
X
EM S/DID
0 N
on
EM e
0
M
1 No
ne
E
t
o
sl

26

103157
1
1

M
E
2
t
o
sl
50

25 AC
T
EN

1 Expansion module connector on the network 2 Screw bracket on the network module
module (for slot EM1). faceplate (for slot EM1).

Step 5 Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the screws to secure the expansion module to the network
module.

Warning Failure to secure the expansion module to the base module with two screws defeats the earth ground,
causing a potential safety hazard. Statement 347

Tip To maintain proper seating of the network module, tighten the rear screw first.

Step 6 Apply the appropriate label on the front of the network module faceplate. (See Figure 28-3.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 28-5
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules to the Network

Figure 28-3 Label Locations for Expansion Modules on Cisco High-Density Expansion Modules

Apply label for EM0 here

EVM-HD
8FXS/DID
EM None
0
EM None
1 26

EM0 EM1

103158
1

Apply label for EM1 here

Step 7 Install the network module into the router. (See the “Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access
Routers” section on page 2-5.)

Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules to the

Network
The Cisco high-density extension module is connected to a distribution frame or patch panel with an
RJ-21 cable. (See Figure 28-4.) RJ-21 cables are not provided with the network module.

Warning Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity.
Statement 1001

Caution To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the 8-port analog voice/fax expansion module (EM-HDA-8FXS) and 4-port digital voice/fax
expansion module (EM-4BRI-NT/TE) only to intrabuilding or nonexposed wiring or cabling. The
intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends.

For ordering information, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on page xi.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

28-6 OL-2485-20
Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules to the Network

Figure 28-4 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules (EVM-HD-8FXS/DID) to a Main

Distribution Frame or Patch Panel
EVM-HD
8FXS/DID
EM None
0
EM None
1
26 50

EM0 EM1
1 EN
25

1
2

122222
3 4 5

1 Strap to secure connector 4 Main distribution frame

2 RJ-21 connector 5 PBX
3 Public switched telephone network

Distribution panels are generally available from multiple cable and network adapter vendors. Customers
may, at their sole discretion, consider using a patch panel from Black Box Corporation (JPM2194A—see
Figure 28-5). (Mention of products or services other than Cisco products or services is for information
purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation.) The Black Box patch
panel accommodates RJ-11 and RJ-45 combinations possible on Cisco high-density expansion modules,
and offers flexibility for expansion module upgrades (either analog or digital). For ordering information,
see the Cisco High-Density Extension Module data sheet.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 28-7
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules to the Network

Figure 28-5 Black Box Patch Panel (JPM2194A) for Use with Cisco High-Density Expansion Modules

1 3 5
EM0 EM1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

0 1 2 3

BASE
ASE
EM0 EM1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

117992
4 5 6 7

2 4 6

1 RJ-11 receptacles for FXS/DID ports on the 4 RJ-45 receptacles for BRI ports on the
EVM-HD-8FXS/DID baseboard. EM-4BRI-NT/TE when installed in slot EM0.
2 RJ-11 receptacles for FXS/DID ports on the 5 RJ-11 receptacles for FXS or FXO ports on an
EVM-HD-8FXS/DID baseboard. FXS or FXO expansion module when
installed in slot EM1.
Note Applies to EM-HDA-8FXS,
EM-HDA-6FXO, or
EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO expansion
modules only.
3 RJ-11 receptacles for FXS or FXO ports on an 6 RJ-45 receptacles for BRI ports on the
FXS or FXO expansion module when EM-4BRI-NT/TE when installed in slot EM1.
installed in slot EM0.
Note Applies to EM-HDA-8FXS,
EM-HDA-6FXO, or
EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO expansion
modules only.

Table 28-2 provides pin definitions for the RJ-11 and RJ-45 receptacle types:

Table 28-2 Pinouts for RJ-11 and RJ-45 Receptacle Types

Receptacle Type Pin Definitions

RJ-11 Pin 3 = Ring
Pin 4 = Tip
RJ-45 Pin 3 = ISD N BRI-S/T Bus Transm it+
Pin 4 = ISD N BRI-S/T Bus Receive+
Pin 5 = ISD N BRI-S/T Bus Receive–
Pin 6 = ISD N BRI-S/T Bus Transm it–

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

28-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Cisco High-Density Extension Module Cable Pinouts

Establishing Emergency or Power-Fail Connections

During power failures or when router power is off, emergency voice connections can be made through
power-fail ports on the EM-HDA-6FXO expansion module. The expansion module must be properly
installed on the Cisco high-density extension module. (See the “Installing Expansion Modules on Cisco
High-Density Extension Modules” section on page 28-4.)
To provide an emergency connection, connect an analog phone using the port information listed in
Table 28-3.

Note There will not be a dial tone on port 15 or port 23 until the router is powered down.

Table 28-3 Establishing Emergency Connections through Cisco High-Density Extension Modules

Expansion Module Slot Analog Phone Port PSTN Port

EM0 Port 15 Tip/Ring Port 13 Tip/Ring
EM1 Port 23 Tip/Ring Port 21 Tip/Ring

Caution Analog phones connected to the power-fail ports should not be connected in parallel to a normal FXS
port on Cisco high-density extension modules. The protection circuit on the FXS port can interfere with
phone operation when router power is off.

Cisco High-Density Extension Module Cable Pinouts

Figure 28-6 shows the RJ-21 connector wiring for the cable used for the high-density extension module,
and Table 28-4 lists cable pinouts. Port usage depends on the type of installed expansion module.

Figure 28-6 Close-Up of the RJ-21 Connector Pinout for Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
(EVM-HD-8FXS/DID)

26 50

1 25
103160

RJ-21 connector RJ-21 cable

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 28-9
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Cisco High-Density Extension Module Cable Pinouts

Table 28-4 RJ-21 Connections for the Cisco High-Density Extension Module

Base Card
RJ-21 Ports Expansion Module Ports
Pin Hardware Component 8FXS/DID EM-HDA-8FXS EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO EM-HDA-6FXO EM-4BRI-NT/TE
26 Base card Port 0 Tip — — — —
1 (EVM-HD-8FXS Port 0 Ring
27 Port 1 Tip
2 Port 1 Ring
28 Port 2 Tip
3 Port 2 Ring
29 Port 3 Tip
4 Port 3 Ring
30 Port 4 Tip
5 Port 4 Ring
31 Port 5 Tip
6 Port 5 Ring
32 Port 6 Tip
7 Port 6 Ring
33 Port 7 Tip
8 Port 7 Ring
34 EM0 — Port 8 Tip FXS Port 8 Tip Port 8 Tip Port x/0 SX–
9 Port 8 Ring FXS Port 8 Ring Port 8 Ring Port x/0 SX+
35 Port 9 Tip FXS Port 9 Tip Port 9 Tip Port x/0 SR-
10 Port 9 Ring FXS Port 9 Ring Port 9 Ring Port x/0 SR+
36 Port 10 Tip FXS Port 10 Tip Port 10 Tip Port x/1 SX–
11 Port 10 Ring FXS Port 10 Ring Port 10 Ring Port x/1 SX+
37 Port 11 Tip Unused Port 11 Tip Port x/1 SR-
12 Port 11 Ring Unused Port 11 Ring Port x/1 SR+
38 Port 12 Tip FXO Port 12 Tip Port 12 Tip Port x/2 SX–
13 Port 12 Ring FXO Port 12 Ring Port 12 Ring Port x/2 SX+
39 Port 13 Tip FXO Port 13 Tip Port 13 Tip Port x/2 SR-
14 Port 13 Ring FXO Port 13 Ring Port 13 Ring Port x/2 SR+
40 Port 14 Tip FXO Port 14 Tip Unused Port x/3 SX–
15 Port 14 Ring FXO Port 14 Ring Unused Port x/3 SX+
1
41 Port 15 Tip FXO Port 15 Tip PFP Tip Port x/3 SR-
16 Port 15 Ring FXO Port 15 Ring PFP Ring Port x/3 SR+

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

28-10 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Cisco High-Density Extension Module Cable Pinouts

Table 28-4 RJ-21 Connections for the Cisco High-Density Extension Module (continued)

Base Card
RJ-21 Ports Expansion Module Ports
Pin Hardware Component 8FXS/DID EM-HDA-8FXS EM-HDA-3FXS/4FXO EM-HDA-6FXO EM-4BRI-NT/TE
42 EM1 — Port 16 Tip FXS Port 16 Tip Port 16 Tip Port x/4 SX–
17 Port 16 Ring FXS Port 16 Ring Port 16 Ring Port x/4 SX+
43 Port 17 Tip FXS Port 17 Tip Port 17 Tip Port x/4 SR-
18 Port 17 Ring FXS Port 17 Ring Port 17 Ring Port x/4 SR+
44 Port 18 Tip FXS Port 18 Tip Port 18 Tip Port x/5 SX–
19 Port 18 Ring FXS Port 18 Ring Port 18 Ring Port x/5 SX+
45 Port 19 Tip Unused Port 19 Tip Port x/5 SR-
20 Port 19 Ring Unused Port 19 Ring Port x/5 SR+
46 Port 20 Tip FXO Port 20 Tip Port 20 Tip Port x/6 SX–
21 Port 20 Ring FXO Port 20 Ring Port 20 Ring Port x/6 SX+
47 Port 21 Tip FXO Port 21 Tip Port 21 Tip Port x/6 SR-
22 Port 21 Ring FXO Port 21 Ring Port 21 Ring Port x/6 SR+
48 Port 22 Tip FXO Port 22 Tip Unused Port x/7 SX–
23 Port 22 Ring FXO Port 22 Ring Unused Port x/7 SX+
49 Port 23 Tip FXO Port 23 Tip PFP Tip Port x/7 SR-
24 Port 23 Ring FXO Port 23 Ring PFP Ring Port x/7 SR+
50 Unused Unused Unused Unused
25 Unused Unused Unused Unused
1. During power failures or when router power is off, emergency voice connections can be made through power-fail ports (PFP) on the EM-HDA-6FXO
expansion module.

Note If there is only one EM-4BRI-NT/TE and it is installed in EM1, number the ports x/0 through x/3.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 28-11
 Chapter 28 Connecting Cisco High-Density Extension Modules
Cisco High-Density Extension Module Cable Pinouts

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

28-12 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 29
Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network
Modules

This chapter describes how to install the alarm interface controller (AIC) network module and contains
the following sections:
• Alarm Interface Controller Network Module, page 29-1
• Connecting the AIC Network Module to the Network, page 29-2
• AIC Network Module LEDs, page 29-8

Tip To determine whether your router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Alarm Interface Controller Network Module

The AIC network module, shown in Figure 29-1, supports 64 alarm inputs. Fifty-six alarm inputs are
discrete and can operate on dry contact closure when a patch panel is used. The last eight alarm inputs
can be provisioned to accept analog inputs. The AIC network module has 16 control relay outputs.
The AIC network module can be connected to a patch panel. The patch panel provides the bias to the
circuit.
The analog alarm inputs can be configured to monitor either DC voltage or current. The AIC can measure
voltage from –60 to 60 V or current from 0 to 20 mA. The control relay can be operated to turn an
external device on or off. When an event is detected, notification messages are sent to the Operations
Support System (OSS) in the network operation center (NOC). These alarm inputs are configured in
Cisco IOS software. Some reportable events include:
• Equipment alarm
• Building intrusion (door/window)
• Temperature threshold violation
• Voltage fluctuation
The AIC network module converts relay contact alarm signals to TL1 and SNMP message formats,
providing TL1 over TCP/IP and SNMP protocols. All the contact closure-related alarms are routed and
reported through the existing OSS and the associated OSS networks. With this network module, the
Cisco router sends the TL1 or SNMP messages to the OSS autonomously or in response to TL1 or SNMP
commands from the OSS.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 29-1
 Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
Connecting the AIC Network Module to the Network

The AIC network module is connected to the network using four high-density SCSI-type connectors on
the front panel.

Figure 29-1 Alarm Interface Controller Network Module

AIC-64 CONN 1 CONN 3

CONN 2 CONN 4
STAT EN

37421
Connecting the AIC Network Module to the Network
An AIC network module provides four 50-pin receptacles. Use cables that have male Micro DB-50
connectors at both ends with all conductors straight-wired. Central office equipment is cabled to the
patch panel, and then cross-connected to the AIC cable.
Two different patch panels can be used. The AIC-1 patch panel terminates one AIC and has voltage
terminations with lugs and fuses for voltage monitoring. The AIC-2 patch panel terminates up to two
AICs or 128 contact closure points
See Figure 29-2 through Figure 29-6 for examples of the AIC connections to the patch panels.
See the AIC data sheet on www.cisco.com for recommended patch panel and cable vendors.

Caution Damage to the AIC network module can occur if an alarm set for monitoring current is connected to
a sensor for monitoring voltage. Make sure that your alarms are connected to the proper sensors.

Caution Connect the cable to the AIC before connecting it to the patch panel or other connection. Otherwise,
voltage could be present on the male pins that connect to the AIC.

Caution The signal I/O connections on this unit are intended only for connection to NEC/CEC Class 2 or
equivalent circuit. This means that the voltages applied to I/O connections should not exceed
42.4 Vpk or 60 Vdc and it should be a limited/fused power source. For more details on Class 2
circuits, refer to the National Electrical Code/Canadian Electrical Code. This does not apply to the
analog input/output terminal strip numbers 1–8 on the AIC-1 patch panel.

Caution This unit is not intended for connection to exposed plant leads. Therefore, it should not be connected
to circuit conductors that extend beyond one building and are run so as to be subject to accidental
contact with AC main conductors, or are exposed to lightning on interbuilding circuits on the same
premises.

Ports are numbered from right to left and from bottom to top, as labeled on the module rear panel.
Pinouts for the AIC-1 patch panel are shown in Table 29-1. The connector 3 voltage monitor pinouts for
AIC-1 are shown in Table 29-2. Pinouts for the AIC-2 patch panel are shown in Table 29-3.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

29-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
Connecting the AIC Network Module to the Network

Cables are not provided with the network module. For ordering information, see the “Obtaining
Technical Assistance” section on page xi.

Figure 29-2 AIC Network Module Connection Diagram

Cisco 2611 router AIC1

W1 C1 C1
C2 C2 Cables to main
C3 C3 distribution frame
C4 C4

58747
Patch panel

Figure 29-3 AIC Network Module Faceplate Connections

AIC-64 CONN 1 CONN 3

CONN 2 CONN 4 STAT EN

Micro DB-50
connectors
Transition
cable

37423
Patch panel

Figure 29-4 AIC Network Module Connected to AIC-1 Patch Panel

100-240V– 1A
SERIAL 1 SERIAL 1 Cisco 2611 50/60 Hz 47 W
SERIAL 0 SERIAL 0
WIC WIC
CONN CONN 2A/S CONN CONN 2T

SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLATION SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLATION

W0
W1

LINK ETHERNET 1 ACT LINK ACT

ETHERNET 0 CONSOLE AUX

CONN 1 CONN 3
IN
AIC
62167

CONN 2 CONN 4

PANEL PWR
OUT

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 29-3
 Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
Connecting the AIC Network Module to the Network

Figure 29-5 AIC Network Module Connected to AIC-2 Patch Panel

100-240V– 1A
SERIAL 1 SERIAL 1 Cisco 2611 50/60 Hz 47 W
SERIAL 0 SERIAL 0
WIC WIC
CONN CONN 2A/S CONN CONN 2T

SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLATION SEE MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLATION

W0
W1

LINK ETHERNET 1 ACT LINK ACT

ETHERNET 0 CONSOLE AUX

CONN 1 CONN 3 CONN 1 CONN 3

58710
CONN 2 AIC 2 CONN 4 CONN 2 AIC 1 CONN 4

Figure 29-6 AIC-2 Patch Panel Connected to MDF

Cisco 2600 SERIES

POWER RPS ACTIVITY

CONN 1 CONN 3 CONN 1 CONN 3

AIC 1 AIC 2
58711

CONN 2 CONN 4 CONN 2 CONN 4

Cables to main
distribution frame

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

29-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
Connecting the AIC Network Module to the Network

Table 29-1 AIC-1 Connector Pinouts

Telco Connector Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3 Connector 4

1 Alarm Neg1 Alarm Neg 26 Alarm Neg 51 Control Common 1
26 Alarm Pos 1 Alarm Pos 26 Alarm Pos 51 Control N.O. 1
2 Alarm Neg 2 Alarm Neg 27 Alarm Neg 52 Control Common 2
27 Alarm Pos 2 Alarm Pos 27 Alarm Pos 52 Control N.O. 2
3 Alarm Neg 3 Alarm Neg 28 Alarm Neg 53 Control Common 3
28 Alarm Pos 3 Alarm Pos 28 Alarm Pos 53 Control N.O. 3
4 Alarm Neg 4 Alarm Neg 29 Alarm Neg 54 Control Common 4
29 Alarm Pos 4 Alarm Pos 29 Alarm Pos 54 Control N.O. 4
5 Alarm Neg 5 Alarm Neg 30 Alarm Neg 55 Control Common 5
30 Alarm Pos 5 Alarm Pos 30 Alarm Pos 55 Control N.O. 5
6 Alarm Neg 6 Alarm Neg 31 Alarm Neg 56 Control Common 6
31 Alarm Pos 6 Alarm Pos 31 Alarm Pos 56 Control N.O. 6
7 Alarm Neg 7 Alarm Neg 32 See Table 29-2 Control Common 7
32 Alarm Pos 7 Alarm Pos 32 See Table 29-2 Control N.O. 7
8 Alarm Neg 8 Alarm Neg 33 See Table 29-2 Control Common 8
33 Alarm Pos 8 Alarm Pos 33 See Table 29-2 Control N.O. 8
9 Alarm Neg 9 Alarm Neg 34 See Table 29-2 Control Common 9
34 Alarm Pos 9 Alarm Pos 34 See Table 29-2 Control N.O. 9
10 Alarm Neg 10 Alarm Neg 35 See Table 29-2 Control Common 10
35 Alarm Pos 10 Alarm Pos 35 See Table 29-2 Control N.O. 10
11 Alarm Neg 11 Alarm Neg 36 See Table 29-2 Control Common 11
36 Alarm Pos 11 Alarm Pos 36 See Table 29-2 Control N.O. 11
12 Alarm Neg 12 Alarm Neg 37 See Table 29-2 Control Common 12
37 Alarm Pos 12 Alarm Pos 37 See Table 29-2 Control N.O. 12
13 Alarm Neg 13 Alarm Neg 38 See Table 29-2 Control Common 13
38 Alarm Pos 13 Alarm Pos 38 See Table 29-2 Control N.O. 13
14 Alarm Neg 14 Alarm Neg 39 See Table 29-2 Control Common 14
39 Alarm Pos 14 Alarm Pos 39 See Table 29-2 Control N.O. 14
15 Alarm Neg 15 Alarm Neg 40 Not used Control Common 15
40 Alarm Pos 15 Alarm Pos 40 Not used Control N.O. 15
16 Alarm Neg 16 Alarm Neg 41 Not used Control Common 16
41 Alarm Pos 16 Alarm Pos 41 Not used Control N.O. 16
17 Alarm Neg 17 Alarm Neg 42 Not used Not used
42 Alarm Pos 17 Alarm Pos 42 Not used Not used
18 Alarm Neg 18 Alarm Neg 43 Not used Not used
43 Alarm Pos 18 Alarm Pos 43 Not used Not used

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 29-5
 Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
Connecting the AIC Network Module to the Network

Table 29-1 AIC-1 Connector Pinouts (continued)

Telco Connector Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3 Connector 4

19 Alarm Neg 19 Alarm Neg 44 Not used Not used
44 Alarm Pos 19 Alarm Pos 44 Not used Not used
20 Alarm Neg 20 Alarm Neg 45 Not used Not used
45 Alarm Pos 20 Alarm Pos 45 Not used Not used
21 Alarm Neg 21 Alarm Neg 46 Not used Not used
46 Alarm Pos 21 Alarm Pos 46 Not used Not used
22 Alarm Neg 22 Alarm Neg 47 Not used Not used
47 Alarm Pos 22 Alarm Pos 47 Not used Not used
23 Alarm Neg 23 Alarm Neg 48 Not used Not used
48 Alarm Pos 23 Alarm Pos 48 Not used Not used
24 Alarm Neg 24 Alarm Neg 49 Not used Not used
49 Alarm Pos 24 Alarm Pos 49 Not used Not used
25 Alarm Neg 25 Alarm Neg 50 Not used Not used
50 Alarm Pos 25 Alarm Pos 50 Not used Not used

Table 29-2 Voltage Monitor Connections on Connector 3 for the AIC-1 Patch Panel

Terminal Strip Signal

1 RET Alarm Pos 57
BAT Alarm Neg 57
2 RET Alarm Pos 58
BAT Alarm Neg 58
3 RET Alarm Pos 59
BAT Alarm Neg 59
4 RET Alarm Pos 60
BAT Alarm Neg 60
5 RET Alarm Pos 61
BAT Alarm Neg 61
6 RET Alarm Pos 62
BAT Alarm Neg 62
7 RET Alarm Pos 63
BAT Alarm Neg 63
8 RET Alarm Pos 64
BAT Alarm Neg 64

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

29-6 OL-2485-20
Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
Connecting the AIC Network Module to the Network

Table 29-3 AIC-2 Connector Pinouts

Telco Connector Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3 Connector 4

1 Alarm Neg1 Alarm Neg 26 Alarm Neg 51 Control Common 1
26 Alarm Pos 1 Alarm Pos 26 Alarm Pos 51 Control N.O. 1
2 Alarm Neg 2 Alarm Neg 27 Alarm Neg 52 Control Common 2
27 Alarm Pos 2 Alarm Pos 27 Alarm Pos 52 Control N.O. 2
3 Alarm Neg 3 Alarm Neg 28 Alarm Neg 53 Control Common 3
28 Alarm Pos 3 Alarm Pos 28 Alarm Pos 53 Control N.O. 3
4 Alarm Neg 4 Alarm Neg 29 Alarm Neg 54 Control Common 4
29 Alarm Pos 4 Alarm Pos 29 Alarm Pos 54 Control N.O. 4
5 Alarm Neg 5 Alarm Neg 30 Alarm Neg 55 Control Common 5
30 Alarm Pos 5 Alarm Pos 30 Alarm Pos 55 Control N.O. 5
6 Alarm Neg 6 Alarm Neg 31 Alarm Neg 56 Control Common 6
31 Alarm Pos 6 Alarm Pos 31 Alarm Pos 56 Control N.O. 6
7 Alarm Neg 7 Alarm Neg 32 Alarm Neg 57 Control Common 7
32 Alarm Pos 7 Alarm Pos 32 Alarm Pos 57 Control N.O. 7
8 Alarm Neg 8 Alarm Neg 33 Alarm Neg 58 Control Common 8
33 Alarm Pos 8 Alarm Pos 33 Alarm Pos 58 Control N.O. 8
9 Alarm Neg 9 Alarm Neg 34 Alarm Neg 59 Control Common 9
34 Alarm Pos 9 Alarm Pos 34 Alarm Pos 59 Control N.O. 9
10 Alarm Neg 10 Alarm Neg 35 Alarm Neg 60 Control Common 10
35 Alarm Pos 10 Alarm Pos 35 Alarm Pos 60 Control N.O. 10
11 Alarm Neg 11 Alarm Neg 36 Alarm Neg 61 Control Common 11
36 Alarm Pos 11 Alarm Pos 36 Alarm Pos 61 Control N.O. 11
12 Alarm Neg 12 Alarm Neg 37 Alarm Neg 62 Control Common 12
37 Alarm Pos 12 Alarm Pos 37 Alarm Pos 62 Control N.O. 12
13 Alarm Neg 13 Alarm Neg 38 Alarm Neg 63 Control Common 13
38 Alarm Pos 13 Alarm Pos 38 Alarm Pos 63 Control N.O. 13
14 Alarm Neg 14 Alarm Neg 39 Alarm Neg 64 Control Common 14
39 Alarm Pos 14 Alarm Pos 39 Alarm Pos 64 Control N.O. 14
15 Alarm Neg 15 Alarm Neg 40 Not used Control Common 15
40 Alarm Pos 15 Alarm Pos 40 Not used Control N.O. 15
16 Alarm Neg 16 Alarm Neg 41 Not used Control Common 16
41 Alarm Pos 16 Alarm Pos 41 Not used Control N.O. 16
17 Alarm Neg 17 Alarm Neg 42 Not used Not used
42 Alarm Pos 17 Alarm Pos 42 Not used Not used
18 Alarm Neg 18 Alarm Neg 43 Not used Not used
43 Alarm Pos 18 Alarm Pos 43 Not used Not used

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 29-7
 Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
AIC Network Module LEDs

Table 29-3 AIC-2 Connector Pinouts (continued)

Telco Connector Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3 Connector 4

19 Alarm Neg 19 Alarm Neg 44 Not used Not used
44 Alarm Pos 19 Alarm Pos 44 Not used Not used
20 Alarm Neg 20 Alarm Neg 45 Not used Not used
45 Alarm Pos 20 Alarm Pos 45 Not used Not used
21 Alarm Neg 21 Alarm Neg 46 Not used Not used
46 Alarm Pos 21 Alarm Pos 46 Not used Not used
22 Alarm Neg 22 Alarm Neg 47 Not used Not used
47 Alarm Pos 22 Alarm Pos 47 Not used Not used
23 Alarm Neg 23 Alarm Neg 48 Not used Not used
48 Alarm Pos 23 Alarm Pos 48 Not used Not used
24 Alarm Neg 24 Alarm Neg 49 Not used Not used
49 Alarm Pos 24 Alarm Pos 49 Not used Not used
25 Alarm Neg 25 Alarm Neg 50 Not used Not used
50 Alarm Pos 25 Alarm Pos 50 Not used Not used

AIC Network Module LEDs

This section describes AIC network module LEDs. (See Figure 29-7.)
All network modules have an enable (EN) LED. This LED indicates that the module is receiving power
from the router chassis.
The AIC network module also has a status (STAT) LED, which is a software-controlled bicolor (green
and orange) LED. Both the EN and STAT LEDs turn on when the router is powered up, recycled, or
power-cycled, or the AIC is hot-swapped. When the AIC starts to boot up, the STAT LED is initially
turned off. It turns green when the software has initialized, has passed POST, and has established
communication with IOS.
The STAT LED turns from green to orange when POST has failed or when the software encounters any
other fatal fault in its firmware during normal operation.
Table 29-4 defines the state of the card with respect to the states of the LEDs.

Figure 29-7 AIC Network Module LEDs

AIC-64 CONN 1 CONN 3

CONN 2 CONN 4
STAT EN
37422

Status LED
Enable LED

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

29-8 OL-2485-20
Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
AIC Network Module LEDs

Table 29-4 AIC LED Description

STAT LED
EN LED Green Orange Description
Off Off Off No power to the AIC
On Off Off Software initializing
On On Off Normal operation
On Off On Fault encountered

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 29-9
 Chapter 29 Connecting Alarm Interface Controller Network Modules
AIC Network Module LEDs

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

29-10 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 30
Connecting AON Network Modules

This chapter describes the Cisco Application-Oriented Networking (AON) network modules for
Cisco access routers, and contains the following sections:
• Cisco AON Network Modules, page 30-1
• Connecting AON Network Modules, page 30-3
• Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules, page 30-4
• Related Documents, page 30-7

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Cisco AON Network Modules

The Cisco AON network modules provide application-level intelligence, improved message visibility
and security, and reduced total cost of ownership by consolidating elements of network and application
infrastructures.
Two models of Cisco AON network modules are available:
• NM-AON-K9= — See Figure 30-1 on page 30-2
• NME-AON-K9= — See Figure 30-2 on page 30-2
Both Cisco AON network modules (NM) and enhanced network modules (NME) ship from the factory
with the following hardware preinstalled.

Model Hard Disk Memory

NM-AON-K9= 40 GB (PATA) 512 MB
NME-AON-K9= 40 GB (SATA) 1 GB

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 30-1
 Chapter 30 Connecting AON Network Modules
Cisco AON Network Modules

Figure 30-1 NM-AON-K9= Faceplate

DISK LINK ACT

NM-AON-K9=
DISK

NOT SUPPORTED
LINK ACT

135594
PWR EN CF
FastEthernet 0

PWR EN CF

Figure 30-2 NME-AON-K9= Faceplate

NME-AON-K9=
XXX-XXXXX-XX XX

Never remove compact

SHUTDOWN: flash during operation
GRACEFUL <1 s LINK ACT Shut down
application
IMMEDIATE >4 s before removing or
power cycling.

EN

170346
DISK SYS

CF GigE USB

CF LINK ACT DISK EN

SYS

DISK Status of hard drive activity

On—Active
Off—Inactive
LINK Status of Gigabit Ethernet link
On—Link is enabled
Off—Link is disabled
ACT Status of Gigabit Ethernet activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive
PWR/SYS Status of system shutdown
Note Do not remove power without first shutting down the application.

On—Application is stable.
Off—System is shut down and ready for host power down
Flashing—System shutdown is in progress

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

30-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 30 Connecting AON Network Modules
Connecting AON Network Modules

EN Status of the network module

On—Detected by the host Cisco IOS software and enabled
Off—Disabled
CF Status of the CompactFlash
Note CompactFlash is not supported.

Off—CompactFlash is not used

Flashing—Application detected CompactFlash at boot up

Note The Cisco NM-AON-K9= network module does not support a Fast Ethernet port.

Shutting Down the NME-AON-K9=

Press the reset button on the network module faceplate for less than 2 seconds to perform a graceful
shutdown of the network module before removing power from the router or before starting an online
insertion and removal (OIR) sequence on the router. The application may take up to 2 minutes to fully
shut down.

Caution If you press the shutdown button for more than 4 seconds, a nongraceful shutdown of the hard disk will
occur and may cause file corruption on the network module’s hard disk. After a nongraceful shutdown,
the HD and SYS LEDs remain lit. Press the shutdown button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully reboot
the network module.

Connecting AON Network Modules

To connect Cisco AON network modules and enhanced network modules to an external device, use a
straight-through two-pair Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable, and connect the RJ-45
Gigabit Ethernet port on the network module to a switch, hub, repeater, server, or other Gigabit Ethernet
network device.

Warning To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the NME-AON-K9 network module only to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cable. The
intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends. The intra-building
port(s) of the equipment or subassembly must not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect
to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type
2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP
cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these
interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5 cables.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 30-3
 Chapter 30 Connecting AON Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

Establishing a Gigabit Ethernet Internal Connection

Use the Cisco High-Speed Intrachassis Module Interconnect (HIMI) feature to establish a Gigabit
Ethernet internal logical connection between two enhanced network modules, or between an onboard
small-form-factor pluggable (SFP) Gigabit Ethernet module and an enhanced network module on Cisco
3825 and Cisco 3845 routers.
Connections can be only established as follows:
• Between the Gigabit Ethernet port in an installed onboard SFP module on the Cisco 3825 and Cisco
3845 routers
• Between Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in network module slots 1 and 2 on the Cisco 3825 router
• Between Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in network module slots 2 and 4 on the Cisco 3845 router

Note The Cisco NM-AON-K9= network module does not support Gigabit Ethernet connections.

Note A module interconnection between the Gigabit Ethernet port on an SFP module and a network module
slot or a network module-to-network module cross-connection is permitted at any given time, but both
types of connections cannot exist at the same time.

Note Connections between the onboard Ethernet ports and network module slots are not supported.

For details about configuring HIMI connections, see the Cisco High-Speed Intrachassis Module
Interconnect (HIMI) Configuration Guide on Cisco.com:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5855/prod_configuration_guide09186a008068ea83.html

Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

Some Cisco access routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the router or
affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal (OIR). OIR
of a module provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing information, and
ensures session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, enhanced network modules use hard disks. Online removal of disks
without proper shutdown can result in file system corruption and might render the disk unusable. The
operating system on the network module must be shut down in an orderly fashion before the module
is removed or powered down.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a module, install another module
exactly like it in its place. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any installed WAN or voice
interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

30-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 30 Connecting AON Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps, with
the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a network module session using the following command:

Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

Press RETURN to get started!

Router> enable
Router#

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the network module using the following command from the
router # prompt:
Router# copy running-config tftp tftp-server-address filename

Step 3 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.

Step 4 On the router, clear the integrated-service-engine console session using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit shutdown

Step 6 Shut down the network module interface:

Router (config)# interface integrated-service-engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Step 7 Unplug all network interface cables from the network module.
Step 8 Loosen the two captive screws holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 9 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 10 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill
the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 11 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 12 Reconnect the network interface cables previously removed in Step 7.
Step 13 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power (PWR) and enable (EN) LEDs on the
front panel are also on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is
operational.
Step 14 Initiate a network module session with the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

ISE-network module now available

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 30-5
 Chapter 30 Connecting AON Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

Press RETURN to get started!

Router> enable
Router#

Step 15 Restore the network module running configuration by using the following command from the service
module prompt:
Router# copy tftp running-config tftp-server-address filename

Step 16 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.

Step 17 On the router, clear the network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

30-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 30 Connecting AON Network Modules
Related Documents

Related Documents
For additional information, refer to the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

Cisco Application-Oriented Networking Cisco Application-Oriented Networking Installation and Administration Guide
software installation and administration, http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/aon/aonadmin.pdf
and user guides
Cisco Application-Oriented Networking Development Studio User Guide
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/aon/ads/index.htm
Cisco IOS software website and reference Cisco IOS Software
documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
gory_home.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of new
feedback and assistance and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 30-7
 Chapter 30 Connecting AON Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

30-8 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 31
Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller
Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Cisco wireless LAN (WLAN) controller modules (WLCM) and
contains the following sections:
• Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules, page 31-2
• Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules to the Network, page 31-2
• Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module, page 31-3
• Related Documents, page 31-6
The Cisco wireless LAN (WLAN) controller module is designed to provide small and medium-sized
businesses (SMBs) and enterprise branch office customers 802.11 wireless networking solutions for
Cisco 2800 and Cisco 3800 series integrated services routers (ISRs) and Cisco 3700 series routers.

Note The Cisco 2801 integrated services router does not support the Cisco WLAN controller module.

Tip For information about which Cisco routers support the Cisco WLAN controller module, see the
“Platform Support for Cisco Network Modules” section on page 1-15.

Cisco WLAN controller modules ship with and boot from an installed 256-MB CompactFlash (CF)
memory card. The CompactFlash memory card contains the boot loader, Linux kernel, Cisco WLAN
controller module and access points executable file, and Cisco WLAN controller module configuration.

Note The wireless LAN controller module is supported only in network module slots. It is not supported in
EVM slots available in the Cisco 2821 and Cisco 2851 integrated services routers.

Note Before installing, configuring, or upgrading the Cisco WLAN controller module, see the Cisco Wireless
LAN Solution Product Guide at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6305/products_configuration_guide_book09186a00804f988b.
html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 31-1
 Chapter 31 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules
Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules

Figure 31-1 shows the faceplate of the Cisco WLAN controller module.

Note The 256-MB CompactFlash memory card in the Cisco WLAN controller module is not field-replaceable.

Figure 31-1 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module Faceplate

LINK ACT

NM-AIR-WLC6
Product contains cryptographic features
and is subject to US and local laws
governing import, export, transfer and use.
NOT SUPPORTED
LINK ACT

EN

138320
PWR CF
FastEthernet 0

PWR EN CF

Note The external Fast Ethernet port on the faceplate of the Cisco WLAN controller module is not supported.

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module LEDs

Table 31-1 lists the Cisco wireless LAN controller module LEDs and their meanings.

Table 31-1 Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module LED Meanings

LED Meaning
CF The CompactFlash memory card is active.
EN The module has passed self-test and is available to the router.
PWR Power is available to the controller module.

Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules to the

Network
The Cisco wireless LAN controller module connects to the network through internal connections within
the router and requires no additional cables for network connectivity.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

31-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 31 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules
Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module

Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Wireless LAN

Controller Module
The Cisco integrated services routers (ISRs) allow you to replace network modules without switching
off the router or affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and
removal (OIR). OIR of network modules provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains
routing information, and ensures session preservation.

Note OIR of the controller module is supported only on the Cisco 3745 router and the Cisco 3845 ISR.

Tip For information about module slot locations and numbering on Cisco routers, see “Network Module Slot
Locations and Numbering on Cisco Access Routers” section on page 1-3.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your type of router.

Saving the Configuration File

This configuration assumes a configuration file already exists on the Cisco WLAN controller module
CompactFlash memory card. To save the configuration file, follow these steps with the router in
privileged EXEC mode.

Step 1 Initiate a WLAN controller module console access session using the following command:
Router# service-module wlan-controller 1/0 session
Trying 192.0.2.254, 2066 ... Open

Step 2 Set the TFTP server IP address from the WLAN controller module console access session:
(WLAN-Controller) > transfer upload serverip 192.0.2.24

Step 3 Set the datatype configuration using the following command:

(WLAN-Controller) > transfer upload datatype configuration

Step 4 Set the running configuration file using the following command:
(WLAN-Controller) > transfer upload filename <config-running.bin>

Step 5 Start the TFTP transfer using the following command from the WLAN-Controller prompt:
(WLAN-Controller) > transfer upload start

Mode............................................. TFTP
TFTP Server IP................................... 192.0.2.24
TFTP Path........................................ /
TFTP Filename.................................... config.bin
Data Type........................................ Config File
Encryption....................................... Disabled

**************************************************
*** WARNING: Config File Encryption Disabled ***
**************************************************

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 31-3
 Chapter 31 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules
Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module

Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y

Tftp Config transfer starting.

File transfer operation completed successfully.

(WLAN-Controller) >

Step 6 Exit the WLAN controller module console access session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.
Step 7 Disconnect the WLAN controller interface connection on the router by using the disconnect command
and confirming the action by pressing Enter:
Router# disconnect
Closing connection to 192.0.2.254 [confirm]
Router#

Step 8 On the router, clear the WLAN controller access session using the following command:
Router# service-module wlan-controller 1/0 session clear

[confirm]
[OK]
Router#
[Resuming connection 1 to 192.0.2.254 ... ]

[Connection to 192.0.2.254 closed by foreign host]

Router#

Step 9 Shut down the content engine interface:

Router (config)# interface wlan-controller 1/0
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Replacing the Cisco WLAN Controller Module

Follow these steps to remove and replace the Cisco WLAN controller module.

Step 1 Loosen the two captive screws holding the WLAN controller module in the chassis slot.
Step 2 Slide the WLAN controller module out of the slot.
Step 3 Align the replacement WLAN controller module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently
into the slot.
Step 4 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 5 Check that the WLAN controller module LEDs are on and that the power and enable LEDs on the front
panel also are on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is operational.

Note Because the WLAN controller module needs to initialize itself, the EN (Enable) LED takes at
least 10 seconds to come on after the PWR LED.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

31-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 31 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules
Online Insertion and Removal with a Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module

Configuring the Replacement WLAN Controller Module

Follow these steps to configure the replacement Cisco WLAN controller module.

Step 1 Reset the WLAN controller module:

Router# service-module wlan-controller 1/0 reset

Use reset only to recover from shutdown or failed state

Warning: May lose data on the hard disc!
Do you want to reset?[confirm]
Trying to reset Service Module wlan-controller1/0.

Step 2 Turn on the WLAN controller interface, if it is necessary for further configuration:
Router# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Router(config)# interface wlan-controller 1/0
Router(config-if)# ip address 192.0.2.254 255.255.255.0
Router(config-if)# no shutdown
Router(config-if)# end
Router#
Router#

Step 3 Initiate a WLAN controller module console access session and access the bootloader prompt using the
following command:

Note The following typical example assumes there is already a configuration image available on the
WLAN controller module CompactFlash memory card. To configure a WLAN controller module
without an available configuration image, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Solution Product Guide
at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6305/products_configuration_guide_book09186a008
04f988b.html

Router# service-module wlan-controller slot/unit session

Trying 192.0.2.254, 2066 ... Open

Cisco Bootloader (Version 3.2.10.0)

Booting Primary Image...

Press <ESC> now for additional boot options...
Detecting hardware . . . .

Cisco is a trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.

Software Copyright Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Cisco AireOS Version 3.2.10.0

Initializing OS Services: ok
Initializing Serial Services: ok
Initializing Network Services: ok
...
Web Server: ok
CLI: ok
Secure Web: ok

(WLAN-Controller)

Enter User Name (or 'Recover-Config' to reset configuration to factory defaults)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 31-5
 Chapter 31 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules
Related Documents

Step 4 Enter the User ID and password at the WLAN controller prompt:
User: admin
Password: *****
(WLAN-Controller) >

Step 5 Set the TFTP server IP address from the WLAN controller module console access session:
(WLAN-Controller) > transfer download serverip 192.0.2.24

Step 6 Set the datatype configuration using the following command:

(WLAN-Controller) > transfer download datatype configuration

Step 7 Set the running configuration file using the following command:
(WLAN-Controller) > transfer download filename <config-running.bin>

Step 8 Start the TFTP transfer using the following command:

(WLAN-Controller) > transfer download start

Mode............................................. TFTP
TFTP Server IP................................... 192.0.2.24
TFTP Path........................................ /
TFTP Filename.................................... config-running.bin
Data Type........................................ Config File
Encryption....................................... Disabled

**************************************************
*** WARNING: Config File Encryption Disabled ***
**************************************************

Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y

Tftp Config transfer starting.

File transfer operation completed successfully.

(WLAN-Controller) >

Note After the successful file transfer, the WLAN controller module automatically reboots.

Related Documents
For additional information, see the following documents.

Tip For information on obtaining documentation, see the “Obtaining Documentation” section on page viii.
For information on obtaining technical assistance, see the “Obtaining Technical Assistance” section on
page xi.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

31-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 31 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules
Related Documents

Hardware Documentation
For general information on installing and removing Cisco modules, see the Cisco Network Modules
Hardware Installation Guide (this document).

Cisco IOS Software Documentation

For a description of the Cisco IOS features supported on Cisco wireless LAN controller modules, see
the “Cisco IOS Software Documentation” section on page 1-31.

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Module Documentation

For additional information about WLAN support on the Cisco wireless LAN controller module, see the
wireless support resources documentation at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/wireless/tsd_products_support_category_home.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 31-7
 Chapter 31 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

31-8 OL-2485-20
 CH A P T E R 32
Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller
Enhanced Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect Cisco wireless LAN (WLAN) controller enhanced network
modules (WLCM) and contains the following sections:
• Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Network Modules, page 32-1
• Shutting Down the WLAN Controller, page 32-3
• Establishing a Gigabit Ethernet Internal Connection, page 32-3
• Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules, page 32-3
• Related Documents, page 32-5

Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Network Modules

The Cisco wireless LAN (WLAN) controller network module is designed to provide 802.11 wireless
networking solutions to small- and medium-sized businesses (SMBs) and enterprise branch office
customers.
Two models of Cisco WLAN controller network module are available:
• NME-AIR-WLC8-K9— See Figure 32-1 on page 32-2
• NME-AIR-WLC12-K9— See Figure 32-1 on page 32-2
For information about the Cisco Wireless LAN controller module NM-AIR-WLC6 solution, see the
Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide at the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_installation_guide_chapter09186
a008078984f.html
Both models of Cisco WLAN controller enhanced network modules (NMEs) ship from the factory with
the following hardware preinstalled.

Model Hard Disk Memory

NME-AIR-WLC8-K9= N/A 256 MB
NME-AIR-WLC12-K9= N/A 256 MB

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 32-1
 Chapter 32 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Enhanced Network Modules
Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Network Modules

Figure 32-1 Cisco WLAN Controller Network Module Faceplate

SHUTDOWN: NOT SUPPORTED

GRACEFUL <1 s LINK ACT
IMMEDIATE >4 s
NOT
SYS SUPPORTED

230229
EN
USB
CF GigE

LINK Status of Gigabit Ethernet link

On—Link is enabled.
Off—Link is disabled.
Note This interface is not supported in this Cisco IOS software release.
ACT Status of Gigabit Ethernet activity
On—Active.
Off—Inactive.
PWR/SYS Status of system shutdown

Caution Do not remove power without first shutting down the

application.

On—Application is stable.
Off—System is shut down and ready for host power down.
Flashing—System shutdown is in progress.
EN Status of the network module
On—Detected by the host Cisco IOS software and enabled.
Off—Disabled.
CF Status of the CompactFlash
Off—CompactFlash is not used.
Flashing—Application detected CompactFlash at bootup.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

32-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 32 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Enhanced Network Modules
Shutting Down the WLAN Controller

Shutting Down the WLAN Controller

Insert a narrow pin into the shutdown opening on the faceplate, and press the button for less than
2 seconds to perform a graceful shutdown of the hard disk before removing power from the router or
before starting an online insertion and removal (OIR) sequence on the router. The application may take
up to 2 minutes to fully shut down.

Caution If you press the shutdown button for more than 2 seconds, an immediate shutdown of the hard disk will
occur and may cause file corruption on the network module’s hard disk. After an immediate shutdown,
the HD and SYS LEDs remain lighted. Press the shutdown button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully
reboot the network module.

Establishing a Gigabit Ethernet Internal Connection

The Cisco WLAN controller-enhanced network module lets you establish an internal Gigabit Ethernet
connection between an onboard small-form-factor pluggable (SFP) Gigabit Ethernet module and a
WLAN controller-enhanced network module installed in Cisco 3700 series routers, Cisco 2800
Integrated Services Routers (ISR), or Cisco 3800 ISRs.

Note The Cisco 2801 Integrated Services Router does not support the Cisco WLAN controller network
module.

Internal connections must be established as follows:

• Cisco 2811 router—Install the WLAN controller network module in slot 1
• Cisco 2821 router—Install the WLAN controller network module in slot 1
• Cisco 2851 router—Install the WLAN controller network module in slot 1
• Cisco 3725 router—Install the WLAN controller network module in slot 1
• Cisco 3745 router—Install the WLAN controller network module in any of slots 1 through 4
• Cisco 3825 router—Install the WLAN controller network module in slots 1 and 2
• Cisco 3845 router—Install the WLAN controller network module in any of slots 1 through 4

Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

Some Cisco access routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the router or
affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal (OIR).
OIR of a module provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing information, and
ensures session preservation.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a module, install another module
exactly like it in its place. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any installed WAN or voice
interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 32-3
 Chapter 32 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.
To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps, with
the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a network module session by using the following command:

Press RETURN to get started!

Router> enable
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine 1/0 session
Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open
User:

Step 2 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, and then pressing x.
Step 3 Save the running configuration of the network module by using the following command from the
router # prompt:
Router# copy running-config tftp tftp-server-address filename

Step 4 On the router, clear the integrated-service-engine console session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit shutdown

Step 6 Shut down the network module interface:

Router (config)# interface integrated-service-engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Step 7 Loosen the two captive screws holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 8 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 9 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill the
unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 10 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 11 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power (PWR) and enable (EN) LEDs on the
front panel are also on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is
operational.
Step 12 Initiate a network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module Integrated-Service-Engine 2/0 session

Trying 21.21.21.1, 2130 ... Open

(Cisco Controller) >

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

32-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 32 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Enhanced Network Modules
Related Documents

Step 13 Restore the network module running configuration by using the following command from the service
module prompt:
Router# copy tftp running-config tftp-server-address filename

Step 14 On the router, clear the network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Related Documents
For additional information, refer to the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

Hardware installation instructions for the Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Modules
Cisco Wireless LAN controller module http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
NM-AIR-WLC6 solution gory_home.html
Cisco IOS software website and reference Cisco IOS Software
documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
gory_home.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of
feedback and assistance new and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 32-5
 Chapter 32 Connecting Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Enhanced Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

32-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 33
Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN
Network Modules

This document provides hardware information about the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module,
which provides Cisco modular access routers with two-way satellite WAN connectivity in Gilat
SkyEdge–compatible satellite communications networks. The NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module
functions as the indoor unit (IDU) of a very small aperture terminal (VSAT), or earthbound station of a
satellite communications network. A “very small” dish antenna is called the outdoor unit (ODU) of a
VSAT. As the IDU, the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module serves as the interface between the ODU
and the VSAT LAN. The ODU receives and sends signals to a satellite, and the satellite sends and
receives signals from an earthbound central hub, which controls the entire operation of the satellite
network. Figure 33-1 shows the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module faceplate.

Figure 33-1 Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT) Faceplate

NM-1VSAT
GILAT

RF-IN ODU PWR RF-OUT

EXT RX ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX EN

127051

Contents
• Prerequisites for the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module, page 33-2
• Restrictions for the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module, page 33-2
• Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module, page 33-3
• How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module, page 33-10
• Related Documents, page 33-19

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-1
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Prerequisites for the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Prerequisites for the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

• You need a router that supports the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. For a list of supported
platforms, see the Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT) Data Sheet.
• The NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module requires an associated central hub, which monitors and
controls the satellite network. Therefore, you must take one of the following actions:
– Subscribe to service from a Gilat SkyEdge satellite service provider.
– Purchase your own Gilat SkyEdge hub equipment.
• The NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module requires a “Sat Kit” provided by a Gilat SkyEdge satellite
service provider. The Sat Kit includes the dish antenna equipment and an external power supply.

Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace, or service this equipment.
Statement 1030

Note For software-related prerequisites, see the Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module
(NM-1VSAT-GILAT) Cisco IOS feature module.

Restrictions for the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

• The NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module is supported only in Gilat SkyEdge–compatible satellite
communications networks. For more information, go to http://www.gilat.com/.
• One-way satellite connectivity is currently not supported.
• The NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module is designed for Ku-band and C-band satellite networks
using the Gilat SkyEdge Frequency and Time Division Multiple Access (FTDMA) technology.
The NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module is not compatible with these items:
– Other frequency bands, such as Ka-band
– Other satellite TDMA systems, including Digital Video Broadcasting–Return Channel by
Satellite (DVB-RCS), and Data Over Cable Service Interface Specification (DOCSIS)
– Other media access methods, such as Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC)
• The following hardware tasks are not described in this document and must be performed by a
Gilat SkyEdge–certified installer:
– Installing and aligning the dish antenna
– Running cables from the ODU to the IDU area
– Connecting two NM-1VSAT-GILAT network modules to one ODU for Hot Standby Router
Protocol (HSRP) redundancy

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

• To avoid damaging the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module, disconnect the power supply from the
ODU PWR connector on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module before you attempt any of the
following actions:
– Connecting a cable to the RF-IN or RF-OUT connector
– Disconnecting a cable from the RF-IN or RF-OUT connector
– Inserting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module into the router chassis
– Removing the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module from the router chassis
• After completing the hardware installation, moving the router with the installed NM-1VSAT-GILAT
network module may require longer radio frequency (RF) cables. Depending on the ODU type and
the additional length required for the cables, you may need a technician to install line amplifiers.
Contact your satellite service provider if you plan to extend your cables by more than 35 feet (11 m).

Note For software-related restrictions, see the Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module
(NM-1VSAT-GILAT) Cisco IOS feature module.

Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Before performing the tasks in this document, you should understand the following concepts:
• General Satellite Network Components, page 33-3
• NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module Connectors, page 33-7
• Outbound and Inbound Directions in a Satellite Communications Network, page 33-7
• NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module LEDs, page 33-7

Note For NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module features and benefits, supported hardware and software, and
other product information, see the Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT)
Data Sheet.

General Satellite Network Components

Figure 33-2 shows a satellite communications network that includes NM-1VSAT-GILAT
network modules.

Note Not shown in Figure 33-2 are the terrestrial WAN connections that are also commonly used to connect
VSAT routers to the Internet or an intranet. A terrestrial WAN connection can be used to back up a
satellite link or can serve as a primary link that is backed up by a satellite link.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-3
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Figure 33-2 Satellite Communications Network Using the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Land Space Land

(HQ, Internet, hub) (satellite) (VSATs)
ODU IDU

1 6

NM-1VSAT
GILAT

RF-IN RF-OUT
ODU PWR
W0
EXT RE ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX EN
LINK ETHERNET 1 ACT LINK ETHERNET 0 ACT CONSOLE AUX

4
5
Intranet or
Internet

NM-1VSAT

3
GILAT

RF-IN RF-OUT
ODU PWR
W0
EXT RE ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX EN

4
LINK ETHERNET 1 ACT LINK ETHERNET 0 ACT CONSOLE AUX

Central hub 2
6

4 NM-1VSAT
GILAT

RF-IN
ODU PWR
RF-OUT
W0
EXT RE ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX EN
LINK ETHERNET 1 ACT LINK ETHERNET 0 ACT CONSOLE AUX

117125
1 Corporate headquarters/campus 4 Dish antenna (ODU1) at VSAT2
2 Dish antenna at hub 5 NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module at VSAT
3 Satellite in space 6 Local network at VSAT; for example, a branch office
network connected to an Ethernet port on the router
1. ODU = outdoor unit
2. VSAT = very small aperture terminal

At a high level, the many components of an enterprise satellite communications network can be divided
into three categories:
• Satellite
• Hub
• VSATs

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Satellite
Placed in orbit around the earth, a satellite is a specialized repeater that receives radio-frequency signals
from earth stations and retransmits them to other earth stations. The satellite also amplifies the signals
and switches the frequencies between the uplink and the downlink carriers. Gilat SkyEdge systems use
geostationary satellites with a fixed satellite-to-earth delay of about 250 ms.

Hub
The central hub—sometimes referred to as the “master earth station” but most often simply called the
“hub”—contains many components, including:
• Large dish antenna (15 to 36 feet [4.5 to 11 m] in diameter)
• Satellite network management system (NMS) and provisioning stations, from which a network
operator can monitor and control all components of the enterprise satellite communications network.
• Baseband equipment that handles satellite access, routing between the hub and remote earth stations,
dial backup, quality of service (QoS), TCP acceleration, and HTTP acceleration.
• Optional components: web caches, MPEG transport coder/decoder, application server farms, and
audio/video broadcast programming devices.

Note Throughout this document, the “hub” refers specifically to a Gilat SkyEdge hub.

VSATs
A very small aperture terminal (VSAT) is an earth station that can be divided into two areas:
• Indoor unit (IDU), which generally serves to connect the local network to the hub through the
satellite link. The IDU components vary, depending on the functions required, but the components
typically include these items:
– Integrated receiver decoder (IRD) for the tuning
– Demodulation and decoding of L-band or other type of intermediate frequency (IF) passed from
the dish
– End-user input/output
• Outdoor unit (ODU), which includes a “very small” dish antenna (2 to 6 feet [0.5 to 2 m] in
diameter) and its components, shown in Figure 33-3. The ODU is typically mounted on a building
roof or outer wall, or placed on the ground.
The NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module functions as the IDU of a VSAT and is connected to the ODU
through coaxial cables. A power supply is connected to the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module to
provide power over the coaxial cables to the ODU.

Note The NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module supports only the ODU equipment and power supply that
comes in the “Sat Kit” provided by a Gilat SkyEdge satellite service provider.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-5
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Figure 33-3 ODU Components

3
2

4
5

127467

Figure
Callout ODU Component Function
1 Low noise block converter Amplifies and converts high-frequency satellite signals into
(LNB) lower-frequency signals.
2 Transmit reject filter Filters out transmitted signals so that only signals received from
the satellite enter the LNB.
3 Feed horn Captures signals from and transmits energy to the reflector.
4 Orthomode transducer Separates transmitted signals from received signals, which have
(OMT) different polarization and frequency.
5 Solid state block converter Amplifies and converts the low-frequency signals from the IDU
and power amplifier to high-frequency signals for transmission across the satellite
(SSPA) link.
6 Reflector Concave dish surface which focuses the energy received from
the satellite to the feed horn and which transfers the energy
transmitted by the feed horn to the satellite.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module Connectors

Table 33-1 lists the physical connectors that appear on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module
faceplate.

Table 33-1 NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module Connectors

Connector Type Connects To

RF-IN 75-ohm female F connector LNB on the dish antenna
RF-OUT 75-ohm female F connector SSPA on the dish antenna
ODU PWR 2-mm DC jack External 24 V-DC power supply

Outbound and Inbound Directions in a Satellite Communications Network

The outbound direction applies to signals transmitted from the hub to the VSAT. Within a VSAT
network, the outbound direction applies to RF communication from the dish antenna (ODU) to the
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module (IDU). From the VSAT perspective, the outbound direction is
the receive path. Gilat SkyEdge outbound signals include user data and timing data that are compatible
with the Digital Video Broadcasting–Satellite (DVB-S) standard.
The inbound direction applies to signals transmitted from the VSAT to the hub. Within a VSAT network,
the inbound direction applies to RF communication from the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module (IDU)
to the dish antenna (ODU). From the VSAT perspective, the inbound direction is the transmit path.
Inbound signals include user data and retransmission requests.

NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module LEDs

The Cisco IP VSAT satellite WAN network module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT) has six LEDs, shown in
Figure 33-4 and described in Table 33-2.

Figure 33-4 NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module LEDs

NM-1VSAT
GILAT

RF-IN ODU PWR RF-OUT

EXT RX ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX EN
117347

1 2 3 4 5 6

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-7
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Table 33-2 NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module LED Descriptions

Figure
Ref. LED State Meaning Possible Causes and Corrective Actions
1
1 EXT Blinking ODU power DC level is correct, and the Normal indication. No action required.
DC network module VSAT2 software is
running.
Steady on ODU power supply is connected properly, Wait until the VSAT software completes the
but the network module VSAT software is boot process.
not running.
Off ODU power supply is not connected or is Check ODU power supply connections. See the
outside the specified DC range. “Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network
Module to the External Power Supply” section
on page 33-12.
2 RX On DVB3 (outbound4) receiver is locked. Normal indication. No action required.
LOCK Off NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module does The VSAT parameters are configured
not see or recognize the DVB carrier signal incorrectly. See the Cisco IP VSAT Satellite
from the hub. WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT)
Cisco IOS feature module.
The network module is not properly connected
to the LNB.5 Check the RF6 cables or contact
your satellite service provider.
The dish antenna is misaligned. Contact your
satellite service provider.
There is a hub failure, or the hub is configured
incorrectly. Contact your satellite service
provider.
3 SYNC On NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module is Normal indication. No action required.
synchronized with the hub timing.
Off NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module is not If the RX LOCK LED is also off, then see the
synchronized with the hub timing. corrective actions for RX LOCK.
If the RX LOCK LED is on while the SYNC
LED is off, then the following apply:
• The VSAT parameters are configured
incorrectly. See the Cisco IP VSAT Satellite
WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT)
Cisco IOS feature module.
• There is a hub failure, or the hub is
configured incorrectly. Contact your
satellite service provider.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Information About the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Table 33-2 NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module LED Descriptions (continued)

Figure
Ref. LED State Meaning Possible Causes and Corrective Actions
4 ON On IP connectivity to the hub is fully Normal indication. No action required.
LINE established.
Off IP connectivity to the hub was If the SYNC LED is also off, then see the
unsuccessful. corrective actions for SYNC.
If the SYNC LED is on while the ON LINE LED
is off, then the following apply:
• There is a problem somewhere in the return
path from the network module to the hub.
Check the cabling between the RF-OUT
connector and the SSPA.7
• The SSPA may not be working. Contact
your satellite service provider.
• The dish antenna is misaligned. Contact
your satellite service provider.
• There is a hub failure, or the hub is
configured incorrectly. Contact your
satellite service provider.
5 TX Flickering Inbound8 transmission is in progress. Normal indication. No action required.
Off No inbound transmission is in progress. If you are concerned about the TX LED being
off, then try to ping the hub or another
destination on the other side of the satellite link.
If the TX LED does not flicker during the ping,
then the network module is not attempting to
send data to the hub.
• Wait until the VSAT software completes the
boot process.
• Verify that your Cisco IOS software
configuration is correct. See the Cisco IP
VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module
(NM-1VSAT-GILAT) Cisco IOS feature
module.
• The VSAT software has failed. Contact
your satellite service provider.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-9
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Table 33-2 NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module LED Descriptions (continued)

Figure
Ref. LED State Meaning Possible Causes and Corrective Actions
6 EN On The router’s Cisco IOS software Normal indication. No action required.
recognizes the network module.
Off The router’s Cisco IOS software does not Verify that the network module is properly
recognize the network module. installed in the router chassis. See the
“Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco
Access Routers” chapter.
1. ODU = outdoor unit.
2. VSAT = very small aperture terminal.
3. DVB = Digital Video Broadcasting.
4. The receive direction at the remote VSAT is called the outbound direction from the hub. See the “Outbound and Inbound Directions in a Satellite
Communications Network” section on page 33-7.
5. LNB = low noise block converter.
6. RF = radio frequency.
7. SSPA = solid state block converter and power amplifier.
8. The transmit direction at the remote VSAT is called the inbound direction to the hub. See the “Outbound and Inbound Directions in a Satellite
Communications Network” section on page 33-7.

How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT

Network Module
This section contains the following procedures, each of which may or may not be required, depending
on which tasks your satellite service provider performs for you:
• Installing the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module in the Router Chassis, page 33-10
• Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the ODU, page 33-10
• Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the External Power Supply, page 33-12
• Replacing the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module in the Router Chassis, page 33-14

Installing the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module in the Router Chassis

To install the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module in the router chassis, see the “Installing Cisco
Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” chapter of the Cisco Network Modules Hardware
Installation Guide.

Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the ODU

This section describes how to connect the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module to the ODU.
Shielded RG-6, RG-11, or both types of RF cables are used to connect the NM-1VSAT-GILAT
network module to the ODU. Typically, a satellite service provider installation technician installs the
ODU, connects RG-11 cables to the dish antenna, and runs the RG-11 cables to the area near the router.
The technician also typically terminates the RG-11 cables and adds short RG-6 cables, which are then
connected to the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module in the router.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-10 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Note If an installation technician has already connected the NM-1VSAT-GILAT to the ODU, then do not
perform this task. Instead, proceed directly to the “Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module
to the External Power Supply” section on page 33-12.

Prerequisites
• Install the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module in the router chassis. See the “Installing Cisco
Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” chapter of the Cisco Network Modules Hardware
Installation Guide.
• Make sure that your ODU is installed and connected to RF cables that lead to the area near the
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. Contact your satellite service provider for ODU and cable
installation information.

Steps
To connect the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module to the ODU, follow these steps:

Step 1 Disconnect the power supply from the ODU PWR connector on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT
network module.

Caution Make sure that the external power supply is disconnected from the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module
before connecting cables to the RF-IN or RF-OUT connectors. If the external power supply is connected
to the ODU PWR connector while you connect or disconnect cables to the RF-IN or RF-OUT
connectors, you might short-circuit the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module F connectors. This may
cause the network module to reset itself or lose data.

Step 2 Take the indoor end of the cable that leads to the LNB, and connect it to the RF-IN connector on the
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. (See Figure 33-5.)
Step 3 Take the indoor end of the cable that leads to the SSPA, and connect it to the RF-OUT connector on the
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. (See Figure 33-5.)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-11
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Figure 33-5 Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the ODU

ODU IDU

3 4

NM-1VSAT
GILAT

127469
RF-IN ODU PWR RF-OUT

EXT RE ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX EN

1 LNB 3 RF-IN connector

2 SSPA 4 RF-OUT connector

What to Do Next
Proceed to the “Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the External Power Supply”
section on page 33-12.

Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the External

Power Supply
This section describes how to connect the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module to the external
power supply that comes in the “Sat Kit” provided by a Gilat SkyEdge satellite service provider. The
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module requires additional power to operate the ODU, which includes the
dish antenna and its parts, such as the LNB, SSPA, OMT, and feed horn.

Note If an installation technician has already connected a power supply to the ODU, then do not perform
this task. Instead, proceed directly to the software configuration tasks for your NM-1VSAT-GILAT
network module. See the Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT)
Cisco IOS feature module.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-12 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Prerequisites
• Install the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module in the router chassis. See the “Installing Cisco
Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” chapter of the Cisco Network Modules Hardware
Installation Guide.
• Connect the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module to the ODU. See the “Connecting the
NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the ODU” section on page 33-10.

Restrictions
Only use the power supply provided in the Gilat ODU kit. Use of any other power supply will void the
warranties for your NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module and outdoor equipment.

Steps
To connect the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module to the external power supply, follow these steps:

Step 1 Connect the power supply cable to the ODU PWR connector on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT
network module. (See Figure 33-6.)
Step 2 Connect the power supply to a general-purpose electrical outlet. (For the United States, see Figure 33-6.
For Europe, see Figure 33-7.)

Figure 33-6 Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the Power Supply (USA)

NM-1VSAT
GILAT

RF-IN ODU PWR RF-OUT

EXT RX ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX EN

Step 2 Step 1
127050

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-13
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Figure 33-7 Connecting the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module to the Power Supply (Europe)

NM-1VSAT
GILAT

RF-IN ODU PWR RF-OUT

EXT RX ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX EN

Step 2 Step 1

127468
What to Do Next
Proceed to the software configuration for your NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. See the Cisco IP
VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT) Cisco IOS feature module.

Replacing the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module in the Router Chassis

This section describes how to replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module in your router. Complete
one of the following tasks, depending on whether or not your router supports online insertion and
removal (OIR):
• Performing Online Insertion and Removal of the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module, page 33-14
• Replacing the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module in a Router, page 33-17

Performing Online Insertion and Removal of the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

The online insertion and removal (OIR) feature enables some Cisco modular access routers to support
the replacement of network modules without switching off the router or affecting the operation of other
interfaces. Also, routing information is maintained during OIR of network modules.
If your router does not support OIR, do not perform this task to replace your NM-1VSAT-GILAT
network module. Instead, go to the “Replacing the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module in a Router”
section on page 33-17.

Restrictions

• Only the Cisco 3745 and Cisco 3845 routers support OIR of the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network
module.
• All connections made through the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module are reset during OIR.
• You must perform OIR with similar modules. If you remove a network module, install another
network module exactly like it in its place.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-14 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Steps

To perform OIR of the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module in your router, follow these steps:

Step 1 Initiate a console session with your router.

Step 2 Enter satellite interface configuration mode and shut down the interface:
Router> enable
Router# configure terminal
Router(config)# interface satellite slot/0
Router(config-if)# shutdown
Router(config-if)# end
Router#

Step 3 Disconnect the power supply cable from the ODU PWR connector on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network
module.

Caution Make sure that the external power supply is disconnected from the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module
before connecting or disconnecting cables from the RF-IN or RF-OUT connectors. If the external power
supply is connected to the ODU PWR connector while you connect or disconnect cables from the RF-IN
or RF-OUT connectors, you might short-circuit the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module F connectors.
This may cause the network module to reset itself or lose data.

Step 4 (Optional but recommended) Label the RF cables “RF-IN” and “RF-OUT.”
Step 5 Disconnect the cables from the RF-IN and RF-OUT connectors on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network
module.
Step 6 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the captive mounting screws on the network
module faceplate.

Caution To avoid damaging the network module, always handle the network module by the handle or faceplate.
Do not touch the circuit board.

Step 7 Using the module handle, pull the network module from the router slot. (See Figure 33-8.)

Figure 33-8 Removing a Single-Wide Network Module

ACT

WO

SERIAL

NM-1VSAT
GILAT

RF-IN
ODU PWR
RF-OUT
EXT RX ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX

EN
127418

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-15
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Step 8 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis walls or slot divider and slide it
gently into the slot. (See Figure 33-9.)

Figure 33-9 Installing a Single-Wide Network Module

ACT
WO

SERIAL

127419
NM-1VSAT
GILAT

ETHERNET 0

RF-IN
ODU PWR
RF-OUT
EXT RX ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX

EN

Step 9 Using the network module handle, push the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module into place until you
feel the edge connector seat securely into the connector on the router backplane. The network module
faceplate should contact the chassis rear panel.
Step 10 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the captive mounting screws on the network
module faceplate.

Caution Make sure that the external power supply is disconnected from the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module
before connecting or disconnecting cables from the RF-IN or RF-OUT connectors. If the external power
supply is connected to the ODU PWR connector while you connect or disconnect cables from the RF-IN
or RF-OUT connectors, you might short-circuit the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module F connectors.
This may cause the network module to reset itself or lose data.

Step 11 Connect the RF cables to the RF-IN and RF-OUT connectors on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network
module.
Step 12 Connect the power supply cable to the ODU PWR connector on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network
module.
Step 13 Confirm that the network module LEDs come on. For more information about the LEDs, see the
“NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module LEDs” section on page 33-7.
Step 14 Initiate a console session with your router.
Step 15 Enter satellite interface configuration mode, and enable the satellite interface:
Router> enable
Router# configure terminal
Router(config)# interface satellite slot/0
Router(config-if)# no shutdown
Router(config-if)# end
Router#

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-16 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

What to Do Next

Configure the initial VSAT parameters for the new NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. See the
Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT) Cisco IOS feature module.

Note Satellite initial configuration mode can only be accessed by a password that is unique to each
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. If an installation technician does not configure the initial
VSAT parameters, then your satellite service provider will provide the password for your new
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module.

Replacing the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module in a Router

This section describes how to replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module when your router does
not support online insertion and removal (OIR). If your router supports OIR, do not perform this task.
Instead, go to the “Performing Online Insertion and Removal of the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network
Module” section on page 33-14.
To replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module in your router, follow these steps:

Step 1 Disconnect the power supply cable from the ODU PWR connector on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT
network module.

Caution Make sure that the external power supply is disconnected from the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module
before connecting or disconnecting cables from the RF-IN or RF-OUT connectors. If the external power
supply is connected to the ODU PWR connector while you connect or disconnect cables from the RF-IN
or RF-OUT connectors, you might short-circuit the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module F connectors.
This may cause the network module to reset itself or lose data.

Step 2 (Optional but recommended) Label the RF cables “RF-IN” and “RF-OUT.”
Step 3 Disconnect the cables from the RF-IN and RF-OUT connectors on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network
module.
Step 4 Turn off electrical power to the router. Leave the power cable plugged in to channel ESD voltages to
ground.
The following warning applies only to routers that use DC power.

Warning Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit.
To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC
circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit
breaker in the OFF position. Statement 7

Timesaver Label the cables or prepare a network cabling diagram before removing cables.

Step 5 Remove all network cables, including telephone cables, from the rear panel of the router.
Step 6 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the captive mounting screws on the
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module faceplate.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-17
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module

Caution To avoid damaging the network module, always handle the network module by the handle or faceplate.
Do not touch the circuit board.

Step 7 Using the module handle, pull the network module from the router slot. (See Figure 33-10.)

Figure 33-10 Removing a Single-Wide Network Module

ACT

WO

SERIAL

NM-1VSAT
GILAT

RF-IN
ODU PWR
RF-OUT
EXT RX ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX

EN

127418
Step 8 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis walls or slot divider and slide it
gently into the slot. (See Figure 33-11.)

Figure 33-11 Installing a Single-Wide Network Module

ACT

WO

SERIAL

127419
NM-1VSAT
GILAT

ETHERNET 0

RF-IN
ODU PWR
RF-OUT
EXT RX ON
DC LOCK SYNC LINE TX

EN

Step 9 Using the network module handle, push the module into place until you feel the edge connector seat
securely into the connector on the router backplane. The network module faceplate should contact the
chassis rear panel.
Step 10 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the captive mounting screws on the network
module faceplate.
Step 11 Turn on electrical power to the router.
The following warning applies only to routers that use DC power.

Warning After wiring the DC power supply, remove the tape from the circuit breaker switch handle and
reinstate power by moving the handle of the circuit breaker to the ON position. Statement 8

Caution Make sure that the external power supply is disconnected from the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module
before connecting or disconnecting cables from the RF-IN or RF-OUT connectors. If the external power
supply is connected to the ODU PWR connector while you connect or disconnect cables from the RF-IN
or RF-OUT connectors, you might short-circuit the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module F connectors.
This may cause the network module to reset itself or lose data.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-18 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Related Documents

Step 12 Connect the RF cables to the RF-IN and RF-OUT connectors on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network
module.
Step 13 Connect the power supply cable to the ODU PWR connector on the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network
module.
Step 14 Reconnect all other network cables, including telephone cables, to the rear panel of the router.
Step 15 Confirm that the NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module LEDs come on. For more information about the
LEDs, see the “NM-1VSAT-GILAT Network Module LEDs” section on page 33-7.

What to Do Next

Configure the initial VSAT parameters for the new NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. See the
Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT) Cisco IOS feature module.

Note Satellite initial configuration mode can only be accessed by a password that is unique to each
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module. If an installation technician does not configure the initial VSAT
parameters, then your satellite service provider will provide the password for your new
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module.

Related Documents
Related Topic Document Title or URL
Regulatory compliance and safety Cisco Network Modules and Interface Cards Regulatory Compliance and
information Safety Information
Cisco IOS software configuration for the Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Module (NM-1VSAT-GILAT)
NM-1VSAT-GILAT network module
Platform documentation for the Cisco 2600 http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/access/acs_mod/index.htm
series, Cisco 2800 series, Cisco 3700 series,
and Cisco 3800 series routers
Cisco IOS release notes http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/software/ios123/123relnt/

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 33-19
 Chapter 33 Connecting Cisco IP VSAT Satellite WAN Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

33-20 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 34
Connecting Cisco Network Admission Control
Network Modules

This chapter describes Cisco Network Admission Control (NAC)- network modules for Cisco access
routers, and contains the following sections:
• Cisco NAC Network Modules, page 34-21
• Connecting NAC Network Modules, page 34-23
• Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco NAC Network Modules, page 34-24
• Related Documents, page 34-27

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Cisco NAC Network Modules

Cisco NAC network modules allow network administrators to authenticate, authorize, evaluate, and
remediate wired, wireless, and remote users and their machines before allowing users onto a network.
The NAC module identifies whether networked devices, such as laptops, desktops, and corporate assets
are compliant with a network’s security policies, and it addresses vulnerabilities before permitting
access to the network.
The Cisco NAC network module ships from the factory with the following hardware preinstalled.

Note See the Cisco NAC network module data sheet for supported Cisco Internet Operating System (IOS)
version information, http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6128/products_data_sheets_list.html.

Model Hard Disk Memory CompactFlash

NME-NAC-K9 80 GB 512 MB 64 MB

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 34-21
 Chapter 34 Connecting Cisco Network Admission Control Network Modules
Cisco NAC Network Modules

The Cisco NAC network module LEDs are shown in Figure 34-1 and described in Table 34-1.

Figure 34-1 NME-NAC-K9 Faceplate

NME-NAC-K9

Never remove compact

flash during operation Shut down
! application
before removing or
power cycling.

231068
Table 34-1 NME-NAC-K9 LED Descriptions

CF Status of the CompactFlash

Off—CompactFlash is not detected
Flashing—Application detected CompactFlash at bootup
LINK Status of Gigabit Ethernet link
On—Link is enabled
Off—Link is disabled
ACT Status of Gigabit Ethernet activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive
DISK Status of hard drive activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive
PWR/SYS Status of system shutdown
Note Do not remove power without first shutting down the application.
See the “Shutting Down the NAC Network Module” section on
page 34-23.

On—Application is stable
Off—System is shut down and ready for host power down
Flashing—System shutdown is in progress
EN Status of the network module
On—Detected by the host Cisco IOS software and enabled
Off—Disabled

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

34-22 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 34 Connecting Cisco Network Admission Control Network Modules
Connecting NAC Network Modules

Shutting Down the NAC Network Module

Press the shutdown button on the network module faceplate for less than 2 seconds to perform a graceful
shutdown of the hard disk before removing power from the router or before starting an online insertion
and removal (OIR) sequence on the router. The application may take up to 2 minutes to fully shut down.

Note See the Getting Started with NAC Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers document on Cisco.com for
instructions that describe how to shut down the network module from the command line interface on the
router, http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6128/prod_installation_guides_list.html

Caution If you press the shutdown button for more than 4 seconds, a non-graceful shutdown of the hard disk will
occur and may cause file corruption on the network module’s hard disk. After a non-graceful shutdown,
the DISK and SYS LEDs remain lighted. Press the shutdown button for less than 1 second to gracefully
reboot the network module.

Connecting NAC Network Modules

To connect Cisco NAC network modules to an external device use a straight-through two-pair
Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable and connect the RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet port on the
network module to a switch, hub, repeater, or other Gigabit Ethernet network device.

Warning To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the Network Admission Control Network Modules (NME-NAC-K9) only to intra-building or
unexposed wiring or cable. The intrabuilding cable must be shielded and the shield must be grounded
at both ends. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly must not be metallically
connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use
as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and
require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient
protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5 cables.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 34-23
 Chapter 34 Connecting Cisco Network Admission Control Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco NAC Network Modules

Establishing a Gigabit Ethernet Internal Logical Connection

Use the Cisco High-Speed Intrachassis Module Interconnect (HIMI) feature to establish a Gigabit
Ethernet (GE) internal logical connection between two NMEs, or between an onboard small-form-factor
pluggable (SFP) GE module and an NME on Cisco 3825 and Cisco 3845 routers.
Connections can be established only as follows:
• Between the GE port in an installed onboard SFP module on the Cisco 3825 and Cisco 3845 routers
• Between GE interfaces in NME slots 1 and 2 on the Cisco 3825 router
• Between GE interfaces in NME slots 2 and 4 on the Cisco 3845 router

Note A module interconnection between the GE port on an SFP module and an NME slot or an NME-to-NME
cross-connection is permitted at any given time, but both types of connections cannot exist at the same
time.

Note Connections between the onboard RJ-45 GE ports and NME slots are not supported.

For details about configuring HIMI connections, see the Cisco High-Speed Intrachassis Module
Interconnect (HIMI) Configuration Guide on Cisco.com,
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5855/prod_configuration_guide09186a008068ea83.html

Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco NAC Network Modules

Some Cisco access routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the router or
affecting the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal (OIR).
Module OIR provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing information, and
ensures session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, the Cisco NAC network module uses a hard disk. Online removal of
disks without proper shutdown can result in file system corruption and might render the disk
unusable. The operating system on the network module must be shut down in an orderly fashion
before the module is removed or powered down.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a module, install another module
exactly like it in its place. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any installed WAN or voice
interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

34-24 OL-2485-20
Chapter 34 Connecting Cisco Network Admission Control Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco NAC Network Modules

To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps,
beginning in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a network module session using the following command:

Router# service-module integrated-service-engine 1/0 session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

Press RETURN to get started!

Router> enable
Router#

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the network module by using the following command from the
router # prompt:
Router# copy running-config tftp tftp-server-address filename

Step 3 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.

Step 4 On the router, clear the integrated-service-engine console session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit shutdown

Step 6 Shut down the network module interface:

Router (config)# interface integrated-service-engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Step 7 Unplug all network interface cables from the network module.
Step 8 Loosen the two captive screws holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 9 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 10 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill
the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 11 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 12 Reconnect the network interface cables that you disconnected in Step 7.
Step 13 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power (PWR) and enable (EN) LEDs on the
front panel are also on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is
operational.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 34-25
 Chapter 34 Connecting Cisco Network Admission Control Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco NAC Network Modules

Step 14 Initiate a network module session with the following command:

Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session
Trying 11.1.1.8, 2130 ... Open

Fedora Core release 4 (stentz)

Kernel 2.6.11-perfigo on an 1686

login:

Step 15 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.

Step 16 Restore the network module running configuration by using the following command from the service
module prompt:
Router# copy tftp running-config tftp-server-address filename

Step 17 On the router, clear the network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

34-26 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 34 Connecting Cisco Network Admission Control Network Modules
Related Documents

Related Documents
For additional information, refer to the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

Cisco Network Admission Control (NAC) Getting Started with Cisco NAC Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers
Software and Hardware Documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6128/prod_installation_guides_list.ht
ml
Cisco NAC Appliance Clean Access Manager Installation and Configuration
Guide
Cisco NAC Appliance Clean Access Server Installation and Configuration
Guide
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6128/products_installation_and_confi
guration_guides_list.html
Cisco Network Admission Control Installation and Administration Guides
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6128/products_user_guide_list.html
Cisco NAC Appliance Service Contract and Licensing Support
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6128/prod_installation_guides_list.ht
ml
Cisco IOS software website and reference Cisco IOS Software
documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
gory_home.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of new
feedback and assistance and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 34-27
 Chapter 34 Connecting Cisco Network Admission Control Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

34-28 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 35
Connecting Application Performance Assurance
Enhanced Network Modules

Last Updated: Aug 21, 2007

This chapter describes the Application Performance Assurance enhanced network module (NME-APA)
for Cisco access routers, and contains the following sections:
• Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Module, page 35-1
• Connecting the Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Module, page 35-4
• Online Insertion and Removal of NME-APA-E3, page 35-4
• Related Documents, page 35-9

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network

Module
The Application Performance Assurance NME (NME-APA) actively manages traffic flow based on
multiple criteria such as business priorities, application or protocol recognition, user awareness and
other criteria as described in the NME-APA User Guide.
This section provides information about the following network modules:
• The NME-APA-E2—Supports the Cisco 2811, 2821, and 2851 Integrated Services Routers.
• The NME-APA-E3— Supports the Cisco 3825 and 3845 Integrated Services Routers
Both are shipped from the factory, preinstalled with the following hardware listed below.

Table 35-1 NME-APA Hardware

Model Hard Disk Memory Compact Flash Memory USB RJ45

NME-APA-E2 80 GB 1 GB None Not Used Not Used
(SATA)
NME-APA-E3 80 GB 1 GB None Not Used Not Used
(SATA)

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-1
 Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Module

Figure 35-1 NME-APA1Faceplate

NME-APA-E3
XXX-XXXXX-XX XX

Never remove compact

SHUTDOWN: flash during operation
GRACEFUL <1 s LINK ACT Shut down
application
IMMEDIATE >4 s before removing or
power cycling.

EN

230775
DISK SYS

CF GigE USB

CF LINK ACT DISK EN

SYS

Table 35-2 LED Colors Functions

LED Color Function Notes

CF Green Status of compact flash There is no compact
flash memory.
On—CF detected
Therefore this LED is
Off—No CF detected unused.
LINK Green Status of Gigabit Gigabit Ethernet is not
Ethernet (GE) link supported. Therefore
this LED is unused.
On—Link is up
Off—Link is down
ACT Green Status of GE activity Gigabit Ethernet is not
supported. Therefore
On—Active
this LED is unused.
Off—Inactive
DISK Green Status of disk
On—Active
Off—Inactive

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-2
 Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Module

LED Color Function Notes

SYS Green Status of system This LED functions
only when a shutdown
ON – Shutdown
is attempted. This LED
complete and the
is off until the system
system is ready for
shutdown is complete
power off
and the module can be
OFF – Shutdown not safely powered off,
complete Then the LED turns
green.
EN Green Status of the network This LED is off when
module the NME-APA card is
plugged into a chassis
On—Detected by the
that does not support it.
host Cisco IOS software
This LED turns on
and enabled
briefly when detecting a
Off—Disabled card type, then goes off
after determining the
card type is not
supported.

Note that a network

module that is shut
down is not disabled.

Shutting Down and Removing the NME-APA

Enhanced network modules contain hard disks. Removing a module without a graceful shutdown may
result in disk file corruption. Before removing power from the router or starting an online insertion and
removal (OIR) sequence, perform a graceful shutdown by pressing the Reset button on the network
module for less than 1 second, or using an appropriate command-line interface command.

Note See the NME-APA User Guide for details about shutting down the application software on the network
module.

Caution Do not remove or insert a module with power on unless it is an NME-APA-E3 in a Cisco 3845 Integrated
Services Router.

The application may take 3 minutes to fully shut down. See the NME-APA User Guide for instructions
on shutting down the software application on the module.

Caution Pressing the shutdown button for more than 4 seconds initiates a non-graceful shutdown of the hard disk
which may cause file corruption. After a non-graceful shutdown, the HD and SYS LEDs remain lighted.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-3
 Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Connecting the Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Module

Connecting the Application Performance Assurance Enhanced

Network Module
The external RJ-45 connector on the NME-APA is not supported at this time; we recommend that you
do not make any connections to it.

Online Insertion and Removal of NME-APA-E3

Only Cisco 3845 Integrated Services Routers (ISRs) allow replacing NME-APA-E3 modules without
first removing power from the router. This ability is called online insertion and removal (OIR). While
traffic monitoring stops during a module’s removal, OIR provides uninterrupted network connectivity.
Enhanced network modules contain hard disks that require graceful shutdown. Removing a module
without graceful shutdown may result in disk file corruption.

Caution Before removing power from the router or starting an online insertion and removal (OIR) sequence,
perform a graceful shutdown by pressing the Reset button on the network module for less than
1 second, or using an appropriate CLI command.

Caution OIR operates only with modules that are the same type. If you remove a module, install another
module exactly like it in its place. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any installed WAN or
voice interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For descriptions of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.

Saving the NME-APA Configuration File

The NME-APA has its own configuration file which is separate from that of the router. Save the existing
configuration file before you replace the module to ensure that the new module will operate exactly as
the old module did.
To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps in
privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Telnet to the NME-APA:

Router# telnet 10.10.10.2

Trying 10.10.10.2...
Connected to 10.10.10.2.
Escape character is '^]'.

User Access Verification

Username:
Password:
NME-APA> enable

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-4
Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of NME-APA-E3

Password:

NME-APA#

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the network module by using the following command:
NME-APA# copy running-config startup-config
Writing general configuration file to temporary location...
Backing-up general configuration file...
Copy temporary file to final location...
NME-APA#>copy startup-config backup.config

Step 3 Confirm that your backup.config file is created by entering the following command and reviewing the
file list:
NME-APA# dir
File list for /root/tffs0/
200 Thu Apr 5 10:25:42 200 . DIR
72 Thu Mar 22 03:45:31 200 .. DIR
80 Thu Mar 22 03:45:31 200 app DIR
136 Thu Mar 22 03:45:31 200 engage DIR
48 Thu Mar 22 03:46:14 200 images DIR
1663 Thu Apr 5 10:25:42 200 backup.config
512 Thu Apr 5 10:24:56 200 system DIR

Step 4 Back up the configuration file to a host:

NME-APA# copy backup.config ftp://[[[username[:password]@]location]/directory/source-file

Step 5 Exit the network module session by entering the following command:
NME-APA# logout

Are you sure? y

*** CLI session terminated due to timeout ***

Connection to 172.29.52.242 closed by foreign host.

Step 6 Telnet to the NME-APA’s router as follows:

Router# telnet 10.10.10.1

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

Press RETURN to get started!

router> enable

router#

Step 7 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module by pressing the Reset button on the NME-APA and
waiting for the SYS LED to turn green. Or you can use the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit shutdown

Do you want to proceed with shutdown?[confirm]Y

Use service module reset command to recover from shutdown.

WARNING: Confirm that the service-module status shows 'is Shutdown' before remo!

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-5
 Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of NME-APA-E3

Step 8 Confirm that the NME-APA has shut down by using the following command (Shutdown takes several
minutes):
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit status

Service Module is Cisco Integrated-Service-Engine1/0

Service Module supports session via TTY line 66
Service Module is Shutdown
Service Module status is not available

Note Before the module shuts down, the returned text reads “Service Module is being Shutdown.” When the
module has completely shut down, the returned text reads “Service Module is Shutdown”

Step 9 Do not Exit from the router telnet session. Replacing the NME-APA assumes that you have not exited
the session.

Replacing the NME-APA

To physically remove the old module and replace it with a new one, follow these steps.

Step 1 If you have not previously performed the “Saving the NME-APA Configuration File” procedure on
page 35-4, perform the procedure now.
• If you are replacing an NME-APA-E3 in a Cisco 3845 ISR continue to Step 2. If you are replacing
an NME-APA-E2, remove power from the router before you continue directly to Step 2.
Step 2 Unplug all network interface cables from the network module.
Step 3 Loosen the two captive screws holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 4 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 5 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels are
installed on the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 6 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane. Tighten the captive screws that secure the module in the slot.
Step 7 Reconnect the network interface cables that you removed in Step 2.
• If you are replacing an NME-APA-E3 in a 3845 ISR continue to Step 8. If you are replacing an
NME-APA-E2, power up the router before continuing to the next step.
Step 8 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power (PWR) and enable (EN) LEDs on the
front panel are also on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is
operational.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-6
 Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of NME-APA-E3

Step 9 Confirm that the NME-APA is running by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit status
Service Module is Cisco Integrated-Service-Engine1/0
Service Module supports session via TTY line 66
Service Module is in Steady state
Getting status from the Service Module, please wait.
Network Module Enhanced - Application Performance Assurance 0.1.2.1
NME-APA running on BRYCE

Step 10 Exit the router Telnet session:

Router # exit

Configuring the Replacement NME-APA

Follow these steps to configure the replacement module exactly like the original.
The module will not respond to Telnet commands until it has finished restarting. You must wait several
minutes before performing Step 2. The exact time depends on the system configuration.

Step 1 If you have not performed the “Saving the NME-APA Configuration File” procedure on page 35-4,
perform the procedure now.
Step 2 Telnet to the NME-APA:
Router# telnet 10.10.10.2

Trying 10.10.10.2...
Connected to 10.10.10.2.
Escape character is '^]'.

User Access Verification

Username:
Password:
NME-APA> enable

Password:

NME-APA#

Step 3 Restore the network module’s running configuration from the file saved in the “Saving the NME-APA
Configuration File” procedure on page 35-4 by using the following command from the service module
prompt:
NME-APA# copy ftp://[[[username[:password]@]location]/directory]/backup.config
NME-APA# copy /directory/source-file /directory/destination-file
NME-APA# copy running-config startup-config

Step 4 Exit the network module session by using the following command:
NME-APA# logout

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-7
 Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of NME-APA-E3

Confirming the Startup Configuration (Optional)

To confirm that the startup configuration file was restored properly, you can use a reload command on
the module.

Step 1 Telnet to the NME-APA’s router:

Router# telnet 10.10.10.1

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

Press RETURN to get started!

router> enable

router#

Step 2 Reload the NME-APA:

Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit reload
Do you want to proceed with reload?[confirm]
Trying to reload Service Module Integrated-Service-Engine1/0.
Step 3 After several minutes check the module status and logout:
router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit status
Service Module is Cisco Integrated-Service-Engine1/0
Service Module supports session via TTY line 66
Service Module is in Steady state
Getting status from the Service Module, please wait..
Network Module Enhanced - Application Performance Assurance 0.1.2.1
NME-APA running on BRYCE

router# logout
Connection to 172.29.52.241 closed by foreign host.

Step 4 After a few minutes, telnet to the NME-APA.

Note The module will not accept a telnet session until it has restarted the application which may take
several minutes.

Router# telnet 10.10.10.1

Trying 10.10.10.1...
Connected to 10.10.10.1.
Escape character is '^]'.

User Access Verification

Username:
Password:
NME-APA> enable

Password:

NME-APA#

Step 5 Check the running configuration and confirm that it is correct:

NME-APA# show running-config
#This is a general configuration file (running-config).

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-8
 Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Related Documents

#Created on 14:48:18 UTC MON April 9 2007

.
.
.
Step 6 Log out of the module:
NME-APA# logout
Are you sure? y

*** CLI session terminated due to timeout ***

Connection to 172.29.52.242 closed by foreign host.

Related Documents
For additional information, refer to the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

Application Performance Assurance NME-APA Device Console User Guide
software installation and administration, NME-APA Device Console Installation Guide
configuration, operation, and user guides NME-APA Device Console Release Notes
NME-APA User Guide
NME-APA Command Line Reference Guide
NME-APA Release Notes
NME-APA Trouble Shooting Guide
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps7045/tsd_products_support_category
_home.html
Cisco IOS software website and reference Cisco IOS Software
documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
gory_home.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of new
feedback and assistance and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-9
 Chapter 35 Connecting Application Performance Assurance Enhanced Network Modules
Related Documents

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

35-10
 C H A P T E R 36
Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

This chapter describes WAAS enhanced network modules for Cisco integrated services routers, and
contains the following sections:
• WAAS Enhanced Network Modules, page 36-1
• Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules, page 36-4
• Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure, page 36-6
• Additional References, page 36-8

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

The WAAS enhanced network module (NME-WAE family of devices) works together with other
wide-area application engines (WAEs) in your network to optimize TCP traffic over your network.
When client and server applications attempt to communicate with each other, the network intercepts and
redirects this traffic to the WAEs so that they can act on behalf of the client application and the
destination server. The WAEs examine the traffic and use built-in application policies to determine
whether to optimize the traffic or allow it to pass through your network unoptimized. Three models of
the WAAS enhanced network module are available. (See Figure 36-1 on page 36-2.)
• NME-WAE-302-K9
• NME-WAE-502-K9
• NME-WAE-522-K9

Warning To comply with the Telcordia GR-1089 NEBS standard for electromagnetic compatibility and safety,
connect the WAAS enhanced network modules (NME-WAE-302-K9, NME-WAE-502-K9 and
NME-WAE-522-K9) only to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cable. The intrabuilding cable must
be shielded and the shield must be grounded at both ends. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment
or subassembly must not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring.
These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as
described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The
addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces
metallically to OSP wiring.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 36-1
 Chapter 36 Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules
WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

All models ship from the factory with the following hardware preinstalled. (See Table 36-1.)

Table 36-1 Preinstalled Hardware in WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

Model Hard Disk Memory Daughter Card CompactFlash

NME-WAE-302-K9 80 GB (SATA) 512 MB Included 64 MB
NME-WAE-502-K9 120 GB (SATA) 1 GB Included 64 MB
NME-WAE-522-K9 160 GB (SATA) 2 GB Included 64 MB

Figure 36-1 NME-WAE Faceplate

NM-WAE-XXX-K9
XXX-XXXXX-XX XX

Never remove compact

SHUTDOWN: flash during operation
GRACEFUL <1 s LINK ACT Shut down
application
IMMEDIATE >4 s before removing or
power cycling.
NOT
EN

170900
DISK SYS SUPPORTED

CF GigE USB

CF CF card LINK ACT DISK EN

Shutdown SYS

CF Status of the CompactFlash

Off—CompactFlash is not used
Flashing—Application detected CompactFlash at boot up
SHUTDOWN Press the SHUTDOWN button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully shut down the
module. Press the SHUTDOWN button for more than 4 seconds to cause an immediate
module shutdown, which may impact file operations that are in progress.
LINK Status of Gigabit Ethernet link
On—Link is enabled
Off—Link is disabled
ACT Status of Gigabit Ethernet activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive
DISK Status of hard drive activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

36-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 36 Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules
WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

SYS Status of system shutdown

Note Do not remove power without first shutting down the application.

On—Application is stable.
Off—System is shut down and ready for host power down
Flashing—System shutdown is in progress
EN Status of the network module
On—Detected by the host Cisco IOS software and enabled
Off—Disabled

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 36-3
 Chapter 36 Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules
Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

Shutting Down WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

Press the reset button on the network module faceplate for less than 2 seconds to perform a graceful
shutdown of the network module before removing power from the router or before starting an online
insertion and removal (OIR) sequence on the router. The application may take up to 2 minutes to fully
shut down.

Caution If you press the shutdown button for more than 4 seconds, a nongraceful shutdown of the hard disk will
occur and may cause file corruption on the network module’s hard disk. After a nongraceful shutdown,
the HD and SYS LEDs remain lit. Press the shutdown button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully reboot
the network module.

Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

To connect WAAS enhanced network modules to an external device, use a straight-through two-pair
Category 5e unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable, and connect the RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet port on the
network module to a switch, hub, repeater, server, or other Gigabit Ethernet network device.

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems, Inc. These cables are widely available and must be
Category 5e cables.

Establishing a Gigabit Ethernet Internal Connection

Use the Cisco High-Speed Intrachassis Module Interconnect (HIMI) feature to establish a Gigabit
Ethernet internal logical connection between two network modules, or between an onboard
small-form-factor pluggable (SFP) Gigabit Ethernet module and a network module on Cisco 3825 and
Cisco 3845 routers.
Connections can be only established as follows:
• Between the Gigabit Ethernet port in an installed onboard SFP module on the Cisco 3825 and Cisco
3845 routers and a network module Gigabit Ethernet interface installed in network module slots 1
and 2 on a Cisco 3825 router or Cisco 3845 router
• Between Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in network module slots 1 and 2 on the Cisco 3825 router
• Between Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in network module slots 2 and 4 on the Cisco 3845 router

Note A module interconnection between the Gigabit Ethernet port on an SFP module and a network module
slot or a network module-to-network module cross-connection is permitted at any given time, but both
types of connections cannot exist at the same time.

Note Connections between the onboard Ethernet ports and network module slots are not supported.

For details about configuring HIMI connections, see the Cisco High-Speed Intrachassis Module
Interconnect (HIMI) Configuration Guide on Cisco.com:

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

36-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 36 Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules
Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5855/prod_configuration_guide09186a008068ea83.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 36-5
 Chapter 36 Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure

Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

Procedure
Some Cisco routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the router or affecting
the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal (OIR). OIR of a
module provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing information, and ensures
session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, WAAS enhanced network modules use hard disks. Online removal of
disks without proper shutdown can result in file system corruption and might render the disk
unusable. The operating system on the network module must be shut down in an orderly way before
removing or powering down the module.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with similar modules only. If you remove a module, install another module
exactly like it in its place. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any installed WAN or voice
interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.
To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps, with
the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a network module session using the following command:

Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

Press RETURN to get started!

Router> enable
Router#

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the network module using the following command from the
Router # prompt:
Router# copy running-config tftp tftp-server-address filename

Step 3 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.

Step 4 On the router, clear the integrated-service-engine console session using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit shutdown

Step 6 Shut down the network module interface:

Router (config)# interface integrated-service-engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

36-6 OL-2485-20
Chapter 36 Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure

Step 7 Unplug all network interface cables from the network module.
Step 8 Loosen the two captive screws holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 9 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 10 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill
the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 11 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 12 Reconnect the network interface cables previously removed in Step 7.
Step 13 Check that the network module LEDs are on and that the power (PWR) and enable (EN) LEDs on the
front panel are also on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that the new unit is
operational.
Step 14 Initiate a network module session with the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

ISE-network module now available

Press RETURN to get started!

Router> enable
Router#

Step 15 Restore the network module running configuration by using the following command from the service
module prompt:
Router# copy tftp running-config tftp-server-address filename

Step 16 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by x.

Step 17 On the router, clear the network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-service-engine slot/unit session clear

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 36-7
 Chapter 36 Connecting WAAS Enhanced Network Modules
Additional References

Additional References
For additional information, see the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

WAAS software installation and Configuring Cisco WAAS Enhanced Network Modules for Cisco Access Routers
administration, configuration, and
operation
Cisco WAAS software website and Cisco WAAS Software
reference documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6870/tsd_products_support_series_ho
me.html
Cisco IOS software website and reference Cisco IOS Software
documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
gory_home.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of new
feedback and assistance and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

36-8 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 37
Connecting Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway
Enhanced Network Modules

This chapter describes Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway enhanced network modules for
Cisco integrated services routers, and contains the following sections:
• Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules, page 37-1
• Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure, page 37-3
• Additional References, page 37-5

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules

The Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway enhanced network module provides centralized management for
larger Cisco Unity Express voicemail networks. The Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway enhanced
network module:
• Intelligently routes voicemail messages
• Exchanges subscriber and directory information among the voicemail systems
• Provides interoperability with third party voicemail vendors within a voice messaging network
There are two versions of the Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway enhanced network module:
• NME-UMG supports up to 250 nodes.
• NME-UMG-EC supports up to 1000 nodes.

Note Cisco recommends attaching an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to the router that houses the Cisco
Unified Messaging Gateway enhanced network module. The UPS should include a signaling mechanism
that directs the router to shut down the Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway application properly and then
powers off the router.
Cisco IOS Release 12.3(4)T and later supports automatic switchover to the UPS device.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 37-1
 Chapter 37 Connecting Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules
Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules

Note The Gigabit Ethernet port and compact flash (CF) slot, though available on the hardware, are not
supported by the Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway enhanced network module. The CF slot has a metal
cover.

The Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway enhanced network module LEDs are shown in Figure 37-1 and
described in Table 37-1.

Figure 37-1 NME-UMG Faceplate

NME-UMG
XXX-XXXXX-XX XX

Never remove compact

SHUTDOWN: flash during operation
GRACEFUL <1 s LINK ACT Shut down
application
IMMEDIATE >4 s before removing or
power cycling.
NOT
EN

232081
DISK SYS SUPPORTED

CF GigE USB

DISK EN
Shutdown SYS

Table 37-1 NME-UMG LED Descriptions

SHUTDOWN Press the SHUTDOWN button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully shut down the
module. Press the SHUTDOWN button for more than 4 seconds to cause an immediate
module shutdown, which may impact file operations that are in progress.
DISK Status of hard drive activity:
On—Active.
Off—Inactive.
SYS Status of system shutdown
Note Do not remove power without first shutting down the application.

On—Application is stable.
Off—System is shut down and ready for host power-down.
Flashing—System shutdown is in progress.
EN Status of the network module:
On—Detected by the host Cisco IOS software and enabled.
Off—Disabled.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

37-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 37 Connecting Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure

Shutting Down Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules

Press the SHUTDOWN button on the network module faceplate for less than 2 seconds to perform a
graceful shutdown of the network module before removing power from the router or before starting an
online insertion and removal (OIR) sequence on the router. The application may take up to 2 minutes to
fully shut down.

Caution If you press the SHUTDOWN button for more than 4 seconds, a nongraceful shutdown of the hard disk
will occur and may corrupt files on the network module’s hard disk. After a nongraceful shutdown, the
HD and SYS LEDs remain lit. Press the SHUTDOWN button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully reboot
the network module.

Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

Procedure
Some Cisco routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the router or affecting
the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal (OIR). OIR of a
module provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing information, and ensures
session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway enhanced network modules use
hard disks. Online removal of network modules without proper shutdown can cause file system
corruption and might render the disk unusable. You must shut down the operating system on the
network module in an orderly way before removing or powering down the module.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with identical modules only. If you remove a module, install in its place
another module exactly like the one you removed. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any
installed WAN or voice interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like it.

For descriptions of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.
To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps, with
the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a network module session by using the following command:

Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

SE-Module> enable
SE-Module#

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the network module by using the following command from the
SE-Module# prompt:
SE-Module# copy running-config tftp:
Address or name or remote host? tftp-server-address

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 37-3
 Chapter 37 Connecting Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure

Destination filename? filename

Note Depending on the specific TFTP server you are using, you might need to create a file with the
same name on the TFTP server and verify that the file has the correct permissions before
transferring the running configuration to the TFTP server.

Step 3 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by pressing x.
Step 4 On the router, clear the integrated-Service-Engine console session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit shutdown

Step 6 Shut down the network module interface:

Router (config)# interface integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Step 7 Loosen the two captive screws that are holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 8 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 9 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill
the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 10 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 11 Check that the network module LEDs are on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that
the new unit is operational.
Step 12 Initiate a network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

SE-Module> enable
SE-Module#

Step 13 Restore the network module running configuration by using the following command from the service
module prompt:
SE-Module# copy tftp: running-config
Address or name or remote host? tftp-server-address
Source filename? filename

Step 14 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by pressing x.
Step 15 On the router, clear the network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit session clear

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

37-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 37 Connecting Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules
Additional References

Additional References
For additional information, see the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

Regulatory compliance and safety Cisco Network Modules and Interface Cards Regulatory Compliance and Safety
information Information
Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps8605/tsd_products_support_series_ho
application software website and reference me.html
documentation
Cisco IOS software website and reference http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/tsd_products_support_cate
documentation gory_home.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of new
feedback and assistance and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/abtunicd/136957.htm

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 37-5
 Chapter 37 Connecting Cisco Unified Messaging Gateway Enhanced Network Modules
Additional References

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

37-6 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 38
Connecting 8-Port T1/E1 Network Modules

This chapter describes how to connect 8-port T1/E1 network modules for Cisco integrated service
routers. It contains the following sections:
• Cisco T1/E1 Network Module, page 38-1
• Safety Warnings for the Cisco T1/E1 Network Module, page 38-1
• Cisco T1/E1 Network Module LEDs, page 38-2
• Connecting a T1/E1 Network Module to a Network, page 38-3

Cisco T1/E1 Network Module

The Cisco T1/E1 network module provides 8 ports of clear channel or channelized T1 and E1 support to
Cisco 3800 series integrated services routers:
• Cisco 3825
• Cisco 3845
T1 support has integrated CSU/DSU capability.

Safety Warnings for the Cisco T1/E1 Network Module

The following safety warnings apply to installation procedures involving the Cisco T1/E1 network
module. Translations of these warnings are available in the Cisco Network Modules and Interface Cards
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document, which is available online.

Warning To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network
voltage (TNV) circuits. LAN ports contain SELV circuits, and WAN ports contain TNV circuits. Some
LAN and WAN ports both use RJ-45 connectors. Use caution when connecting cables. Statement 1021

Warning Hazardous network voltages are present in WAN ports regardless of whether power to the unit is OFF
or ON. To avoid electric shock, use caution when working near WAN ports. When detaching cables,
detach the end away from the unit first. Statement 1026

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 38-1
 Chapter 38 Connecting 8-Port T1/E1 Network Modules
Cisco T1/E1 Network Module LEDs

Cisco T1/E1 Network Module LEDs

The T1/E1 network module has 2 LEDs for each port that indicate the functionality of the T1 or E1
connection. Figure 38-1 shows the front panel and LEDs. The LEDs are described in Table 38-1.

Figure 38-1 8-Port T1/E1 Network Module Front Panel

3 4

NM-
8CE1T1-
PRI 1
CD/LP P7 AL CD/LP P6 AL CD/LP P5 AL CD/LP P4 AL CD/LP P3 AL CD/LP P2 AL CD/LP P1 AL CD/LP P0 AL

EN

170622
2 5

1 RJ-48C connector 2 Port number

3 CD/LP LED (bicolor LED) 4 AL LED
5 EN LED

CD/LP LEDs are bicolor LEDs with both green and yellow emitters.

Table 38-1 T1/E1 Network Module LEDs

LED Color Description

CD/LP Green/Yellow Off: No carrier detected
Green on (CD): Carrier detected
Yellow on (LP): Port in loopback mode
AL Yellow Off: No alarms
On: Port in alarm mode
EN Green Off: Network module does not pass self-test and is not available to
the router. There is a failure with either the module or the slot.
On: Network module has passed self-test and is available to the
router.
The network module may be removed from router when the
EN LED is off.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

38-2 OL-2485-20
Chapter 38 Connecting 8-Port T1/E1 Network Modules
Connecting a T1/E1 Network Module to a Network

Connecting a T1/E1 Network Module to a Network

Use straight-through RJ-48C-to-RJ-48C cables to connect T1/E1 ports to RJ-48C jacks.
To connect a T1/E1 port to the network, complete the following steps:

Step 1 Connect one end of the cable to a T1/E1 port on the network module.
Step 2 Connect the other end to the RJ-48C jack at your site, as shown in Figure 38-2.

Figure 38-2 Connecting a T1/E1 Port to an RJ-48C Jack

T1/E1 port (RJ-48C)

NM-
8CE1T1-
PRI

CD/LP P7 AL CD/LP P6 AL CD/LP

P5 AL CD/LP P4 AL
CD/LP P3 AL CD/LP P2 AL CD/LP
P1 AL CD/LP P0 AL

EN

Straight-through
RJ-48C-to-RJ-48C
cable
170626

RJ-48C jack

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 38-3
 Chapter 38 Connecting 8-Port T1/E1 Network Modules
Connecting a T1/E1 Network Module to a Network

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

38-4 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 39
Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway
Network Modules

This document provides hardware information about the EVM-IPVS-16A network module, which
enables Cisco integrated services routers to capture analog video signals. The EVM-IPVS-16A network
module supports up to 16 simultaneous composite video inputs, such as video surveillance cameras. The
EVM-IPVS-16A network module also provides alarm input detection, control relay outputs, and RS-485
serial communication interfaces. Figure 39-1 shows the EVM-IPVS-16A network module faceplate.

Figure 39-1 Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Module (EVM-IPVS-16A) Faceplate

EVM
IPVS-16A

20 11

170291
3210 1

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Contents
• Information About the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module, page 39-2
• How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module, page 39-5
• Related Documents, page 39-12

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 39-1
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
Information About the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

Information About the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

• You need a router that supports the EVM-IPVS-16A network module. For a list of supported
platforms, see the Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Module (EVM-IPVS-16A) Data Sheet.

Warning Equipment connected to outdoor cameras must be permanently grounded in accordance with national
and local codes. Statement 374

Warning Hazardous voltages may be present in the outdoor camera cables under fault conditions. Disconnect
all cables from the outdoor cameras before servicing this equipment. Statement 376

Warning This unit is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted access area can be
accessed only through the use of a special tool, lock and key, or other means of security. Statement
1017

Warning Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace, or service this equipment.
Statement 1030

Note The compact flash module installed in the EVM-IPVS-16A network module is not field-replaceable.

Note For software-related prerequisites and restrictions, see the Configuring the Analog Video Gateway for
Integrated Service Routers Cisco IOS feature module.

Note For EVM-IPVS-16A network module features and benefits, supported hardware and software, and other
product information, see the Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Module (EVM-IPVS-16A) Data
Sheet.

Video Ports
16 video ports are provided, video ports 0 and 1 can be configured for input or output. The remaining 14
video ports can be configured for input only.

RS-485 Serial Communication Interfaces

The EVM-IPVS-16A network module supports a half-duplex, two-wire RS-485 communication
network, which sometimes is called a ring. The EIA/TIA RS-485 communications standard supports up
to 32 devices (driver/receiver pairs) on a cable of up to 4,000 feet. The EVM-IPVS-16A network module
has two RS-485 ports, supporting up to 64 devices. The EVM-IPVS-16A network module typically acts
as the master for each of the two RS-485 networks.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

39-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
Information About the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

The RS-485 ports can be used to control camera pan, tilt, and zoom (PTZ) functions, as well as other
RS-485 devices. Because PTZ camera types use different protocols, the EVM-IPVS-16A network
module only supports pass-through mode. In pass-through mode PTZ commands and other data will not
be interpreted.

Alarm Inputs and Control Relay Outputs

The EVM-IPVS-16A network module supports eight contact closure interfaces. Interfaces A0, A1, A2,
and A3 can be configured as alarm input or relay output, the other interfaces are input only. They are
used to detect contact trigger events and control external devices.
In most cases, the contact closure interfaces will be connected to a patch panel through the two terminal
block ports on the network module. The patch panel can provide the bias to the circuit.

Caution The alarm signal input and output (I/O) connections on this unit are intended only for connection to
NEC/CEC Class 2 or equivalent circuit. This means that the voltages applied to alarm signal I/O
connections should not exceed 42.4 Vpk or 60 Vdc and it should be a limited/fused power source. For
more details on Class 2 circuits, refer to the National Electrical Code/Canadian Electrical Code.

Table 39-1 Alarm Input and Output Interface Specifications

Specification Range
Alarm Input Sense Voltage Range 12 V to 24 V
Alarm Output Current Load Range 0 mA to 170 mA

Gigabit Ethernet Port

The external Gigabit Ethernet port is disabled by default. If you enable the Gigabit Ethernet interface, it
can act as a routable interface in your network.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 39-3
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
Information About the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module Connectors

The physical connectors that appear on the EVM-IPVS-16A network module are shown in Figure 39-2
and described in Table 39-2.

Figure 39-2 EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module Connectors

2 4

EVM
IPVS-16A

20 11

230442
10 1

3
1

Table 39-2 EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module Connectors

Figure
Ref. Connector Type Connects To
1 Terminal block 0 10-input terminal block (ports 10-position terminal block connector (provided)
A0-A3 and S0)
2 Terminal block 1 10-input terminal block (ports 10-position terminal block connector (provided)
A4-A7 and S1)
3 Gigabit Ethernet (labeled RJ-45 female connector Straight-through two-pair Category 5
GigE) unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable
4 Video (labeled VIDEO) DB-37 female connector DB-37 to BNC video breakout cable (provided)

EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module LEDs

The Cisco analog video gateway network module (EVM-IPVS-16A) has LEDs which denote the status
of the network module, shown in Figure 39-3 and described in Table 39-3.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

39-4 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

Figure 39-3 EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module LEDs

EVM
IPVS-16A

20 11

230443
10 1

1 2 4
3

Table 39-3 EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module LED Descriptions

Figure
Ref. LED State Meaning Possible Causes and Corrective Actions
1 LINK Green Gigabit Ethernet link is up. Normal indication. No action required.
Off Gigabit Ethernet link is down. Check Gigabit Ethernet cable connections.
2 ACT Amber Gigabit Ethernet link is actively Normal indication. No action required.
transmitting or receiving.
Off Gigabit Ethernet link is not actively Normal indication. No action required.
transmitting or receiving.
3 Video Green There is an active video session for this Normal indication. No action required.
signal port, and input video is detected.
ports Amber There is an active video session for this Check the camera is on, then check the video
0-15 port, but no input video is detected. port cable connections.
Off There is no active video session for this Check the video port cable connections.
port.
See the “Connecting the EVM-IPVS-16A
Network Module to the Network” section on
page 39-7.
4 EN On The router’s Cisco IOS software recognizes Normal indication. No action required.
the network module.
Off The router’s Cisco IOS software does not Verify that the network module is properly
recognize the network module. installed in the router chassis. See the “Installing
Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access
Routers” chapter.

How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network

Module
This section contains the following procedures, each of which may or may not be required, depending
on which tasks your service provider performs for you:
• Installing the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module in the Router Chassis, page 39-6
• Connecting the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module to the Network, page 39-7

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 39-5
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

• Performing Online Insertion and Removal of the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module, page 39-9

Installing the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module in the Router Chassis

To install the EVM-IPVS-16A network module in the router chassis, see the “Installing Cisco Network
Modules in Cisco Access Routers” chapter of the Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide.

Note The EVM-IPVS-16A network module can only be installed in slots that support extension modules. For
information about which slots support extension modules, see Table 1-1 on page 1-5

Wiring the Terminal Block Connectors

Wire the provided terminal block connectors using the pinout information provided in Table 39-4. (See
Figure 39-4.)

Note The wires used to connect to the terminal block are required to be between 26 AWG and 18 AWG.

Figure 39-4 Wiring the Terminal Block Connectors

230462

Table 39-4 lists each pin on the terminal block, and the corresponding port information.

Tip When you wire the terminal block connector, label each wire with the pin number, so you can easily
connect the wires to the alarm or RS-485 devices in your network.

Note In Table 39-4 a plus (+) sign and minus (–) sign are used to note the polarity for the contact closure and
RS-485 ports. For contact closure ports, pins noted with a plus sign must be connected to positive
potential; pins noted with a minus sign must be connected to negative potential. For RS-485 ports, pins
noted with a plus sign must be connected to an RS-485 device non-inverting terminal; pins noted with a
minus sign must be connected to an RS-485 device inverting terminal.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

39-6 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

Table 39-4 EVM-IPVS-16A Terminal Block Pinouts

Pin Type
Terminal Block 0 (Lower)
1 RS-485 S0 +
2 RS-485 S0 –
3 In-Out A0 +
4 In-Out A0 –
5 In-Out A1 +
6 In-Out A1 –
7 In-Out A2 +
8 In-Out A2 –
9 In-Out A3 +
10 In-Out A3 –
Terminal Block 1 (Upper)
11 RS-485 S1 +
12 RS-485 S1 –
13 In A4 +
14 In A4 –
15 In A5 +
16 In A5 –
17 In A6 +
18 In A6 –
19 In A7 +
20 In A7 –

Connecting the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module to the Network

This section describes how to connect the EVM-IPVS-16A network module to devices in the video
surveillance network.

Note If an installation technician has already connected the EVM-IPVS-16A to the devices in your network,
then do not perform this task. Instead, proceed directly to the software configuration for your
EVM-IPVS-16A network module. See the Configuring the Analog Video Gateway for Integrated Service
Routers Cisco IOS feature module.

Prerequisites
• Install the EVM-IPVS-16A network module in the router chassis. See the “Installing Cisco Network
Modules in Cisco Access Routers” chapter of the Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation
Guide.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 39-7
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

• Wire the provided terminal block connectors. See the “Wiring the Terminal Block Connectors”
section on page 39-6.

Steps
To connect the EVM-IPVS-16A network module to the network, follow these steps:

Step 1 Take the DB-37 end of the provided DB-37 to BNC video breakout cable, and connect it to the VIDEO
connector on the EVM-IPVS-16A network module.

Figure 39-5 Connecting the Video Breakout Cable to the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

230459
Warning Equipment connected to outdoor cameras must be permanently grounded in accordance with national
and local codes. Statement 374

Step 2 Connect the BNC ends of the video breakout cable to the cameras in your network. The cable ends are
labeled with the corresponding port number (0-15).
Step 3 After you have wired the provided terminal block connectors according to the pinout information
provided in Table 39-4, connect the terminal block connectors to the terminal block on the
EVM-IPVS-16A network module and tighten the screws using a small slotted screwdriver.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

39-8 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

Figure 39-6 Connecting the Terminal Block Connectors to the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

230460
Step 4 Connect the other end of the wired terminal block connectors to the RS-485 and contact closure devices
in your network. In most cases, the wires will be connected to a patch panel.
Step 5 (Optional) To connect the EVM-IPVS-16A network module to an external device, use a straight-through
two-pair Category 5e unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable, and connect the RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet port
on the network module to a switch, hub, repeater, server, or other Gigabit Ethernet network device.

What to Do Next
Proceed to the software configuration for your EVM-IPVS-16A network module. See the Configuring
the Analog Video Gateway for Integrated Service Routers Cisco IOS feature module.

Performing Online Insertion and Removal of the EVM-IPVS-16A Network

Module
The online insertion and removal (OIR) feature enables some Cisco modular access routers to support
the replacement of network modules without switching off the router or affecting the operation of other
interfaces. Also, routing information is maintained during OIR of network modules.

Note If your router does not support OIR, do not perform this task to replace your EVM-IPVS-16A network
module. Instead, see the “Installing Cisco Network Modules in Cisco Access Routers” chapter.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 39-9
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

Restrictions
• Only the Cisco 3845 router supports OIR of the EVM-IPVS-16A network module.
• All connections made through the EVM-IPVS-16A network module are reset during OIR.
• You must perform OIR with similar modules. If you remove a network module, install another
network module exactly like it in its place.

Steps
To perform OIR of the EVM-IPVS-16A network module in your router, follow these steps:

Step 1 Initiate a console session with your router.

Step 2 Enter configuration mode and shut down the interface:
Router> enable
Router# configure terminal
Router(config)# interface video-Service-Engine slot/0
Router(config-if)# shut
Router(config-if)# shutdown
Router(config-if)# exit

Step 3 Disconnect the terminal block connector cables from the terminal blocks on the EVM-IPVS-16A
network module.

Warning Hazardous voltages may be present in the outdoor camera cables under fault conditions. Disconnect
all cables from the outdoor cameras before servicing this equipment. Statement 376

Step 4 Disconnect the DB-37 to BNC video breakout cable from the VIDEO connector on the EVM-IPVS-16A
network module.
Step 5 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the captive mounting screws on the network
module faceplate.

Caution To avoid damaging the network module, always handle the network module by the handle or faceplate.
Do not touch the circuit board.

Step 6 Using the module handle, pull the network module from the router slot. (See Figure 39-7.)

Figure 39-7 Removing a Network Module

ACT

WO

SERIAL
230445

EVM
IPVS-16A

ETHERNET 0 20
11

3210
1

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

39-10 OL-2485-20
Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
How to Install, Connect, or Replace the EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module

Step 7 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis walls or slot divider and slide it
gently into the slot. (See Figure 39-8.)

Figure 39-8 Installing a Network Module

ACT
WO

SERIAL

230444
EVM
IPVS-16A

ETHERNET 0 20
11

3210
1

Step 8 Using the network module handle, push the EVM-IPVS-16A network module into place until you feel
the edge connector seat securely into the connector on the router backplane. The network module
faceplate should contact the chassis rear panel.
Step 9 Using a number 1 Phillips or flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the captive mounting screws on the network
module faceplate.
Step 10 Connect the DB-37 to BNC video breakout cable to the VIDEO connector on the EVM-IPVS-16A
network module.
Step 11 Connect the terminal block connector cables to the terminal blocks on the EVM-IPVS-16A network
module.
Step 12 Confirm that the network module LEDs come on. For more information about the LEDs, see the
“EVM-IPVS-16A Network Module LEDs” section on page 39-4.
Step 13 Initiate a console session with your router.
Step 14 Enter configuration mode, and restart the network module:
Router> enable
Router# configure terminal
Router(config)# interface video-Service-Engine slot /0
Router(config-if)# no shutdown
Router(config-if)# exit
Router# service-module video-Service-Engine slot /0 reset

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 39-11
 Chapter 39 Connecting Cisco Analog Video Gateway Network Modules
Related Documents

What to Do Next

Configure the new EVM-IPVS-16A network module, if changes are necessary. See the Configuring the
Analog Video Gateway for Integrated Service Routers Cisco IOS feature module.

Related Documents
Related Topic Document Title or URL
Regulatory compliance and safety Cisco Network Modules and Interface Cards Regulatory Compliance and
information Safety Information
Cisco Analog Video Gateway software Cisco Network Modules Configuration Guides
website and reference documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_installat
ion_and_configuration_guides_list.html
Cisco Video Management and Storage Cisco Network Modules Configuration Guides
System software website and reference http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_installat
documentation ion_and_configuration_guides_list.html
Cisco Video Management and Storage Cisco Network Modules Install and Upgrade Guides
System network module (NME-VMSS) http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/prod_installation_
hardware documentation guides_list.html
Cisco product support and technical Product Support
documentation http://www.cisco.com/web/psa/products/index.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of
feedback and assistance new and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

39-12 OL-2485-20
 C H A P T E R 40
Cisco Video Management and Storage System
Enhanced Network Modules

This chapter describes Cisco Video Management and Storage System enhanced network modules for
Cisco integrated services routers, and contains the following sections:
• Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced Network Modules, page 40-1
• Connecting Cisco Video Management and Storage System Network Modules, page 40-3
• Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure, page 40-4
• Additional References, page 40-6

Tip To determine whether your Cisco router supports a specific network module, see Table 1-6 on page 1-16.

Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced

Network Modules
The Cisco Video Management and Storage System enhanced network module is a network video
recorder for Cisco integrated services routers, which archives video captured by the Cisco Analog Video
Gateway network module (EVM-IPVS-16A) or other cameras connected to your network.
All models ship from the factory with the following hardware preinstalled. (See Table 40-1.)

Table 40-1 Preinstalled Hardware in Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced
Network Modules

Model Processor Hard Disk Memory Compact Flash

NME-VMSS-16 1.0 GHz 120 GB (SATA) 512 MB 256 MB
NME-VMSS-HP16 1.4 GHz 160 GB (SATA) 2 GB 256 MB
NME-VMSS-HP32 1.4 GHz 160 GB (SATA) 2 GB 256 MB

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 40-1
 Chapter 40 Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced Network Modules
Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced Network Modules

The Cisco Video Management and Storage System enhanced network module LEDs are shown in
Figure 40-1 and described in Table 40-2.

Figure 40-1 NME-VMSS Faceplate

NME-VMSS-HP32
XXX-XXXXX-XX XX

Never remove compact

SHUTDOWN: flash during operation
GRACEFUL <1 s LINK ACT Shut down
application
IMMEDIATE >4 s before removing or
power cycling.
NOT
EN

232083
DISK SYS SUPPORTED

CF GigE USB

CF CF card LINK ACT DISK EN

Shutdown SYS
Table 40-2 NME-VMSS LED Description

CF Status of the Compact Flash

Off—Compact Flash is not used
Flashing—Application detected Compact Flash at boot up
SHUTDOWN Press the SHUTDOWN button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully shut down the
module. Press the SHUTDOWN button for more than 4 seconds to cause an immediate
module shutdown, which may affect file operations that are in progress.
LINK Status of Gigabit Ethernet link
On—Link is enabled
Off—Link is disabled
ACT Status of Gigabit Ethernet activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive
DISK Status of hard drive activity
On—Active
Off—Inactive
SYS Status of system shutdown
Note Do not remove power without first shutting down the application.

On—Application is stable.
Off—System is shut down and ready for host power-down
Flashing—System shutdown is in progress
EN Status of the network module
On—Detected by the host Cisco IOS software and enabled.
Off—Disabled.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

40-2 OL-2485-20
 Chapter 40 Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced Network Modules
Connecting Cisco Video Management and Storage System Network Modules

Shutting Down Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced

Network Modules
Press the SHUTDOWN button on the network module faceplate for less than 2 seconds to perform a
graceful shutdown of the network module before removing power from the router or before starting an
online insertion and removal (OIR) sequence on the router. The application may take up to 2 minutes to
fully shut down.

Caution If you press the SHUTDOWN button for more than 4 seconds, a nongraceful shutdown of the hard disk
will occur and may corrupt files on the network module’s hard disk. After a nongraceful shutdown, the
HD and SYS LEDs remain lit. Press the SHUTDOWN button for less than 2 seconds to gracefully reboot
the network module.

Connecting Cisco Video Management and Storage System

Network Modules
To connect Cisco Video Management and Storage System network modules to an external device, use a
straight-through two-pair Category 5e unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable, and connect the RJ-45
Gigabit Ethernet port on the network module to a switch, hub, repeater, server, or other Gigabit Ethernet
network device.

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco. These cables are widely available and must be Category 5e
cables.

Connecting to an External Storage Device using iSCSI

The Cisco Video Management and Storage System enhanced network module supports an Internet SCSI
(iSCSI) connection to an external storage device. The Gigabit Ethernet port on the faceplate of the
network module and the Gigabit Ethernet port on the router can be configured as iSCSI connections.
To connect Cisco Video Management and Storage System enhanced network modules to an external
storage device using iSCSI, use a straight-through two-pair Category 5e unshielded twisted-pair (UTP)
cable.

Note RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco. These cables are widely available and must be Category 5e
cables.

For details about configuring iSCSI connections, see the TBD (software document) on Cisco.com:
TBD

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 40-3
 Chapter 40 Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure

Establishing a Gigabit Ethernet Internal Connection

Use the Cisco High-Speed Intrachassis Module Interconnect (HIMI) feature to establish a Gigabit
Ethernet internal logical connection between two network modules, or between an onboard
small-form-factor pluggable (SFP) Gigabit Ethernet module and a network module on a Cisco 3825
router or a Cisco 3845 router.
Connections can be established only as follows:
• Between the Gigabit Ethernet port in an installed onboard SFP module on the Cisco 3825 router or
Cisco 3845 router
• Between Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in network module slots 1 and 2 on a Cisco 3825 router
• Between Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in network module slots 2 and 4 on a Cisco 3845 router

Note A module interconnection between the Gigabit Ethernet port on an SFP module on a Cisco 3825 router
or a Cisco 3845 router and a network module slot or a network module-to-network module
cross-connection is permitted at any given time. However, both types of connections cannot be
implemented at the same time.

Note Connections between the onboard Ethernet ports and network module slots are not supported.

For details about configuring High-Speed Intrachassis Module Interconnect (HIMI) connections, see the
Cisco High-Speed Intrachassis Module Interconnect (HIMI) Configuration Guide on Cisco.com:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps5855/prod_configuration_guide09186a008068ea83.html

Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules

Procedure
Some Cisco routers allow you to replace network modules without switching off the router or affecting
the operation of other interfaces. This feature is called online insertion and removal (OIR). OIR of a
module provides uninterrupted operation to network users, maintains routing information, and ensures
session preservation.

Caution Unlike other network modules, Cisco Video Management and Storage System enhanced network
modules use hard disks. Online removal of network modules without proper shutdown can cause file
system corruption and might render the disk unusable. You must shut down the operating system on
the network module in an orderly way before removing or powering down the module.

Caution Cisco routers support OIR with identical modules only. If you remove a module, install in its place
another module exactly like the one you removed. If you remove a 2-slot module (along with any
installed WAN or voice interface cards), install another module and card combination exactly like the
one you removed.

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

40-4 OL-2485-20
Chapter 40 Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced Network Modules
Online Insertion and Removal of Cisco Network Modules Procedure

For a description of informational and error messages that may appear on the console during this
procedure, see the hardware installation guide for your router.
To perform online removal of a network module and insertion of a replacement, follow these steps, with
the router in privileged EXEC mode:

Step 1 Initiate a network module session by using the following command:

Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2065 ... Open

SE-Module> enable
SE-Module#

Step 2 Save the running configuration of the network module by using the following command from the
SE-Module# prompt:
SE-Module# copy running-config tftp tftp-server-address filename

Step 3 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by pressing x.
Step 4 On the router, clear the integrated-Service-Engine console session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit session clear

Step 5 Perform a graceful shutdown of the network module disk drive by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit shutdown

Step 6 Shut down the network module interface:

Router (config)# interface integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit
Router (config-if)# shutdown
Router (config-if)# exit

Step 7 Unplug all network interface cables from the network module.
Step 8 Loosen the two captive screws that are holding the network module in the chassis slot.
Step 9 Slide the network module out of the slot.
Step 10 Align the replacement network module with the guides in the chassis slot, and slide it gently into the slot.

Note If the router is not fully configured with network modules, make sure that blank panels fill
the unoccupied chassis slots to provide proper airflow.

Step 11 Push the module into place until you feel its edge connector mate securely with the connector on the
backplane.
Step 12 Reconnect the network interface cables that you removed in Step 7.
Step 13 Check that the network module LEDs are on. This inspection ensures that connections are secure and that
the new unit is operational.
Step 14 Initiate a network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit session

Trying 10.10.10.1, 2129 ... Open

SE-Module> enable
SE-Module#

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

OL-2485-20 40-5
 Chapter 40 Cisco Video Management and Storage System Enhanced Network Modules
Additional References

Step 15 Restore the running configuration of the network module by using the following command from the
service module prompt:
SE-Module# copy tftp running-config tftp-server-address filename

Step 16 Exit the network module session by pressing Control-Shift-6, followed by pressing x.
Step 17 On the router, clear the network module session by using the following command:
Router# service-module integrated-Service-Engine slot/unit session clear

Additional References
For additional information, see the following documents and resources.

Related Topic Document Title

Regulatory compliance and safety Cisco Network Modules and Interface Cards Regulatory Compliance and Safety
information Information
Cisco Analog Video Gateway software Cisco Network Modules Configuration Guides
website and reference documentation http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_installati
on_and_configuration_guides_list.html
Cisco Video Management and Storage Cisco Network Modules Configuration Guides
System software website and reference http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/products_installati
documentation on_and_configuration_guides_list.html
Cisco Video Management and Storage Cisco Network Modules Install and Upgrade Guides
System network module (NME-VMSS) http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps2797/prod_installation_g
hardware documentation uides_list.html
Cisco product support and technical Product Support
documentation http://www.cisco.com/web/psa/products/index.html
Technical documentation, including What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation (including monthly listings of new
feedback and assistance and revised documents) at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html

Cisco Network Modules Hardware Installation Guide

40-6 OL-2485-20